Full text of "Crown and realm : a review of the British Empire, its builders and rulers"

See other formats

1 j<

1 ;

!• ill! i ' '

•

!
|

ii !
1

i! !

ft ft %

'l^^TL ^V^^r^i

^jfcSSfc.

r^r 'Tjr

ft
ft

ft * ft ft

.%•

7?.

4.2.

l si -a

Presented to the
LIBRARY of the

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO

ONTARIO

CROWN AND REALM

A REVIEW OF THE BRITISH EMPIRE
ITS BUILDERS AND RULERS

SOUVENIR OF THE

CORONATION

KING GEORGE V.

With the Compliments of

BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co., LONDON

NEW YORK MONTREAL SYDNEY CAPE TOWN MILAN
SHANGHAI BUENOS AIRES

2 19

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Acknowledgment is made to the following owners of copyright for
kind permission to reproduce the photographs and plates enumerated : —
Messrs. BASSANO (page 145) ; Messrs. CHAPMAN & HALL (pages 73. 74.
76); Messrs. CHATTO & WINDUS (page 56); Messrs. CONSTABLE (pages
57, 58, 60. 61) ; Messrs. W. & D. DOWNEY (pages 13. 14, 15, 18, 107, 148) ;
Messrs. ELLIOTT & FRY (pages 140, 141, 156. 158. ICO, 161, 163, 164, 167,
169, 172, 177, 178. 179, 181, 182, 183, 184, 186, 188, 150, 193, 194, 196, 207,
208, 210, 212, 214. 216, 217, 218, 219. 220, 221, 222. 229, 238. 239. 241, 242,
244, 245, 247. 249); Messrs. FORTESCUE WETHERMAN & Co. (page 25) ;
the PROPRIETORS of " The Graphic " (pages 16, 17) ; Messrs. LAFAYETTE
(pages 197, 255) ; The LONDON NEWS AGENCY PHOTOS, LTD. (43, 45, 46,
158, 160, 191, 201, 221. 231, 259, 260, 261, 264. etc.); The LONDON
ELECTROTYPE AGENCY (pages 174, 223) ; Messrs. HAINES (page 160) ;
Messrs. ISAAC PITMAN & SONS (pages 42. 63, 64, 65, 66, 68. 78) ; Messrs.
RUSSELL (pages 108, 146, 147, 228, 252); Mr. H. X. KING (pages 21,
22) ; The LONDON STEREOSCOPIC Co. (pages 24, 28, 29, 30, 137, 143, -144) ;
The RELIGIOUS TRACT SOCIETY (page 77); Messrs. SEELEY & Co.
("Church's Stories of English History") (page 55); Mr. E. WALKER
page 136) ; Messrs. VALENTINE & SONS (pages 47, 48).

•— ^

SECTIONAL INDEX

(For full index, see pages 479-484)

Pages

Introduction 9—11

Portraits and Pictures 13—30

Patron Saints of the United Kingdom 31—35

Evolution of National Arms 37 — 40

Coronation Regalia and Scenes of the Ceremony 41 — 48

Some Notable Coronation Ceremonies 49 — 82

Some Wearers of the British Crown 83—108

Some Builders of the British Empire 109—148

The British Empire and some of its Rulers 149—274

The King's Tours 275—277

The Evolution of Weapons for the Battle of Life 279—294

The March of Science 295—357

Weapons of Precision produced by Science and Industry ... 359—378

Some Historic Flights by Airship and Aeroplane 379—389

Modern Methods in Photography 391—401

The ' Wellcome ' Materia Medics Farm 402—409

Historical Medical Equipments 410 — 439

Welfare Work . .. 440—478

" That was a great moment
in the history of human
institutions when, for the
first time, soldiers upon the
battlefield, clearing a space
with their swords, lifted
their leader upon a shield
and acclaimed him their
King — Kiinig — ablest and
most knowing one."

INTRODUCTION

KING GEORGE V. takes his seat upon the throne of his
ancestors by hereditary right, and also by the deliberate
choice, and with the enthusiastic approval, of the entire race
over which he rules. The solemnity of his Coronation is
the natural expression of the desire to emphasise and
commemorate a pact of fealty of twofold character — the
loyalty of Britons to their King, and the loyalty of the King
to his people.

The family pedigree of His Majesty is a remarkable one,
rivalling in splendour and antiquity that of any monarch
among the present ruling houses of Europe, or among the
chronicles of authentic history.

The roots of it lie deep in the glorious annals of brave
and warlike peoples, the subsequent history of whose
struggles for freedom and for empire, reveals reverence for
the past, and determination to hold sacred the laws
which gave solidity and coherence to their growing state.

Not only is King George the direct lineal descendant of a
long line of Norman, Tudor, Plantagenet and Stuart Kings,
but he is also the veritable successor, through Edgar
Atheling's sister, the Princess Margaret, of Alfred the
Great, the far-seeing lawgiver and the founder of England's
sea power ; of Egbert and other worthies of the old Saxon
Monarchy, and also of the Malcolms and Kenneths of
Scotland ; of the heroic Bruce, and the mighty Alpin,
founder of the Scottish line.

Apart altogether from its connection with the throne of
England, the family of the Guelphs, to which His Majesty
belongs, has enjoyed, for over a thousand years and through
the varying fortunes of some thirty-three generations, a.
princely rank in Europe.

Guelph, or Wlph, was the name of an early leader of the
Scyrri, a Gothic people inhabiting the shores of the Baltic,
and some of the Danish islands of the Great Belt, when,

1NTRODUCTIO N — c onti n u c it

in the days of Rome's decadence Attila, the Hun, swept like
the "Scourge of God" across Europe from the Caspian
Sea. At the middle of the fifth century, a Guelph was in
possession of Noricum, the classic Rha^tia of the antients,
now the Tyrol.

In the eleventh century, Albert- Azzo II., Lord of Este,
married Cunegonde, the heiress of Guelph, Duke of
Carinthia. Their son added to his patrimony the dominion
of Guelph of Bavaria, and a notable descendant of his,
Henry the Lion, married Maud, daughter of Henry II. of
England, and was the founder of the Brunswick family.

How the House of Brunswick, connected as it was
already by marriage with the antient royal dynasties of
England, came at last to the throne itself is a familiar
story.

The eldest daughter of James I. married Frederick V.,
the Elector Palatine, a brave but unsuccessful champion
of Protestantism. His daughter Sophia married Ernest
Augustus, Duke of Brunswick-Luneberg, afterwards Elector
of Hanover. Upon the death of Queen Anne, without
surviving children, George Lewis, the son of the Electress,
was the sole protestant prince in the direct line of succession,
and, in accordance with the Act of Settlement, he was
proclaimed on August i, 1714, King of Great Britain and
Ireland.

As is to be expected in the ceremonials of an antient
people, deeply imbued with the love of historic tradition,
the coronation itself is based upon long-continued and oft
repeated precedents, dating back to a remote period, and is
full of symbolic significance.

The earliest coronation of a Christian prince within the
limits of Great Britain and Ireland is said to be that of
Dermot, or Diamid, who was crowned as supreme monarch
by his relative Columba, about A.D. 550.

The first Emperor of Britain was Claudius Albinus, who
was made Governor of Britain by Commodus, A.D. 192,
and declared Caesar by Severus in A.D. 193.

It is probable that the first form of actual diadem was a
simple string of beads, following which came the bead

INTRODUCTIO N — c on till lied

fillet of some soft material which was worn as a mark of
authority. In Britain, about the tenth century, the bead
fillet gave way to a solid metal circlet, possibly due to the
wish of the ruler to wear some distinctive mark of his rank
in battle. On an Anglo-Saxon coin bearing the head of
jEthelstan, the helmet is adorned with a solid circlet
bearing three pearls on raised stems. From this period the
evolution of our English crown can be followed with some
certainty.

William I. is represented on the Great Seal with a
coronet on which the single pearls on their stalks have
become triplicated. This triple arrangement of separate
pearl ordots became the single trefoil, which may be seen
on the head of Henry I., as represented on the Great Seal
in his time.

Since the time of Ethelred, the outward form of corona-
tion in Britain remained unaltered in its essential features
down to the time of George IV.

The following pages illustrate the rite of Coronation from
the earliest times, the crown and regalia of the British
Realm, its present extent, and some of its builders,
monarchs and rulers.

H. S. W.

His Most Excellent Majesty

G E O R G 1C THE F I F T H

King of Great Britain and Ireland and of the British Dominions beyond

the Seas, Emperor of India
Born June 3, 1865 ; succeeded to the Throne, May 6, 1910

Her Majesty QUEEN MARY
Born May 26, 1867

[\V.

His Royal Highness

EDWARD ALBERT, Prince of Wales
Born June 23, 1894

QUKKS ALEXANDRA and her family, including KING GEORGE
in 1875

c s

His ROYAL HIGHNESS THE DUKE OF CON NAUGHT
Who will proceed to Canada as Governor-General after the Coronation

*T- ^j

S b -a

WESTMINSTER ABBEY

Where the Coronation of British Kings takes place

Founded on the site of an earlier Church by Edward the Confessor,

and rebuilt in the XIII century by Henry III. and Edward I.

•a -a

<n£

0 S-3

H .2 >

ST. PAUL'S CATHEDRAL
Designed by Sir Christopher Wren
Bet!un in 1675 and completed in 1710

THE PATRON SAINTS

OF THE

UNITED KINGDOM

ST. G K o K G r.
The Patron Saint of England

According to the Ada Sanctorum, St. George was born of noble parents
in Cappadocia, and became a distinguished soldier, but was tortured and
put to death by Diocletian at Nicomedia, on April 23, 303. The
St. George of the Eastern Church was no doubt a real personage of
earlier date. The cult of St. George inspired many chivalrous orders
among the crusaders, and he was adopted as the tutelary saint of England.
Edward III. founded St. George's Chapel, Windsor, in 1318

ST. PATRICK
The Patron Saint of Ireland

Probably born in Bonaventa, somewhere near Waventry, in 386. When
sixteen, he was captured by pirates and sold as a slave to an Irish
chieftain named Milchu. He escaped and became a monk in France.
Ordained Bishop at forty-five, at sixty he returned to Ireland as a
missionary. He is reported to have founded 365 churches and baptised
12,000 persons.

ST. A N D R K w
The Patron Saint of Scotland

Said to have been martyred by crucifixion, 30 November, 69, at Patroe in
Achaia. His festival was instituted about 359.

ST. DAVID

The Patron Saint of Wales

St. David (Dewi Sant) is believed to have been of royal descent, and is

said to have crowned Kinj" Arthur. He became Bishop of Moni

Judeorum, or Menevia, afterwards St. David's, and presided over two

Welsh Synods. He died in 601.

A L B I N V S

Claudius Albinus, the first crowned Emperor of Britain, was appointed
Governor by Commodus, A.D. 192, and was declared Caesar by Severus

in the following year.
Reproduced by permission of Dr. A. SAMHON

THE EVOLUTION

NATIONAL ARMS

T H K R o Y A i, ARMS OF E s G i, A s
From A.I). 1195 to 1689

THE R o v A i. \ RMS OF EN c; i. A N D
From A. D. 1689 to 1911

The White Horse Shield of the
An^lo-Saxons

Shield of Ireland

Shield of Wales
NATIONAL ARMS AND HERALDIC EMBLEMS

CORONATION REGALIA

AND

SCENE OF THE CEREMONY

S o M K FAMOUS CROWNS
42

Wl!

s.o StO--."^

H H f-i H c

o u w s.

£ "H "5 c "aJ

|-S|a||

H H tr, h h to

^- ^j fn ^ in ^o

-14

The Coronation Chair of Scotland, captured by Edward I. at Scone,
1296, which originally contained the Stone of Destiny.

THE CORONATION CHAIR IN WHICH KING GEORGE

WILL BE CROWNED

The Coronation Chair was made for Edward I. to enclose the famous

stone of Scone, which he seized in 1297, and brought from Scotland to

the Abbey, where he placed it under the Abbot's care. Upon this chair

and stone, which are moved into the Sanctuary at Coronations, the

Sovereigns of England have ever since been crowned. The only occasion

upon which it has been taken out of the Abbey was when Oliver Cromwell

was installed in it as Lord Protector in Westminster Hall.

SOME NOTABLE
CORONATION CEREMONIES

AN TIE NT EGYPTIAN CORONATION CKREMONIES

Above is depicted the Coronation of Rameses II. ca. 1333 B.C. ; below, the
anointing of Khem by Seti I., and the ceremony of purification by water.

THE CORONATION OF KING DAVI
From a XV century MS.

THE CORONATION OF KING SOLOMON
From a XV century MS.

THE CORONATION OF AN EARLY BRITISH KING
UNDER AN OAK TREE

CORONATION OF A VERY EARLY KING
From a drawing of the XV century

CORONATION OF KING CANUTE AND QUEEN EMMA
From an antient drawing

CORONATION OF KING EDGAR
From an antient drawing

CORONATION OF EDWARD THK CONFESSOR
From an MS. of the XIV century

CORONATION OF AN ANTIENT KING

From an MS. of the XI century

From " English Coronation Records" by I... G. Legf;, published by Messrs.

CONSTABLE & CO.. and reproduced from an XI century MS. in the

possession of Sir GEORGE HOLFORD.

a °

THE CROWNING OF THE YOUNG KING
SON OF HENRY II.

From an MS. of the XIV" century

Reproduced from ' Green s History of the English People," by permission of
Messrs. Macmillan and Co., Ltd.

CORONATION OF HENRY III
From an antient drawing

CORONATION OF EDWARD I
From an MS. of the XV century

CORONATION OF EDWARD II.

A.D. 1307

From an MS. of the XIV century.

Reproduced from "GREEN'S HISTORY" by permission of the Master of Corpus Christi
College, Cambridge, and of Messrs. Macmillan & Co., Ltd.

•Jm

• • F '.'

CORONATION OF A KING
Probably Richard II.

A.D. 1377
From an MS. ot the XV century

CORONATION OK A KING AND QUEEN CONSORT
From an MS. of the XIV century

CORONATION OF HENRY VI.
A.D. 1422

CORONATION OF HENRY VII.

A.D. 1485
Reproduced by permission from the " ILLUSTRATED LONCON NEWS '

CORONATION OF QUEEN ELIZABETH

A.D. 1558
Reproduced by permission from the "ILLUSTRATED LONDON NEWS.

CORONATION OF QUEEN ELIZABETH

A.D. 1558
Reproduced by permission from the "ILLUSTRATED LONDON NEWS.

-:1 *

CORONATION OF GF. ORGE I.

A.D. 1714
Reproduced by permission from the "ILLUSTRATED LONCON NEWS"

CORONATION OF GEORGE III
A.D. 1761

CORONATION OF QI;EEN VICTORIA

CORONATION 01
THE ARCHBISHOP OF CANTERBURY CROWNING KING

EDWARD VII.
RD VII. IN WESTMINSTER ABBEY, AUGUST 9, 1902

SOME WEARERS

THE BRITISH CROWN

ALFRED — "THE GREAT"
King of the West Saxons, 871-901

K. EDWARD the CONFESSOR.

EDWARD THE CONFESSOR
The last Anglo-Saxon King of the old line. Reigned 1042-1066

WILLIAM THE FIRST
Born 1027. Reigned 1066-1087

HENRY THE FIRST
Born 106P. Reigned 110C-1135

K. STEPHEN

STEPHEN
Born 1105. Reigned 1135-1154

HENRY THE SECOND
Born 1133. Reigned 1154-1189

V--

RlCHARD THE FlRST

Born 1157. Reigned 1189-1199

JOH N

Born 1167. Reigned 1199-1216

EDWARD THE FIRST
Born 1239. Reigned 1272-1307

EDWARD THE SECOND
Born 1284. Reigned 1307-1327

EDWARD THE THIRD
Bern 1312. Reigned 1327-1377

EDWARD THE FOURTH
Born 1442. Reigned 1461-1483

KINO HENRY VIII. :

HENRY THE EIGHTH
Born 1491. Reigned 1509-1547

EDWARD THE SIXTH
Born 1537. Reigned 1547-1553

QUEEN ELIZABETH
Born 1533. Reigned 1558-1603

]AMKS THE FIRST OF ENGLAND AND SIXTH OF SCOTLAND

Born 1566. Proclaimed King of Scotland in 1567, and Reigned over
England and Scotland from 1603-1625

CHARLES THE FIRST
Born 1600. Reigned 1625-1649

100

CHARLES THE SECOND
Born 1630. Reigned 1660-1685

101

W 1 1. L I A M THE THIRD
Born 1650 Reigned 168S-1702

102

GKOKGK THE FIKST
Born 1660. Reigned 1714-17.27

GEORGE THE SECOND
Born 1683. Reigned 1727-1760

104

G F. O R G E THE THIRD

Born 1738. Reigned 1760-1820

GEORGE THE FOURTH
Born 1762. Reigned 1820-1830

106

"VICTORIA THE GOOD"

Queen of Great Britain and Ireland, and First Empress of India.
Born 1819. Reigned 1837-1901.

107

EDWARD THE SEVENTH
Born 1841. Reigned 1901-1910

108

SOME BUILDERS

OF THE

BRITISH EMPIRE

MAP or BRITISH ISI.KS
From a drawing of the XII. Century

SIR MARTIN FROBISHER

1535-1594

Navigator and discoverer of Frobisher Bay. Reached Labrador in 1576,
and in 1585 commanded a vessel in Drake's expedition to the West
Indies. Fought with distinction in the combat with the Spanish Armada.

Ill

SIR WALTER RALEIGH
1552-1618

One of the most interesting and romantic figures in English history
was born at Hayes Barton in Devon, in 1552. Court favourite, scholar,
historian, and world adventurer, he was by turns the darling and the butt
of fortune. On leaving Oriel College, Oxford, he volunteered, while but
a youth, for the Huguenot cause in France, and fought at Jarnac and
Montcontour.

He accompanied his half-brother, Sir Humphrey Gilbert, on an ill-fated
voyage to the Indies, and, returning in 1580, went to Ireland at the head of
a little company of a hundred foot to act against the rebels and quickly
attracted attention by his courage and resource.

Going to the court of Elizabeth as a protege of Leicester. Raleigh
soon became prime favourite with the Queen who loaded him with gifts
and offices. He used his wealth to further the cause of exploration, and
fitted out three successive expeditions to America, commenced the
colonisation of Virginia, and introduced from thence tobacco and
potatoes into England.

In 1592 he set sail with five ships for Guiana and explored the coast of
Trinidad and the Orinocco River, and in 1596 published his " Discovery
of Guiana."

He was present at the taking of Cadiz, and with the Earl of Essex in
a great expedition, which started from Plymouth for the Spanish Main.
Later he captured Fayal, one of the Azores Islands.

Raleigh became governor of Jersey for three years, but on the death
of Elizabeth, being suspected of wishing to place Arabella Stuart on the
throne, he was imprisoned in the Tower for life. After thirteen years,
during which he wrote the first volume of his " History of the World,"
he was released in order that he might look for a gold-mine in
Guiana. In this last melancholy voyage he lost his son in a fight with
the natives, and, buffeted by storms and weakened by sickness, he
returned to England, only to receive his death at the hands of his
ungrateful country.

The value of Raleigh's work in the making of the Empire was far
greater than any permanent or material addition he made to its borders,
and consisted in the inspiration and impetus which he gave to his own
and each succeeding generation of Englishmen for the pioneer work of
colonisation.

112

SIR WALTER RALEIGH

113

SIR FRANCIS DRAKE

1540-1596

Famous for his exploits on the Spanish Main. First Englishman to
circumnavigate the globe. Commanded under Howard in the combat
with* the Spanish Armada. From his boyhood till the day when his body
was committed near Porto Bello, to that far western sea he loved so well,
Drake's life was a continuous succession of extraordinary adventures,
hair-breadth escapes and daring achievements, and he stands out as the
typical figure among the brave old Elizabethan sea-dogs who first pointed
out the pathway of colonial expansion, since followed by so many
Britons, beyond the seas.

ADMIRAL ROBERT B i. A K K

1598-1657

Commander of the Fleet in 1649, and Warden of the Cinque Ports in 1651-

In 1653 successfully contested the Dutch mastery of the seas against

Van Tromp, De Ruyter and De Witt.

JOHN CHURCHILL, DUKE OF MARLBORO UGH

1650-1722
Genera] and Statesman

Captain-General of the British Forces in 1702. His victories at
Donauworth, Blenheim, Ramillies and Malplaquet paved the way for British
expansion in the eighteenth century.

116

ADMIRAL JOHN B E N B o w
1653-1702

A dashing and successful commander in the wars against the French and in
the West Indies, 1689-1702.

GEORGE, LORD AN SON

1672-1762

A famous British Admiral who circumnavigated the globe, and by his

victory over the French at Cape Finisterre, helped to gain for England the

Empire of the Sea.

118

LORD AMHERST
1717-1797

Born at Riverhead, Kent, 1717, and entered the Army at the age of
fourteen. He was entrusted by Pitt with the expedition to Canada in
1758, and it was largely owing to his prudent conduct of the war, aided by
the genius, and enthusiasm of Wolfe, that Old Canada became throughout
a British Colony.

ADMIRAL LORD RODNEY, K. B.

1718-1792

Vice-Admiral of England

In 1762 captured Martinique. St. Lucia and Grenada. Served in the
the Seven Years' War, and defeated the Spanish Fleet off Cape
St. Vincent in 1780. He also gained a victory over the French in 1782.

120

VISCOUNT HOOD

1724-1816

Commander-in-chief of the Navy in North America, 1767, and in the

Mediterranean in 1793. Contributed to the growth of colonial

empire by his victories off Dominica and St. Kitts.

121

LORD C 1. 1 v K

1725-1774

his extraordinary genius for war by the capture of Arcot (1751), which he
held against a vastly superior force.

This was followed by the victories of Ami and Kaveripak and the
capture of Kovilam and Chingalpat. After a brief period in England,

upon in a parliamentary enquiry.

In its final resolution, Parliament, while admitting his great and
meritorious services, passed at the same time some censure upon
Clive's conduct. This so preyed upon him, that ill in mind and body, he
died by his own hand on 22nd November, 1774.

Clive's splendid victories at a critical moment in the History of India
won for the British the virtual sovereignty of Bengal, Bahar and Orissa,
established their military prestige throughout the whole country, and

TiQ\;i^1 thf* \\rav fnr an Tinnprujl ^n vf raint\r

he way for an Imperial Suzerainty

122

ROBERT, LORD CLIVE

123

WARREN HASTINGS
1732-1S18

This great Indian Administrator was born at Churchill and educated at
Westminster, he went to Calcutta in 1750 in the service of the East India
Company, and was appointed British Resident at Murshidabad in 1758.
In 1769 he became second in council at Madras, and three years later
Governor of Bengal and President of the Council.

As Governor-General, to which position he was appointed in 1773,
Hastings made an appraisement of the landed estates, revised the
assessment, improved the administration of justice, organised the opium
revenue, waged vigorous war against the Mahrattas and made the
Company's power paramount in many parts of India. After violent
dissensions with the members of the council and a duel, in which he
wounded Phillip Francis, one of his opponents, he resigned office and
returned to England. Having been impeached at the bar of the House
of Lords, he was involved in a trial which lasted seven years, completely
stripped him of his fortune and would have reduced him to poverty had
not the East India Company for which he had, during troublous times,
accomplished so much, provided for his declining years.

By his generalship and diplomacy Warren Hastings established upon a
firm basis the British occupation of India.

124

WARREN HASTINGS

125

VISCOUNT K E p p E L

1725-1786

Admiral of the Blue and Commander-in-Chief of the British Fleet, 1778.

Took part in the battle of Quiberon Bay in 1759, and in the capture of

Bellisle in 1761, and commanded the British forces at the conquest of

Havana in 1762.

GENERAL WOLFE

1727-1759

James Wolfe received an ensign's commission in 1742 and fought at
Dettingen, Falkirk and Culloden, and assisted in the capture of
Louisburg. Pitt entrusted to him the Canadian expedition of 1759.
The attack on Montcalm's strong position at Quebec was extremely
difficult, but at last, scaling the clifi at a point insufficiently guarded,
Wolfe led his men on to the Plains of Abraham and took the city.
Wolfe's victory, in which both he and his heroic antagonist Montcalm
perished, decided the political fate of Canada

127

CAPTAIN COOK

1728-1779

After distinguishing himself as an intrepid sailor and skilful navigator
in the coasting and Baltic trade, James Cook entered the Navy and was
engaged for ten years surveying about the shores of Newfoundland and
the St. Lawrence River. He circumnavigated and charted New
Zealand, and on April 28, 1770, landed at Botany Bay, gave to the country
the name of " New South Wales," and took possession of it for
Britain. Besides securing that immense tract of land for his native
country, Captain Cook, in this and subsequent voyages, added greatly
to the knowledge of the Pacific and Southern Ocean.

SIR RALPH ABERCROMBY

1734-1801

General and Commander-in-Chief of the British Forces in the West Indies,
1795-1797. He took Grenada, Demarara and Trinidad.

129

ADMIRAL SIR JOHN JERVIS, EARL ST. VINCENT, K. B.

1735-1823

Won distinction as a young lieutenant in the Quebec Expedition in 1759.

Commanded the naval part of the successful expedition, in 1793, against the

West India Islands. First Lord of the Admiralty, 1801.

THE MARQUIS W E L L E s i, E v

1735-1781

Richard Cowley Wellesley, eldest son of the first Earl of Mornington,
was appointed Governor-General of India in 1797. His victories over the
French and the followers of Tippoo Sahib, and later, assisted by his
brother (afterwards Duke of Wellington) over the warlike Mahrattas.
followed up by a far-sighted and vigorous administration, made Britain
the paramount power on the great Asiatic Peninsular

131

HORATIO, VISCOUNT NELSON

1758-1805

Served under Hood, Hotham and Jervis. After destroying the French
Fleet in the Bay of Abukir, he was made Vice-Admiral. He defeated
the French at the battle of Copenhagen in 1801, and, as Admiral,
attacked the combined Franco-Spanish Fleets off Cape Trafalgar,
October 21, 1805, and vanquished them, thereby destroying Napoleon's
plans for the invasion of England.

" Brief, brave and glorious was his young career.
His mourners were two hosts, his friends and foes."

ARTHUR WELLESLEY — DUKE OF WELLINGTON

1769-1852

Soldier and Statesman — Field-Marshal and Commander-in-Chief of the

British Forces in the Peninsular, 1808-9 ; and at Waterloo, where he

defeated the French Army under Napoleon, on June 18, 1815. Prime

Minister of England from 1828-1830.

133

SIR C H A R L K s JAMES X A i1 1 1: R

1782-1853

A descendant of Napier of Merchiston the famous Mathematician.
Napier, after a distinguished record of service was ordered to India in
18*1, to command in the war with Sind, and succeeded in breaking the
power of the Ameers at the battle of Meanee. After the further victory
of Hyderabad, he was made Governor of the province. In 1847 he was
appointed Commander-in-Chief of the'forces in India, and accomplished
useful service in the Sikh war.

2 3

HEROES OF T H K INDIAN MUTINY

1 Colin Campbell, Lord Clyde, 1792-1863, Rescuer of Havelock and

Outram at Lucknow, and Reliever of Cawnpore.

2 Sir James Outram, 1803-1863 — the " Bayard of India," Defender

of Lucknow.

3 Sir Henry Havelock, 1795-1857, Reliever of Lucknow, 1857.

135

BENJAMIN DISRAELI, EARL OF BEACONSFIELD

1804 1881

Prime Minister in 1868, and from 1874-1880, his bold stroke of policy in
making Britain half owner in 1875 of Suez Canal, strengthened English
influence in Egypt. In 1876 he conferred upon the Queen the new title
of Empress of India, and obtained at the Berlin Congress (1878) peace
with honour and the cession of the island of Cyprus.

136

THE RIGHT HONOURABLE WILLIAM EWART GLADSTONE

1809-1898

Prime Minister, 1868-1874 : 1880-1885 ;
Feb. to July, 1886; and from 1892-1894

The silver-tongued orator and unequalled parliamentary debater, who for
sixty-two years was a member of the House of Commons and Prime
Minister in more than four administrations, was famous rather for his
domestic reforms than for any additions to British territory effected by his
policy. Nevertheless, his generous and passionate championship of
oppressed nationalities won for England a place in the esteem of subject
races which has been favourable to British expansion.

137

SIR BART i. E FRERK

1815-1884

Was born at Chydach in Brecknock and studied at Haileybury. As
Chief-Commissioner of Sind he kept order amid the turmoil of the
Indian Mutiny. From 1862 to 1867, Sir Bartle Frere was Governor of
Bombay, and in 1877 he signed a treaty with the Sultan of Zanzibar,
abolishing the slave trade. From that year till 1880 he was Governor of
Cape Colony and High Commissioner for South Africa. He was one of
the first to set up the ideal of a confederation of South African Colonies

138

MARQUIS OF D A \. H o u s i F.

1812-1860

One of the greatest of Indian Pro-Consuls, became Governor-General in
1847. His administration was not less successful in the acquisition of
territory than in developing Indian resources and in improving the
administration. Petiue and the Punjab were conquered ; Nagpur,
Oudh, Sattara, Jhansi and Berrar annexed, thousands of miles of
railways and telegraph wires laid, the Ganges Canal and important
irrigation works all over India opened during the nine short years of
his rule in India.

139

JOSEPH CHAMBERLAIN

Born in 1836. and having acquired a great reputation in municipal and
parliamentary life, Mr. Chamberlain became Colonial Secretary in 1895,
and by his broad conceptions of imperial policy and keen sympathy with
the problems of the great oversea dominions awakened anew enthusiasm
for the expansion of England. He resigned office after the Boer War in
order to advocate preferential tariffs for the colonies.

140

C E c 1 1- RHODES

1853-1902

Having gone to Natal for his health, Cecil Rhodes made a fortune in the
Kimberley diamond diggings and became a leading man in Cape Colony ;
he secured a charter for the British South Africa Company, of which he
was managing director, and whose territory is now Rhodesia. In 1890
he was Prime Minister of Cape Colony, and initiated and inspired to a
great extent the policy of a great Federal South African Dominion under
the British flag.

141

SIR HKSRY M. STANLEY
1841-J9C4

This intrepid explorer and brilliant descriptive writer was also an empire
builder, and probably accomplished more than any other man of his
generation to open up the vast mid-regions of Africa. Stanley made
urgent representations to the British Government to occupy the waste
lands of the East, West and Central districts, but the opportunity was
disregarded. Nevertheless, his work of exploration has been of immense
service in fastening the interest and attention of his fellow countrymen
upon the Dark Continent where he accomplished so much.

EARL ROBERTS OF KANDAHAR, PRETORIA AND WATERFORD-
P. C., K.P.

Born 1832. After a long and splendid record of achievements in India,
including his famous march through Afghanistan and Relief of Kandahar,
Lord Roberts was sent out to assume chief command of the British forces,
in the Boer War. He relieved beleaguered Kimberley and, advancing to

Pretoria, secured the ultimate triumph of British arms.
Field-Marshal, Commander-in-Chief of the British Army, 1901-1904

143

VISCOUNT iWoLSELEY, K.P., G.C.B.

Born 1833. By his successful campaigns in Canada (Red River rebellion
1870), Ashanti, Natal, and especially Soudan 1884-5, has vastly extended
the sphere of British influence. Field-Marshal, Commander-in-Chief of
the British Forces in Egypt, 1882, and other Campaigns. Commander-in-
Chief ofthe British Army, 1895-1900.

144

VISCOUNT KITCHENER OF KHARTOUM

Born 1850, and, entering the Engineers in 1871, served in Palestine, Cyprus,
and in the first Sudan campaign. By his victory over the Khalifa at
Omdurman, September 21, 1898, he won back the Sudan for Egvpt. In
1900-2 he carried out successfully the final operations of the Boer War, and
concluded an honourable peace. Commander-in-Chief of the Indian Forces,
1902-1909. Appointed High Commissioner of the Mediterranean, 1909.
Field-Marshal and Member of the Imperial Committee of Defence.

145

SIR A. K. WILSON, G.C.B.

Admiral of tha Fleet, 1907
First Naval Lord of the Admiralty

ADMIRAL LORD FISHKR OF KM. VERSTONK, G.C.B.

Admiral of the Fleet, First Sea Lord of the Admiralty until January 1910

when he retired, but continues to serve as Member of Committee of

Imperial Defence.

147

ADMIRAL LORD CHARLES BERESFORD, K.C.B.
Commander-in-Chief Channel Fleet, 1906-1909

148

THE BRITISH EMPIRE

AND

SOME OF ITS RULERS

T H E EMPIRE

S r N N

M A F OF

Showing Britisl

.'HIGH THE

SETS

^BB£^2££P

WORLD
ssions (in red)

" UNDER ONE FLAG "
" United we stand, divided we fall "

Reproduced by special permission of the Proprietors of " PUNCH," from issue
dated October 18, i8yg

Civis Brittanicus sum."

Lord Palmerston

THE BRITISH EMPIRE

THE coronation of George V. as King of Great Britain and
Ireland and of the British Dominions beyond the Seas,
Emperor of India, is an event of more than domestic
significance and one which concerns every " citizen of the
world," for the Empire over which King George has been
called to rule extends over one-fifth of the whole land
surface of the earth and includes 11,400,000 square miles of
territory, supporting an estimated population of 410,000,000
persons, and touches at many points the interests as well as
the frontiers of other nations.

It is not too much to affirm that the continued existence
of the British Empire as a great world power constitutes Aworldpower
one of the best guarantees for the maintenance of peace and
for the progress of civilisation which the present condition
of the world can show, and that its downfall would carry
with it ruin and confusion to States and Peoples many
leagues beyond its own "far flung battle line" and
apparently quite outside its sphere of political influence.

Both in regard to the history of their growth and the
political character of their connection with the centre of
government, the various sections of the Empire may be
divided into two classes, namely, the self-governing and
crown colonies on the one hand, and on the other those
dependencies, protectorates and native states over which
the British Crown exercises a suzerainty and which are
administered by governors and officers appointed directly
by the King's Government.

In the first of these two classes are the great federated
states of Canada, Newfoundland, Australia and New
Zealand and the South African Union.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE

This great Anglo-Saxon league is not held down by force
of arms nor welded together against its will by the arts of
military strategy ; it is a free sisterhood of states linked in a
world-wide citizenship by the ties of kindred, religion,
language and literature, and inspired by common ideals of
law, of justice and of family life. For this Pan-Britannic
world the throne of England is a central and pivotal point —
the symbol, not merely of glorious historic traditions, but
also of a real and practical union for mutual helpfulness
and defence.

These portions of the Empire are to be regarded largely
as a natural result of the overflow of Anglo-Saxon populations

its origin, into countries previously unoccupied, or but thinly peopled.

growth Pioneer settlers have braved the ice floes of Canada, the

dangers of African jungles and of the arid plains and
tangled scrub of Australia to plant British homesteads,
British institutions and the British flag in those now pros-
perous but distant regions. Out of deserts they have made
fruitful gardens, and the rich and splendid states which
have grown up in what were once wildernesses are the
legitimate reward of greatly daring enterprise, immense
industry and a magnificent faith in the future.

Other portions of the colonial empire of Britain have come
into it through conquest, by voluntary association, and

and Defence , . 1,11 . r ...

through the sheer necessity of maintaining order among
primitive and lawless peoples upon lands contiguous to
British possessions.

The Empire which has thus grown into a corporate unity,
in spite of wide differences of race, climate and condition,
is defended by a thin red line of gallant soldiers who
encircle it with their swords, and by brave ships of battle —
not a few — whose keels ride the four seas and protect both
the shores of Greater Britain and the waterways of its
world- wide commerce.

These two arms of defence are mighty and well equipped,
and behind them is the inexhaustible patriotism and loyalty
of the millions of people to whom the flag of Britain
is the beloved and venerated emblem of justice, of religious
tolerance and of equal rule.

154

THK BRITISH EMPIRE — IN EUROPE

IN EUROPE

BRITISH ISLES

The British Isles form the centre of administration and
finance, and, in a considerable measure, of executive
government, for the whole Empire.

The total area is 121,377 square miles, and the population
in 1910 amounted to 45,469,564 persons.

The name Great Britain was not officially applied to
England, Scotland and Wales until the time of James I. of
England and Sixth of Scotland, who was styled at his
succession, King of Great Britain.

The political and industrial supremacy of Great Britain is
largely due to the geographical position and vast natural The centre
resources of these islands. They are situated almost in hemisphere
the centre of the land hemisphere of the Globe and mineral
wealth has been found in apparently inexhaustible quantities
beneath their soil.

This unique position and these remarkable natural
resources have been exploited with unexampled energy and
success by a race whose mixed ancestry is derived from
various European sources ; Celts, Saxons, Scandinavians
and Normans have, in turn, invaded the country ; the
strongest and most fearless gaining a footing in it have
become welded into the race and have contributed to the
vigour of the national character, and handed on traditions
of adventure and of enterprise to each successive generation.

Fortunately for her progress in the arts of peace,
Britannia's battles have been fought and her victories won,
for the most part, outside her own territories, in foreign
lands.

From the prolonged and incessant warfare within the
realm itself, which, in the end, debilitates races by cutting
off their best manhood while, at the same time, interrupting
their commercial development, the United Kingdom has

155

THE RIGHT HON. H. H. ASQUITH
Prime Minister

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN EUROPE

been largely preserved by its insular position. This factor
was of immense importance during the growth of the
modern industrial movement which made great progress in
England at a time when the nations of Europe were exhaust-
ing their energies and resources in useless conflict.

The climate of the British Isles is mild and equable, the
winters being considerably warmer and the summers cooler
than at other places within the same parallel of latitude,
a circumstance which is probably due to the frequently
prevailing south-west winds which blow across the Atlantic.
The mean temperature of England is 4Q'5° and that of
Scotland 47'5°.

ENGLAND is the largest and most populous part of the
United Kingdom, and is separated from Scotland by the
Solway Firth, the Cheviot Hills and the Tweed, and com-
prises within its borders the whole of Great Britain south of
that boundary and east of the mountainous peninsular of
Wales. It is divided from the mainland of Europe by the
North Sea and the English Channel and from Ireland by
St. George's Channel. In shape it forms an irregular
triangle, of which the eastern side measures, in a straight
line, 350 miles ; the southern, 325 miles ; and the western, 425 ;
but its shores are deeply indented with bays and estuaries
so that its actual coast line is longer in proportion to the
area of the land than any other country, with the exceptions
of Scotland and Greece.

The people of England number three-fourths of the total
inhabitants of Great Britain and Ireland, and constitute the
"predominant partner" in the electorate which controls
the legislature and policy of the whole country.

The well-nigh universal use of the English tongue, the
common inheritance in English literature and English ..The
institutions, which is shared by all the inhabitants of the Expansion
British Isles alike, have made the name of England of En*Iand
synonymous in many minds with that of Great Britain, and
even of the British Empire itself, which, in its colonial
development, is spoken of in a phrase, rendered famous by
Sir Robert Seeley, as " The Expansion of England ! "

157

LORD LOREBCRN

G.C.M.G.
Lord High Chancellor

THE RT. HON-.
Di^iD LI.OTD GBORGE
Chancellor of the Exchequer

SOME DISTINGUISHED MEMBERS OF THE BRITISH CABINET

158

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN EUROPE

The scenery of England is widely diversified and full of
charm. The eastern and southern counties consist mainly
of fertile plains, crossed by lines of low hills, but the north-
west is mountainous, the greatest elevations being in the
Lake District, where peaks of the Pennine range, Scawfell,
Helvellyn and Skiddaw, rise to a height of over 3000 feet.

WALES. — The most westerly peninsular of Britain was
united politically to England by Edward I. in 1282. The
English monarch having had a son born at Carnarvon, pre-
sented him to the Welsh chieftains as a prince who could
not speak a word of English. Since then ' ' Prince of Wales "
has been the hereditary title of the heir to the British Throne.

It was among the fastnesses of the Welsh hills that the A distinct
Celtic inhabitants of Britain held out successfully against nationality
the Saxon invaders of the fifth century. They divided the
country into ecclesiastical sections which still survive in the
antient Bishoprics of Wales, and by the seventeenth century
the Celtic tongue was spoken throughout the land west of
the Marches which were for long the scenes of sanguinary
struggles.

Welsh is still a distinct nationality with a language and
literature of its own.

The country is mountainous in parts and contains
Snowdon, the highest peak in South Britain, and many
beautiful lakes and rivers.

The minerals are extremely valuable, some of the most
important British centres of the coal and iron mining and
smelting industry being situated in South Wales.

SCOTLAND. — The Northern portion of Britain, divided
from England by the River Tweed, the Cheviot Hills and
the Solway Firth, is the Caledonia of the antients, and was
a separate and independent kingdom until the year 1603,
when James VI. of Scotland, in default of other heirs,
ascended the English Throne as great grandson of
James IV.'s English wife, the Princess Margaret, daughter
of Henry VII.

The coast of Scotland is intersected at so many points by
arms of the sea that few places are more than 40 miles

159

RKOINAI, D M c K E N N
First Lord of the Adm

THE ET. HON.

AOOOSTINE BlRRE

Secretary for Ireland

THE RT. HON.
LEWIS HiRoooRT
Secretary for the Colonies

SOME DISTINGUISHED MEMBB:RS OF THE BRITISH CABINET

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN EUROPE

Lord Pentland
Secretary of State for Scotl

inland. No less than 787 islands, belonging mostly to the
Hebrides, Orkneys and Shetland, are scattered about its
shores.

The greatest length of the
mainland, from Cape Wrath to
the Mull of Galloway, is 274
miles ; its breadth varies between
24 and 146 miles.

Scotland is famous for its
romantic and picturesque scenery,
it abounds in hills, lakes and
rivers ; massive cliffs and broad
inlets of the sea. The loftiest
mountains are, Ben Nevis (4,406
feet) and Ben Macdhui (4,296
feet) ; altogether 184 peaks are
over 3000 feet above the sea level.

Loch Lomond, whose "bonny

banks " are famous in song and story, is a freshwater lake
27 square miles in extent, and the numerous other Lochs
such as Ness, Awe, Shin and Tay, make up a total surface
of water amounting to 621 square miles.

The principal industries of Scotland are agriculture,
distilling, flax, jute and cotton spinning, shipbuilding,
engineering, dyeing, printing and brewing.

The Western, Eastern and Mid Lowlands are extremely
fertile ; the total area under cultivation for the whole of
Scotland was recently estimated at 4,859,609 acres.

Coal mining and sea fisheries are also important sources of
wealth, and the Scottish people by their energy, thrift and
enterprising spirit have contributed very largely to the
development of the colonial empire of Britain as well as to
the prosperity of their own country.

The antient Celtic language of the country namely, Gaelic
has fallen almost entirely into disuse, English being
universally spoken with the admixture of many words and
phrases of Gaelic origin. In this Scottish tongue a literature
peculiarly rich in ballad and story has grown up.

Scottish
industries

161

THE RIGHT HON. A . J . B A i. K o u R
Prime Minister from 1902 to 1906

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN EUROPE

Scotland is remarkable for the educational facilities
afforded to all classes by her schools and universities, and
has contributed many distinguished sons to the service of
the Empire in war and peace.

IRELAND. — The island of Erin, known to the antient
Greeks as lerne, and to the Romans as Hibernia, is situated
about 60 miles to the west of
England. It is for the most part
an undulating plain interspersed
with low hills, the highest point
(Carran-Tual, of the MacGilly-
cuddy Reeks) being 3,414 feet
above the sea level. The total
area is 32,531 square miles. In
prehistoric times, Ireland, like
Britain, appears to have been
inhabited by people of Iberian
stock, who were invaded and
conquered by various Celtic
tribes. From one of these in-
vasions a Celtic language, Erse
or Goidelic, grew to be the common speech of the people of
Ireland, until gradually replaced by the English language.

The climate is similar to that of England, but slightly
warmer, the mean temperature being 50° F.

The Shannon, the largest river in Ireland (and in the
British Isles), rises in the Cuilcagh Mountains, county
Cavan, and falls, after a course of 254 miles, into the
Atlantic Ocean between Loop Head and Kerry Head.

The country is comparatively poor in minerals, the chief
exports being agricultural produce and animals. Bogs and
morasses occupy 1,772,450 acres, nearly one ninth the
entire area of Ireland, the largest being the Bog of Allen.
There are also many lakes, or loughs as they are called.
Lough Neagh, which has the largest area (100,000 acres) is
in the Province of Ulster ; and the lakes of Killarney,
famed in song and story for their beautiful and romantic
scenery, in Munster.

163

H A L S B D R '

SOME DISTINGUISHED MEMBERS OF
MR. BALJOUR'S ADMINISTRATION, 1902 TO 1906

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN EUROPE

The manufacture of iinen is a staple industry in the north
of Ireland, shipbuilding on a great scale is carried on at
Belfast, and brewing and distilling are also among the
important industries of the country.

Ireland has had an eventful and, in some respects, a
tragic history, having been the scene of fierce dissensions
and frequent bloodshed in the past. From the days when An
Brian Boru fought with the Norse Sea Rovers in the eleventh eventful

history

century to the massacre of 1641 and Cromwell's terrible
vengeance, and later, the battle of the Boyne in 1691, the
country has been constantly torn by feuds, to which racial
and religious differences have imparted added bitterness.

In 1801, the parliament of Ireland, previously separate,
was joined to that of England by the Act of Union and is
now represented by 103 members in the House of Commons
and 28 elected peers in the Upper Chamber.

Whether this union is to be reversed by the establishment
of a separate Irish legislature in Dublin has been one of the
permanent pre-occupations of British politics during the
last thirty years.

THE CHANNEL ISLANDS include Jersey, Guernsey,
Alderney and Sark, with a total area of 73 square miles, Part of the
situated close to the north west coast of France (12 miles °f No"mand
at the nearest point). These islands had a population of
95,841 in 1901, and have been an appanage of the British
Crown ever since the Norman Conquest, having formed
part of the old Duchy of Normandy. French is the official
language of the local legislature called the States, and a
local modification of the old Norman-French is still spoken
by the people. Agriculture and horticulture are among the
principal industries, and the islands are famous for excellent
breeds of horned cattle.

THE ISLE OF MAN (MONA) is situated in the North
Sea, 27 miles S.W. of St. Bees Head, and the same distance
east from the coast of Ireland. The mild and equable
climate and picturesque scenery of Man attract every year a

THK BRITISH EMPIRE — IN EUROPE

large number of visitors, and the fisheries afford employ-
ment to about 4000 persons. The island is 33^ miles long
and 12^ miles wide, and has a population of 55,598.

The Isle of Man was ruled by Welsh Kings from the sixth
to the end of the ninth century and then by Scandinavian
Kings until Magnus, King of Norway, ceded his rights in
it to Alexander III. of Scotland. On Alexander's death
the Manx placed themselves under the protection of
Edward I. of England. In 1406 the island was granted
to Sir John Stanley in perpetuity, to be held of the Crown

The sovereignty °f England.

of the The Stanley family continued to rule it as Kings of Man

tan ey ami y until 1651, when the style of lord was adopted. This
sovereignty descended to the Dukes of Athol, and was
ultimately purchased by the British Government for
^"493,000, but the island still has its own laws, law offices
and courts of law. The legislative body is called the Court
of Tynwald and consists of the Lieutenant-Governor and
Council and the elected House of Keys. The Isle of Man is
rich in minerals such as lead, iron, blende and slate, and
also exports large quantities of agricultural produce. The
Manx speech, which belongs to the Goidelic group of Celtic
languages, is now little used, but laws are still promulgated
according to antient usage in both English and Manx from
the Tynwald Hill.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN EUROPE

GIBRALTAR

HISTORY. — Called by the antients Mons Calpe, Gibraltar
was regarded as one of the pillars of Hercules, the other
being Abyla, fourteen miles away
on the opposite shore of Africa.

Its present name is derived from
Tarik, a Saracen warrior who cap-
tured the rock in 711 (Gebel-el-
Tarik). Having been taken from
the Moors by Henry of Castille
in 1462, it was strengthened by
Charles V. in the next century and
regarded as impregnable, but was
captured by the British and Dutch
combined fleets under Sir George
Rooke and the Prince of Hesse-
Darmstadt during the war of the
Spanish succession in 1704, and
held in spite of a fierce siege in which 10,000 men are said
to have perished. In 1713 it was ceded to Britain by the
Treaty of Utrecht.

Of the subsequent efforts to retake Gibraltar the most
famous was the siege of 1779-1783, when General Elliott
(afterwards Lord Heathfield) successfully held out for
three and a half years against an enormous force of
Spanish and French allies. During this siege for weeks
together 6000 shells were thrown daily into the town.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1713.

AREA. — 1| square miles.

CLIMATE. — Tropical.

POPULATION. — 18,351, excluding the garrison, which in
1909 numbered 5,564.

CAPITAL. — Gibraltar is the name of the fortress town as
well as the peninsula.

GOVERNMENT. — The Governor is in command of the
garrison and exercises all the functions, both of government
and legislation ; there is no executive or legislative council,

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The civil population is under
British law, administered by the Chief Justice (Sir H. R.
Pipon Schooles).

COLONIAL SECRETARY. — Sir F. Evans.

167

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN EUROPE
Gl BR A LTAR— continued

RACES. — English, Spaniards, Jews and Moors.

DEVELOPMENT. — The harbour and dock improvements
in progress from 1900 to 1910 (mainly for naval purposes)
were estimated to cost ^6,500,000.

RELIGION. — Since 1842 has been the See of an Anglican
Bishop.

LANGUAGE. — English and Spanish.

PRODUCTS. — Gibraltar has no exports of its own but
conducts a brisk transit trade.

MALTA

HISTORY. — A crown colony, antiently called Melita. An
island situated in the Mediterranean, about 28 miles south
of Sicily. Has had an eventful history, and has been the
scene of frequent invasions in antient and modern times.
Was held by the Phoenicians, Carthaginians and Romans,
conquered by the Vandals, and again wrested from them
by the Arabs, A.D. 870. In 1090 was captured by Roger
the Norman, and during succeeding centuries frequently
changed hands. In 1530 Charles V. gave it to the
Knights Hospitallers on their expulsion from Rhodes. After
being held by them till 1695, it was surrendered to the
French. Captured by the British during the Napoleonic
wars in 1800, its cession was formally confirmed by the
Treaty of Paris, in 1814, and the Congress of Vienna, in 1815.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1800.

AREA. —Including two small islands, 117 square miles.

CLIMATE.— Warm, resembling that of Africa more than
Europe. During the prevalence of the sirocco (S.E. wind)
the temperature rises to 95° F.

POPULATION. — For the Maltese group, 215,879, excluding
the garrison, which numbers 8,296. Malta alone contains
188,000 inhabitants.

CAPITAL. — Valetta, population about 31,000. A fine city,
picturesque but antiquated, commanding two spacious
harbours, and surrounded by massive fortifications. Malta
is the chief coaling station of the Mediterranean fleet, and
is provided with extensive dockyard accommodation.

GOVERNMENT. — Is administered by a Governor (military),
advised and assisted by an Executive Council. Legislation is
carried on by a Council of Government, consisting of the
Governor (president), the Lieutenant-Governor and Chief

168

THK BRITISH EMPIRE — IN EUROPK

MALT A — c onti n u e d

Secretary of Government, the Crown Advocate, with other
official and elective members.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Canon
law is recognised as the civil
law of Malta.

RACES. — Maltese, with a sprink-
ling of British and foreign
residents.

DEVELOPMENT. — Population in
1881, including Gozo, numbered
149,782 ; in 1904 it had risen to
197,070, including 20,000 British
and foreign residents. Great
progress has been made during
the last 60 years in regard to
the water supply, the planting
of trees, improvement of roads,
and the harbour.

RELIGION. — Roman Catholic.
f LANGUAGE. — The vernacular is
a dialect of Semitic origin, derived
from the Carthaginian and Arabic tongues, but contains
a large admixture of corrupt Italian terms. The better
class speak English or Italian. Italian is the official
language of the law-courts, but parents of pupils in the
public schools may choose whether their children shall
learn English or Italian. About 90 per cent, learn English.
EDUCATION. — Free in the day and night elementary
schools (average enrolment, 19,100). Secondary education
is provided at a moderate rate. The university is attended
by about 240 students, and the Lyceum by about 600 boys.
There are also many private schools.

PRODUCTS. — Potatoes, onions, cummin seed, and oranges
are the principal products exported.

CYPRUS

HISTORY. — A large island in the Mediterranean once
famous for its copper mines, the metal itself being named
after the island, aes cyprium, or copper.

Cyprus was called by the classic poets by many different
names, such as Marcaria, Amathusia and Pappos, and was
successively held by Phoenicians, Persians and Egyptians
until 58 B.C., when it became a Roman province. In 1570

169

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN" EUROPE

C Y P R U S— continued

it was conquered by Turkey and is still nominally a part
of the Turkish empire, but in 1878 was occupied by the
British, and has been administered by them since then under
a constitution, the excess of revenue over expenditure being
retained as part payment for losses in connection with the
' guaranteed Turkish loan.

AREA,— 3,584 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Varies according to altitude ; tropical but
healthy, except in the low-lying jungle.

POPULATION. — 261,587.

CAPITAL. — Nicosia.

GOVERNMENT. — Cyprus still nominally forms part of the
Ottoman empire, but the government is administered by
England. The inhabitants have been granted a political
franchise, which extends to every man who pays taxes.
There is a High Commissioner, assisted by a legislative
council of 18 members, six official and 12 elected.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Each of the six administrative
districts of the island has a Court of Law, presided over by
an English judge, assisted by two native judges, one a
Christian and the other a Mohammedan. There is also a
Supreme Court for the whole island, consisting of two
English judges.

RACES. — Turks, Greeks and Armenians.

DEVELOPMENT. — A new harbour has been made at
Famagusta, and a railway built to Morphon, a distance of
60 miles.

RELIGION. — Greek Christians and Mohammedans.

LANGUAGE. — Turkish and Greek.

EDUCATION. — There are two Boards of Education, one
Christian and the other Moslem. The total number of
elementary schools is 561 (376 Christian and 185 Moslem).
There is also a Moslem " Idadi " school at Nicosia, a Greek
gymnasium and several high schools.

PRODUCTS. — Grain, sesame, linseed, wine, silk, olives,
locust beans, cotton, wool, hides, aniseed, sponges, etc.

170

THE BRITISH EMPIRE

ASIA

THE RIGHT HON. LORD HARDINGE OF PENSHORST
Viceroy and Governor-General of India

THE BRITISH EMPIRE IN ASIA

INDIA

This great Asiatic peninsular, stretching from the southern
slopes of the Himalayas for 1900 miles southward to Cape
Comorin, and on the west from the mountainous frontier of
Afghanistan and the Gulf of Oman, to the borders of French
Indo-China and the Malays, is by far the most important
dependency of the Britibh Crown.

The manner in which this great empire grew to be a part
of the king's dominions, constitutes at once the strangest
and most fascinating chapter in British history.

India is a land of many races and of many tongues, the A iand
aboriginal inhabitants have long since been displaced in a °* many
large measure by successive waves of invasion from the
north, the most primitive peoples now remaining, being
probably the Dravidian hill tribes, represented by the
Gonds ; and Kolarians such as the Santals and the Bhils.
The lingua franca of India is Urdu or Hindustani, a com-
pound of Persian and Hindi, which is spoken Ly some
87 millions of the inhabitants and understood in all the
populous cities. In addition there are a very large number
of languages and dialects, the principal being Bengali
(44 millions) ; Telugu (20 millions) ; Mahratti (18 millions) ;
Punjabi (17 millions) ; Tamil (16 millions).

More than three thousand years ago an Aryan race of
Indo-Germanic type swept down upon the wide fruitful plain
of the Indus from Central Asia, and it has been from across
the great natural barrier of the Himalayas that each of the
desolating invasions of India, including those of Alexander
and of Tamerlane, has come.

The system of caste originated in the attitude of this
conquering Aryan race from the north of Hindu Kush,
towards the yellow-skinned dwellers in the Himalayan
districts, and the shorter dark-skinned races of the south.
The antient vedas and upanishads, books on the religion
and metaphysics of the Aryans, are written in Sanskrit, and
are supposed to date back to 1500 B.C.

In the sixth century Gautama, a Prince of the Kshetriya rise Of
caste, became the founder of a new religion called Buddhism, Buddhism

173

THE BRITISH KMPIRE — IX ASIA

which after exercising an immense influence over the
Hindus, and existing for a long period side by side with
Brahmanism, at length lost ground in India itself, and gave
way to a fresh revival of Brahmanism in a modified form.

A religion closely-allied to Buddhism still survives, however,
in the sect of the Jains. After the Greek conquest of 326
B.C., many successive waves of Scythians inundated northern
India, and between the years 165 B c., and A.D. 320, left a
lasting impression on the character of the population.

A long period of strife and anarchy followed after the
death of the Emperor Harsha, who had secured towards.
the end of his life the mastery over a vast area.

The successors of Muhammed began to storm the northern
frontiers and paved the way for the rule of the Afghan
dynasties, who, for 500 years, were the most powerful
monarchs in India.

In 1206 Kutb-ud-din, whose memory is still preserved by
the Kutb Minar near Delhi, had reached the zenith of his
power. In 1398 the mighty Tamerlane (or Timur) burst
into India at the head of a great host of Tartars and
captured Delhi, laying waste a great part of Hindustan,
and about a century-and-a-half later, Babar, a direct
descendant of Timur, overthrew the last of the Afghan
kings at Panipat and founded the Mogul Empire. This,
the greatest unification of government among the diverse
races and tribes of India, prior to the British occupation
reached its highest development under the famous Shah
Jehan (1627-1658), the builder of the Taj Mahal of Agra
and many other splendid monuments and public works.

The dynasty of the Grand Moguls, in many respects
glorious, degenerated rapidly, and in another hundred years
the empire was bsing torn in pieces by fresh assaults from
without. In 1738 Nadir, Shah of Persia, captured Delhi,
gave orders for a general slaughter of the inhabitants, and
carried off enormous plunder.

Ths Mahrattas under their Peishwas conquered Gujarat,
Malwa, Berar and Orissa, and became for some time the
foremost power in India, but their rule was tyrannical and

175

THE BRITISH KMPIKF. — IN ASIA

predatory, and the excesses committed by their lawless
followers and the Pindarees, combined with the growth of
the great Sikh kingdom in the Punjab, favoured the dis-
ruption of the empire and gave a pretext and an opportunity
for European adventure.

During the seventeenth century English, Dutch, French,
Portuguese and Danish East India Companies were rivals
for the trade of India and, with the exception of the Danish,
each secured in turn a degree of political influence in the
country.

The first considerable English company was the London
East India Company which was incorporated by Queen
Elizabeth by royal charter in 1600, and, having overcome
some resistance offered by the Portuguese, established a
trading port at Surat. The British Ambassador, Sir Thomas
Roe, aided by the Emperor Jehangir, did much to improve
the position of the Company and in 1639 the English
acquired a strip of land on the east coast, which they forti-
fied and named Fort St. George.

In 1662 Charles II. married Catherine of Braganza and
obtained as part of her dowry from Portugal the island of
Bombay, and subsequently transferred his rights over it
to the Company.

In 1698 the English East India Company was started in
rivalry to the old London Company, but the two were
ultimately amalgamated as "The United Company of
Merchants of England trading to the East Indies."
The power and influence of the British grew steadily,
and at a critical moment when many diverse and op-
posing forces were fiercely contending with one another
for the soil of India, Lord Clive began the series of epoch-
making victories which turned the scale in Britain's favour,
and it was by his efforts that the Company received, in 1765,
the diwani or governing power of Bengal, Behar and Orissa
at the hands of the Emperor at Delhi.

Clive was succeeded by another famous Governor of
Bengal, afterwards Governor-General on the creation of that
office in 1773, namely, Warren Hastings, who vigorously re-

THE BRITISH KMl'IRE — IN ASIA

formed the administration, added greatly to the territory
under British influence, and laid the foundation of the
political suzerainty of Britain.

Under the able administration of
the Marquess Wellesley, the policy
of forming alliances with subsidi-
ary native states was developed,
and the doctrine of the necessity of
a paramount power in India for
the common welfare, definitely
promulgated.

The last year of the eighteenth
century saw the fall of Tippoo
Sahib, the capture of Seringapatam,
and the successful conclusion of
the fourth Mysore war.

Thus, partly by inheritance,
partly by conquest, and partly by the inevitable converg-
ence of isolated principalities towards the protection of one
strong and central government, Britain grew to be the
custodian of India, and the guardian of her peoples.

Up to the year 1858, the affairs of British India were
administered by the officials of the East India Company,
certain members of the board of control being nominated
for this purpose by the British Cabinet, but in the year
after the great mutiny the government was formally
transferred to the crown, and, in 1877, Queen Victoria was
proclaimed Empress of India.

The climate of India is extremely varied, owing to the
wide extent of the country, and the differing degrees of
elevation existing in it, from the snow-covered peaks of the
Himalayas to the torrid plains of the south.

There are well-marked seasons, the cool, the hot, and the
rainy. The occasional failure of the monsoon, causes
periodical famine.

Further details concerning the most important of the
great provinces into which the country has been divided
for administrative purposes, are given in the following pages.

Victoria,

Queen

Empress

THK BRITISH EMPIRE — IN ASIA

MADRAS

HISTORY. — The first British settlement in Madras was
made at Masulipatam in 1611. This great province of
India, which occupies the most
southerly portion of the continent,
and has a coast line of 1,730 miles,
was not only the oldest, but was
also the most important of the
three original presidencies before
dive's conquest of Bengal. It was,
however, small in extent until the
annexation of the Carnatic in 1801.
The Laccadive Islands are included
under the same administration.
DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1746.
AREA. — 141,726 sq. miles.
CLIMATE. — Tropical ; differs
greatly according to elevation.
POPULATION. — 38,209,436.
CAPITAL. — Madras.

GOVERNMENT. — Consists of a Governor assisted by Execu-
tive and Legislative Councils.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Madras is divided into twenty-one
districts, each of which has a collector and district judge.
British law, modified by special Indian enactments, prevails.
RACES. — Chiefly Hindus.

DEVELOPMENTS. — There are good roads, railway com-
munication is extensive, and irrigation works have been
carried out on a very large scale.

RELIGION. — There are over one million native Christians,
Roman Catholics and Protestants ; Hinduism or Brahmanism
is the prevailing religion.

LANGUAGE. — Tamil and Telugu are the principal
languages, Malyalum, Canarese and Uriya are also spoken.

EDUCATION. — Numerous government and mission schools
and colleges exist.

PRODUCTS. — Rice, millet, indigo, coffee, sugar, wheat.
Madras is not rich in minerals, but gold and iron have been
found, also diamonds in the Karnul district. The forests
are of great value, teak being the principal wood.

178

THE BRITISH EMPIRK — IN ASIA

BOMBAY

HISTORY. — The western province of India takes its name
from the island of Bombay, which became a British
possession in 1662, as part of the
dowry of Catherine of Braganza,
wife of Charles II. The greater
part of the present territory was
obtained by annexations from the
Mahrattas, and by the lapse of the
Satara State. Sind was con-
quered in 1843 and its administra-
tion is, in some respects, separate
from the remainder of the presi-
dency.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1662.

AREA. — 122,98^ sq. miles.

CLIMATE. — The coast districts
are hot and moist with a heavy
monsoon. Mean temperature at

• G. S. Clarke
.C.I.E.. F.R.S.

the

Governor, assisted by

rainfall during
Bombay, 72°F.

POPULATION. — 18,515,587.

CAPITAL. — Bombay.

GOVERNMENT. — Consists of a
executive and legislative councils.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The administration has its base in
the village officer, the patel, he reports to the mamlutdar,
and he in turn to the deputy collector, who is responsible to
the assistant collector or collector.

On the judicial side there are magistrates, small cause
court judges, special and assistant judges, and finally, the
High Court of Bombay and the Judicial Commissioner in
Sind.

RACES. — Especially the home of the Mahrattas.

DEVELOPMENT. — Very advanced, the capital is a magnifi-
cent city and a great centre of commerce, possessing
railways, newspapers, cotton mills, and many magnificent
public buildings.

RELIGION. — Mohammedan, Hindu, Parsee.

LANGUAGES. — Marathi, Gujarati, Sindi and Canarese.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN ASIA

B O M B A Y — c on tinned

EDUCATION. — Is at a high level, numerous schools exist
throughout the province, and in the city of Bombay there is
a fine university, also several art colleges, veterinary and
technical schools.

PRODUCTS. — Oil seeds, millet, rice, sago, sugar, pepper,
cotton, coal, iron, silver and gold.

Manufacturing industries have become very active in
recent years.

BENGAL

HISTORY. — The old Presidency of Bengal comprised, in
pre-mutiny times, the greater portion of northern India,
but the province now under this administration consists of
a part of Bengal proper with Behar, Orissa and Chota
Nagpur. Fifteen districts of Eastern Bengal were detached
from the province in 1905, and combined with Assam,
while one district from the Central Provinces was added
to Bengal.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1757.

AREA. — 115.819 sq. miles.

CLIMATE. — Hot and humid on the plains. Mean tem-
perature 77° F.

POPULATION. — 50,722,067.

CAPITAL. — Calcutta.

GOVERNMENT. — The Lieutenant-Governor is assisted by a
Legislative Council. An Executive Council is being created.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — There are nine divisional com-
missioners under the Lieutenant-Governor of Bengal, who
superintend the revenue, criminal and executive adminis-
tration of their respective divisions. These divisions are
again sub-divided into districts, each under its district
officer, who, besides exercising general supervision, is also
the chief magistrate in his district.

RACES. — Most of the people are descended from the
Aryan stock. There are also representatives of the
aboriginal races, such as the Santals, Gonds, Kols and
Bhuiyas.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN ASIA

B ENG A L— continued

DEVELOPMENT. — Good railways, canals, and irrigation
works have been constructed.

RELIGION. — Hinduism and
Mohammedanism are the pre-
vailing religions.

LANGUAGES. — The principal are
Bengali, Hindi and Bihari.

EDUCATION. — In every village
of any size there is a vernacular
school called a pathsala, and in
every district secondary schools
affiliated to the Calcutta University,
which teach up to the matriculation
standard.

PRODUCTS. — Rice, opium,
indigo, oil seeds, sugar, tobacco,
silk, tea and jute.

EASTERN BENGAL AND ASSAM

HISTORY. — Assam, the region of the Surma and Brahma-
putra valleys, was ceded to the British after the first
Burmese war in 1826, but it was not until 1838 that, in
consequence of the mifcgovernment of the native rajah,
the entire country was placed under British administration.
It was for many years a separate province, but in 1905 was
linked to Eastern Bengal.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1838.

AREA. —106,130 sq. miles.

CLIMATE. — There is an abundant and well distributed
rainfall.

POPULATION. — 30,961,459.

CAPITAL. — Dacca.

GOVERNMENT.— Is vested in a Lieutenant-Governor and
a Legislative Council.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — There is a regular system of sub-
ordinate and superior courts of justice, culminating in the
High Court of Calcutta, which is the Supreme Court of Appeal.
Trial by jury has been successfully introduced in Assam.

181

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN ASIA

elot Hare. K. C.S.I.
icutenant-Govemor

EASTERN BENGAL AND ASSAM— continued
RACES.— Mohammedans and Hindus.
DEVELOPMENT. — A large part of this north-eastern tract
is still forest, but there are now
over 600,000 acres of tea planta-
tions, and this industry has
become one of the most important
in India. Railways, telegraph
lines and canals, furnish the means
of communication.

RELIGION. - - Mohammedans,
Hindus and some Christian
converts.

LANGUAGES. — Bengali and As-
samese, are the chief among a
great variety of languages.

EDUCATION. — About 20 per cent,
of the boys, and 2 per cent, only
of the girls, attend school. The Welsh Calvinistic Methodist
Mission and other missionary bodies are actively engaged
in educational work.

PRODUCTS. — Rice, tea, jute, wheat, oil seeds, sugar,
tobacco, coal and iron.

THE UNITED PROVINCES OF AGRA AND OUDH
HISTORY. — Forming the upper part of the great Ganges
plain to the west of Bengal, these provinces correspond
with the Hindustan of the old Mohammedan historians,
and contain many famous cities of Indian history and
myth within their borders. These include Benares, the
most sacred city of the Hindus, Agra and Allahabad.

From the conquest of Delhi, by Kutb-eb-den, in 1191, to
the advent of the English, a period of 600 years, the
Mohammedans were the rulers of this part of India.
Seven years after Clive's famous victory at Plassey,
Sir Hector Munro conquered the combined forces of the
Emperor Shah Alim and his ally, Shujah-ud-dowlah, at
Baxar. In the absence of any natural military frontier
it became necessary to occupy strategic points in Oudh in

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN ASIA

THE UNITED PROVINCE s— c on tinned

order to protect Bengal. After the Mahratta war of 1803,
Doab, and the country on both sides of the Jumna, was
brought into the sphere of British
influence. The whole area was
placed under one administration
in 1877.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1803.
AREA.— 107,164 square miles.
CLIMATE. — Hot, but well watered
and extremely fertile.
POPULATION. — 47,691.782.
CHIEF CITIES. -Allahabad (A.gra);
Lucknow (Oudh).

GOVERNMENT. — Consists of a
Governor and a legislative council.
LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — British
law, modified by special Indian

enactments and local customs, is administered in civil and
criminal cases. The habits of the Hindus, especially in
regard to marriage and food, are regulated by the law
of caste, all the septs of the same caste resident within
a traditional area, are under the rule of a pnnchayat, or
council of elders.

RACES. — Hindus of Aryan and Dravidian extraction, and
Mohammedans who are divided by history and descent into
three great communities — the Pathans of the south-eastern
districts, the Moguls of the Upper Doab, and the Afghans
in Rohilkland.

DEVELOPMENT. — Railways now traverse almost every
district in the provinces, and a net-work of roads connects
them with every village of importance. Two great canals
on the Upper Doab have been constructed.

RELIGION. — Hindu and Mohammedan.
LANGUAGE. — Hindustani ; also Bihari.
PRODUCTS. — Wheat, rice, barley, pulse, tobacco, millet,
cotton, sugar, oil seeds, iron and lead.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN ASIA

PUNJAB

HISTORY.— The province of the Five Rivers, which
occupies the north west angle of the great northern plain of
India, remained without a break,
under the rule of Mohammedan
dynasties of foreign extraction,
from the beginning of the eleventh
century till the latter half of the
eighteenth, when the Sikhs re-
volted and established a Sikh
kingdom. In 1848, after the Sikh
war, Dulip Singh's territory
became a British province, with
Sir John Lawrence as chief com-
missioner. During the mutiny,
many of the Sikh soldiers helped
to fight the rebels, and when
peace was restored, Delhi and its
territory, were added to the Punjab.
DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1849.
AREA. — 97,209 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Very hot from May to September in the
plains ; varies according to the elevation in the hilly
regions.

POPULATION. — 20,330,339.
CAPITAL. — Lahore.

GOVERNMENT. — Consists of a Lieutenant-Governor and a
legislative council.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The inheritance of land proceeds
throughout a large part of the Punjab, according to
the custom known in England in Saxon time as gavelkind,
that is, all the sons take equal portions of their father's
estate. This custom has produced village communities
of peasant proprietors, the descendants of a common
ancestor.

RACES. — Rajputs, Jats, Pathans and Beluchis.
DEVELOPMENT. — Railways with bridges spanning the great
rivers, canals, and irrigation works have been constructed
in many parts of the province.

184

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN ASIA

P U N .1 A B— c oniinued

RELIGION. — About half the population is Mohammedan,
and half Hindu or Sikh ; the Buddhists, Jains and Christians,
together, only number about 100,000.

LANGUAGES. — Punjabi and Hindi are the chief languages ;
the native language of the Pathans and Beluchis is Pashtu,
and is quite distinct from Indian dialects.

EDUCATION. — The Khatris and Kashmiri Pandits have a
special aptitude for education and many members of these
two races have distinguished themselves in commerce, in
the civil service of the government and in the learned
professions.

PRODUCTS. — Wheat, millet, barley, maize, pulse, oilseeds,
sugar, cotton and salt.

BURMA

HISTORY. — A Buddhist Burman dynasty was established
on the Irawadi as early as the eleventh century. The
gradual extension eastwards of the borders of British India
brought its frontier into proximity with Burma, and, owing
to border raids by the Burmese, war broke out in 1824. At its
conclusion Assam, Arakan, and Tenasserim, were ceded
to the British government. The second and third Burma
wars resulted in the deposition of the King of Ava, and the
complete annexation of Lower and Upper Burma, which were
placed under one administration in 1886.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1852.

AREA. — 236,738 sq. miles.

CLIMATE. — Very trying to Europeans, in the delta and
along the coast ; the rainy season lasts five, six, and
sometimes even seven months. From February to April
it is dry and hot, the temperature sometimes rising to
ioo°F. in the shade.

POPULATION. — 10,490,624.

CHIEF CITIES. — Rangoon (Lower Burma), Mandalay
(Upper Burma).

GOVERNMENT. — Vested in a Lieutenant-Governor and a
legislative council.

185

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN ASIA

B U RM A — continued

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Woman occupies a higher position
i Burma than in other parts of India, and the laws
affecting marriage contracts are
more equitable. The Burmese
are extremely fond of music,
dancing and social entertain-
ments.

RACES. — Burmans, Karens and
hill tribes, such as Kachins,
Singphos, Paloungs and Chins.

DEVELOPMENT. — Several rail-
ways are in operation, including
one from Rangoon to Mandalay.
The trade of the country has made
immense progress during the last
forty years.

RELIGION. — Buddhism is the
religion of nearly go per cent, of the people.

LANGUAGE. — Burmese.

EDUCATION. — The primary schools of the country are the
Buddhist monasteries, where every Buddhist lad is expected
to serve a novitiate. There are also numerous government
schools. Over 60 per cent, of the males in Lower Burma
can read and write.

PRODUCTS. — Rice, teak, bamboo, cotton, iron, copper,
lead, tin, coal and petroleum.

THE CENTRAL PROVINCES AND BERAR

HISTORY. — The Central Provinces, which include the
Vindhyan and Satpura tablelands and the great plain
of Nagpur, were formed, in 1861, out of territory taken
from the north-west provinces, and from Madras, and
originally belonging to the old Mahratta kingdom of
Nagpur.

Previous to the rise of the Mahratta power in India, this
region was ruled by native Gond dynasties, the most famous

186

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN ASIA

THE CENTRAL PROVINCES AND BERAR— continued
being that of Garha Mandla, in the sixteenth century. It
still contains an unusually large proportion of aboriginal
tribes, whose ancestors retreated to the hilly fastnesses of
Gondwana, before successive waves of Aryan invasion, in
early times.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — The northern part of the
provinces in 1818 ; Nagpur and its dependencies in 1854;
Berar was leased, in perpetuity, from the Nizam of
Hyderabad in 1902.

AREA. — 82,635 square miles. Berar 17,710 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Hot and dry, except during the south-west
monsoon (June to September).

POPULATION. — 9,237,654. Berar, 2,754,016.
CAPITAL. — Nagpur.

GOVERNMENT. — Under a chief commissioner. All legis-
lation is enacted by the Governor-General's council.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — British law as modified by special
Indian enactments prevails, the chief difficulties lie in the
direction of the enforcement of sanitary reforms and of
forest conservation.

CHIEF COMMISSIONER. — The Hon. R. H. Craddock, C.S.I.
RACES. — Mahrattas, Rajputs and Gonds.

DEVELOPMENT. — Much has been done, by the construction
of roads and railways, to open up the country.

RELIGION. — Most of the people are Hindus ; about one-
seventh belonging to aboriginal or non-Aryan tribes still
adhere to their primitive faiths.

LANGUAGES. — Mainly Hindi and Marathi.

EDUCATION. — There are 2,500 State schools and colleges
at work in the provinces.

PRODUCTS. — Rice, wheat, millet, pulse, oil seeds, cotton,
coal and manganese ore.

187

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN ASIA

. E. McCall

• ,

CEYLON

HISTORY. — An Aryan invasion from the valley of the
Ganges established a Cingalese dynasty in Ceylon in the
fifth century, B.C. Buddhism
was introduced two centuries
later. The Portuguese formed
settlements on the western and
southern coasts of the island
in 1505, but were subsequently
dispossessed by the Dutch. The
British occupation dates from
1795-6, when the settlements
were annexed to the Presidency
of Madras. They were formally
ceded at the Peace of Amiens in
1802. Owing to a treacherous
massacre of British troops war
was declared, in 1815, against
the government of the interior, whereupon the last Kandyan
king was taken prisoner, and the whole island came under
British rule.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1815.
AREA.— 25,332 square miles.

CLIMATE. — The heat is less oppressive than in Hindustan.
Mean temperature along the coast 80° F.
POPULATION. — 4,082,936.
CAPITAL. — Colombo.

GOVERNMENT. — Is that of a Crown colony, and is in the
hands of a Governor, assisted by executive and legislative
councils.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The basis of the law is Roman-
Dutch, but the criminal code has been remodelled from the
Indian penal code. In addition to the district courts, there
are Gansabawas, or village councils, empowered to deal
with petty offences and trifling claims.

RACES. — Cingalese, Tamil, Moormen (Arabs), Burghers,
Eurasians and Malays. About 9000 European residents.
In the interior are the vestiges of an aboriginal nomadic
race, the Veddahs.

188

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN ASIA

C E Y L O N — c ontinued

DEVELOPMENT. — 576 miles of railways are owned and
worked by the government. Colombo harbour is strongly
fortified.

RELIGION. — Buddhism, Brahmanism and Mohammedan-
ism are the chief religions, but Christian missions are
making good progress.

LANGUAGE. — The Cingalese speak an Aryan language
closely allied to the Pali, or modernised Sanskrit.

EDUCATION. — Unsectarian, and in the vernacular schools,
free.

PKODUCTS. — Tea, coffee, cinchona, cocoa, cinnamon,
cardamoms, ebony, vanilla and the cocoanut palm.

HONG-KONG

HISTORY. — The island of Hong-Kong was first occupied by
the British in 1841, and was formally ceded by the Treaty of
Nankin in the following year.

The opposite peninsular of Kowloon was ceded to Great
Britain by treaty in 1861, and in 1898 a portion of the
Kwongtung province was added. The commercial im-
portance of the colony was greatly enhanced by the
discovery of gold in Australia in 1851, and later, by the
opening of the Suez canal. It has become the great depot
for Chinese emigration and immigration and for trade with
the interior.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1842.

AREA. — Including the leased portions of the mainland, 390
square miles.

CLIMATE. — Temperature ranges from 87-3° to 54'9° F.
The rainy season extends from May to October. Typhoons
are prevalent during the months of July to October.

POPULATION — 428,888.

CAPITAL. — Victoria.

GOVERNMENT. — Is that of a Crown colony administered
by a Governor, aided by executive and legislative councils.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Up to 1899, Chinese officials
exercised jurisdiction within the walled city of Kowloon,
but this has now ceased and a district officer resides there.

RACES. — 11,390 Europeans, the remainder are Chinese.

THK BRITISH EMPIRE— IN ASIA

HONG-KON G — c ontinued

DEVELOPMENT. — The waterways of the colony form one

of the most magnificent harbours

in the world and are provided
with docks which will accommodate
the largest ships.

RELIGION. — Buddhism, Confuci-
anism, Taoism among the Chinese
population.

LANGUAGE. -English and Chinese.

EDUCATION. — The Hong - Kong
University for the promotion of
Christian civilisation in China,
was founded in 1910.

PRODUCTS. — The island itself
produces little or nothing, but its
position has made it the centre of a
Governor very large export and import trade.

WEI-HAI-WEI

HISTORY. — A portion of the Chinese territory of Shantung,
including the town of Wei-hai-wei, the island of Lui Kung,
the bay and a belt of land ten miles
wide along the coast, was ceded by
the Chinese government in 1898,
in order to provide Great Britain
with a suitable naval harbour in
north China, and for the better
protection of British commerce in
the neighbouring seas.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — i

AREA. — 285 sq. miles.
CLIMATE. — Winter is cold, but
dry and bracing, and the summer
heat not excessive.

POPULATION. — 150,000.
sirj. K. lockiiart CAPITAL. — Wei-hai-wei.

GOVERNMENT. — Vested in a

Commissioner who makes ordinances subject to the approval
of the Secretary of State for the Colonies.
RACES. — English, Chinese.

DEVELOPMENT. — The territory has been surveyed by the
Royal Engineers, but has not as yet been strongly fortified.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN ASIA

STRAITS SETTLEMENTS

HISTORY. — Penang, Singapore and Malacca, called the
Straits Settlements, from their proximity to the Straits of
Malacca, are now under one
colonial administration, having
been transferred from the control
of the Indian government in 1867.
Malacca is one of the oldest
European settlements in the east,
having been taken possession of
by the Portuguese, under Albu-
querque, in 1511. They were suc-
ceeded by the Dutch, who handed
over their rights to the East India
Company in exchange for Bencoo-
len, on the west coast of Sumatra.
DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1824.
AREA. — 1,600 square miles.
CLIMATE. — Hot, with little vari-
Govemor ation of seasons ; mean tempera-

ture 82-7° F. ; the rainfall is pretty
evenly distributed throughout the year.
POPULATION. — 620,127.
CAPITAL. — Singapore.

GOVERNMENT. — Is vested in a Governor aided by execu-
tive and legislative councils.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The law in force is contained in
local ordinances, and in such English and Indian Acts, and
Orders in Council, as have been made applicable to the
colony, from time to time. There is a Supreme Court
which holds assizes at Singapore, Penang and Malacca.
RACES. — Europeans, Chinese, Malays, and natives of India.
DEVELOPMENT. — Singapore is a very important port of
call for vessels trading between Europe or India and the Far
East ; it possesses capacious docks and a fine harbour.

RELIGION. — Differs according to race ; there is an
Anglican Bishop of Singapore, chaplains and missionaries.

LANGUAGE. — Malay, Chinese, Hindu dialects.

EDUCATION. — Is under the control of an Education
Board; there are 215 schools, . vernacular instruction is
provided for Malays, free of charge.

PRODUCTS. — Tin, sugar, pepper, nutmeg, mace, sago,
tapioca, rice, buffalo hides and horns, rattans, india-rubber,
dye stuffs, tobacco.

191

THE BRITISH KMPIRE — IN ASIA

THE FEDERATED MALAY STATES

HISTORY. — Owing to the anarchical conditions prevail-
ing in some of the States on the mainland of the Malay pen-
insula, notably Perak, the Pangkor Treaty of 1874 was
entered into, and British residents were stationed in Perak,
Selangor and Sungei Ujong. In 1889 a protected State,
known as the Negri Sembilan (Nine States), was
formed. In 1895 a further treaty was signed by the native
rulers of the four States constituting their country a
federation to be administered under the advice of the British
Government.

AREA. — 26,375 scl- rniles.

CLIMATE. — Hot, moist and very uniform, average
maximum shade temperature 90°, minimum 70° F.

POPULATION. — 977,000

CAPITAL. — In Perak, Tai-Ping ; in Selangor, Kwala
Lumpur.

GOVERNMENT. — Legislation for matters affecting the whole
territory is enacted by a federal council, presided over by
the High Commissioner of the Straits Settlements, and
consisting of the Resident-General, the Sultans of Perak,
Selangor and Pahang, the Yam Tuan of Negri Sembilan,
the four British residents, and four unofficial members.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — There is a Chief Judicial Commis-
sioner, and the States are policed by a mixed force of Indians
and Malays officered by Europeans.

RESIDENT-GENERAL.— Sir W. Taylor, K.C.M.G.

RACES. — Malay, Chinese, Hindu.

DEVELOPMENT. — There are, at present, 542 miles of
railway, chiefly in Perak and Selangor, all owned and
managed by the government.

RELIGION. — Among the Malays, Mohammedanism has
been largely superimposed upon the old pagan beliefs, some
of which still survive, however, in the were-tiger superstition,
the belief in magic, evil spirits, witchcraft and sorcery.

LANGUAGE. — Malay, Chinese and Hindu dialects.

EDUCATION. — Theie are numerous Malay vernacular
schools, and a few Tamil schools.

PRODUCTS. — Tin, coffee, cocoanuts, sugar, rice and rubber.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN ASIA

NORTH BORNEO

HISTORY. — The northern portion of the island of Borneo,
with a coast line of 900 miles, was ceded to a British syndicate
in 1878, by the Sultans of Brunei
and Sulu. The syndicate's rights
were acquired in 1881, by the
British North Borneo Provisionial
Association, and transferred in the
following year to the British North
Borneo Company. The government
assumed a formal protection over
the country by agreement in 1888.
DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1888.
AREA. — 31,106 square miles.
CLIMATE. — Tropical, but eq-
uable ; temperature varies from
70° to 90° F.

POPULATION. — 160,000.
CAPITAL. — Sandakan.

GOVERNMENT. — Is in the hands of a Governor assisted
by a council.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The law of the country is based
upon the Indian penal, criminal and civil codes, with the
adaptation in special instances of Acts in force in the
British colonies. There is also an Imam's Court for the
administration of Mohammedan law.

RACES. — Dyaks, Malays, Kyans, Papus or Negritos, and
other tribes.

DEVELOPMENT. — Internal communication is mainly by
water ; some 120 miles of railway have been constructed.

RELIGION. — Animistic Paganism, with barbarous rites
which included head-hunting, was the old religion of the
native dyaks. The settlers along the coast are mainly
Mohammedans. There is a Church of England and a
Roman Catholic mission.
LANGUAGE. — Dyak.

PRODUCTS. — Sago, timber, coffee, pepper, gutta-percha,
india-rubber, camphor, resin, cutch. Coal and large
deposits of iron ore have been discovered.

193

THK BRITISH EMPIRE — IN ASIA

SARAWAK

HISTORY. — A large strip of country on the north-west
coast of Borneo, which was handed over by the Sultan of
Brunei, in 1842, to Sir Charles
Brooke, who ruled as Rajah till
1868, when he was succeeded by
his nephew, H. H. Rajah Sir
Charles Johnson Brooke, G.C.M.G.
In 1888 Sarawak was placed under
British protection.

AREA. — 42,000 square miles.
CLIMATE. — Tropical.
POPULATION. — 500,000.
CAPITAL. — Kuching.
GOVERNMENT. — Vested in the
Rajah and a supreme council, of
which he is president.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Under
the just and equitable rule of the

Brookes, Sarawak has been reclaimed from a condition
of barbarism.

RACES. — Malay, Dyaks and Chinese.

DEVELOPMENT. — There are good roads round the capital,
and from thence to the mining districts in upper Sarawak.
Internal communication is largely by means of the numerous
rivers.

RELIGION. — Mohammedanism and paganism, but Chris-
tian missions, both Protestant and Roman Catholic, are
well represented.

EDUCATION. — Mission schools exist at Kuching, under the
superintendence of the Bishop of Singapore and Sarawak
and the Roman Catholics.

PRODUCTS. — Rubber, pepper, sago, coal and gold.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE

AFRICA

VISCOUNT GLADSTONE
First Governor-General of the Union of South Africa

196

THE UNION OF SOUTH AFRICA

UNDER the terms of the South African Act passed by the
Parliament of the United Kingdom on September 20,
_ 1909, the Colonies of Cape of
Good Hope, Natal, the Trans-
vaal and the Orange Free State
were united into one government
under the name of The Union
of South Africa.

General Louis Botha
Prime Minister of the South

The first formal steps towards
the execution of this Act, de-
signed as a magnanimous ap-
peasement of racial animosities
after a long and terrible conflict,
was the Royal Proclamation on
December 3, 1909. A few weeks
later the name of Mr. Herbert
Gladstone, now Viscount Glad-
stone, was announced as the first Governor-General of this
great congeries of South African States.

On the arrival of Viscount Gladstone in the Colony,
General Botha was invited to form an executive council,
and became Prime Minister of the first Administration.
Union day, May 31, 1910, on which the Union actually
came into being, was observed as a public holiday through-
out South Africa, with great rejoicings and thanksgiving.
A message was received from King George, expressing His
Majesty's " earnest hope and strong confidence that the
new Constitution will, under Divine Providence, further
the highest welfare of South Africa, and add strength to
the Empire."

The lamented death of King Edward having prevented the
proposed voyage of King George (then Prince of Wales) to
South Africa, that duty was delegated to the Duke of
Connaught, who, with the Duchess, visited the Colony,
arriving at Cape Town on October 31, 1910.

The Duke of Connaught opened the first Union Parlia-
ment in the name of the King with great ceremony on
November 4, and afterwards made an extensive and
interesting tour of the South African Colonies.

197

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AFRICA

THE PROVINCE OF THE CAPE OF GOOD HOPE

HISTORY. — As early as 1486, Bartholomew de Diaz, a
Portuguese commander, landed at Algoa Bay, and Vasco
de Gama doubled the Cape eleven years later. The
British first visited it in 1561, and, in 1620, two English
East India Commanders took formal possession of the
Cape in the name of Great Britain, but no settlement
was formed. For many years the Dutch East India
Company were the most active colonisers in this region.
In 1795, Holland having yielded to the French Revolu-
tionary Government, an English force, proceeded to the
Cape to secure it for the Prince of Orange, and General
Craig, the commanding officer, became Governor. After
the Peace of Amiens, the colony was restored to the Batavian
Republic, but was again captured in 1806, and finally
ceded to the British at the general peace of 1814.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1814.

AREA. — 276,995 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Dry and bracing, mean temperature 62'2° F.

POPULATION. — As estimated in 1907, was 2,507,500, of
whom 610,680 were Europeans.

CAPITAL. — Cape Town.

GOVERNMENT. — An Administrator is appointed every five
years by the Governor-General ; he is assisted by an elective
Provincial Council and by an Executive Committee of four
members.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Roman-Dutch law prevails in the
Colony, as modified by Colonial legislation.

ADMINISTRATOR. — His Hon. N. F. de Waal.

RACES. — British, Dutch, French and other Europeans,
Malays, Hottentots, Fingoes and Kaffirs.

DEVELOPMENT. — The diamond fields of Griqualand West,
centering round Kimberley, have been extensively worked.
The province now contains 3,262 miles of railway.

199 M

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AFRICA

CAPE OF GOOD HOPE — continued

RELIGION. — There is an Anglican Archbishop of Cape
Town, and, beside the Episcopalian, there are the Dutch
Reformed, Independent, Presbyterian, Wesleyan and Roman
Catholic Denominations.

LANGUAGES. — English and Dutch.

EDUCATION. — University of the Cape of Good Hope,
and numerous schools are assisted by Government grants.
The number of schools in operation in 1909 was 3,681,
attended by 172,225 scholars. There are also five colleges.

PRODUCTS. — Gold, diamonds, copper, wool, wheat, cattle
and ostriches.

NATAL

HISTORY. — Discovered by Vasco de Gama in 1497, the
coast of Natal was colonised by a small company of Dutch
settlers in 1721, but soon afterwards abandoned. In
1837, Boers from Cape Colony migrated to Natal and they
obtained a decisive victory over the Zulus in 1839. Owing
tc disturbances in the district, in 1842 a military expedition
was sent to Natal from Cape Colony, and, after suffering
defeat, was reinforced by a contingent under Colonel
Cloete, who received the submission of the Boers at
Pietermaritzburg on July 5, 1842. The military power of
the Zulus was broken at the battle of Ulundi in 1879, and
Cetshwayo, their King, was captured. He was afterwards
restored, but, being unable to maintain a stable government,
Zululand was, in 1887, with the general consent of the in-
habitants, declared British territory. The Amaputaland
Protectorate was added ten years later.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1842.

AREA. — 36,434 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Healthy, heat seldom oppressive, mean tem-
perature 64-71° F.

POPULATION. — 1,206,386.

CAPITAL. — Pietermaritzburg.

GOVERNMENT. — By an Administrator aided by an elective
Provincial Council and an Executive Committee of four
members.

200

THE BRITISH EMPIRE IN AFRICA

N A T A L — c onti n u e d

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Modification of the old Dutch law.
A Native High Court administers justice and deals with all
crimes arising out of native law
and custom.

RACES. — Europeans, Kaffirs and
Asiatics.

DEVELOPMENT. — Railways to
Orange Free State and Transvaal
have been constructed. Sugar
and Assam tea have been largely
cultivated since 1863, and the im-
migration of Indian Coolies has
been encouraged.

RELIGION. — Is well provided for
by denominational bodies.

LANGUAGES. — English, Dutch,

Administrator -,7 rr

Kaffir.

EDUCATION. -- Two Government High Schools, 41
Primary, 5 Indian and 2 Government Schools for coloured
children.

PRODUCTS. — Wool, cereals, coal, iron and sugar.

THE TRANSVAAL

HISTORY. — The Transvaal was for a long period an in-
dependent State, and, from 1884 to 1900, was officially
styled the South African Republic, The region had
been occupied, as early as 1856, by pioneer Boers from
Cape Colony who had driven out or subdued the native
Basutos. In 1877, owing to chronic was with the natives,
and accumulated debts, the Republic war on the eve of
dissolution when the British undertook the subjugation of
the rebellious tribes, and put the finances of the State in
order. Owing to disagreements there followed the war of
1 880-8 1, marked by the defeat and death of General
Colley at Majuba Hill. The Republic continued under the
suzerainty of Great Britain, but, in 1886, the discovery of
gold on the Wietwatersrand caused a large addition of

201

THE BRITISH KMPIKK — IX AFRICA

THE TR A NSV A AL— continued

outlanders to the population, and their discontent at the
denial of political status ultimately led to the second Boer
War, which commenced October,
1899. After a long struggle,
British Arms were at length
victorious, and terms of peace
were signed May 31, 1902.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1900.
AREA. —113,642 square miles.
CLIMATE. -- Salubrious; rain
copious on the eastern side, the
interior and west very dry.
POPULATION. — 1,354,200.
CAPITAL. — Pretoria.
GOVERNMENT. — By an Admini-
strator, aided by a Provincial
Council (elected for three years), and an Executive
Committee of four members.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — For local administration there are
elective municipalities.

RACES. — British, Boers of Dutch descent, aboriginal and
other coloured races.

DEVELOPMENT. — Immense progress has been made in the
gold mining centre round Johannesberg, now the largest
city in South Africa.

RELIGION. — English Episcopal and Free Churches, and
the Dutch Reformed Church.

LANGUAGES. — English, Dutch and native dialects.

EDUCATION. — Elementary education free and compulsory
for white children ; both English and Dutch is taught in
the schools.

PRODUCTS. — Gold, wool, cattle, hides, grain and ostrich
feathers.

•>02

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AFRICA

ORANGE FREE STATE PROVINCE
HISTORY. — Founded by the Boers who trekked from
Cape Colony in 1836, and recognised in 1854 as an inde-
pendent Dutch Republic, the Orange Free State joined
the Transvaal Government in October, 1899, in its dispute
with the British, and commenced hostilities. After its
occupation by Lord Roberts, the country was formally
annexed, and has since become one of the constituent
provinces of the South African Union.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1900.
AREA. — 50, 392 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Hot, especially in the middle and western
divisions where the temperature often rises to 105° F. and
108° F. The eastern division is cooler and more
humid.

POPULATION. — At census of 1904, 387,315, of whom
142,679 were Europeans.

CAPITAL. — Bloemfontein.

GOVERNMENT. — By an Administrator, aided by a
Provincial Council (elected for three years). There is an
Executive Committee of four members.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Roman-Dutch law prevails. The
Resident Magistrates' Courts have both civil and criminal
jurisdiction.

ADMINISTRATOR.— His Hon. A. E. W. Ramsbottom.

RACES. — British and Dutch, Kaffir and other natives.

DEVELOPMENT. — Nearly 1000 miles of railway have been
constructed.

RELIGION. — Chiefly that of the Dutch Reformed Church.
LANGUAGES. — English and Dutch.

EDUCATION. — Administered by a Government Department
at Bloemfontein. There are 377 free Government schools
in the colony.

PRODUCTS. — Horses, cattle, ostriches, grain ; diamonds,
garnets and other precious stones ; coal.

203

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AFRICA

BASUTOLAND

HISTORY. — A native province which was separated from
Cape Colony in 1884, after a great national Pitso of the
Basutos had taken place, in which their representative
chiefs had agreed to comply with the terras offered them
by the Imperial Government.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1884.

AREA. — 10,293 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Excellent, mean temperature 58-76° F.

POPULATION. — The census of 1904 showed 347,731
natives, and 895 white people.

CAPITAL. — Maseru.

GOVERNMENT. — The territory is governed by a Resident
Commissioner under the direction of the High Commis-
sioner for South Africa, the latter possessing the legislative
authority which is exercised by proclamation.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The chiefs adjudicate on cases
between natives ; appeals lying to the Magistrates' Courts.
A hut tax is levied.

RESIDENT COMMISSIONER. — Herbert Cecil Stoley, C.M.G.

RACES. — Basutos, a people belonging to the Bechuana
stock, or closely allied to it.

DEVELOPMENT. — The roads are now in good condition ; a
bridge has been constructed across the little Caledon River.

RELIGION.— Christian Missions are making good pro-
gress.

LANGUAGE. — Suto or Sesuto.

EDUCATION. — There are 254 schools, with 13,000 scholars,
a large proportion being in the schools of the French
Protestant Mission. Grants in aid of education to the
extent of .£9,100 were made in 1905-10.

PRODUCTS.— Immense herds of cattle and horses are
reared, and it is one of the finest grain-producing districts
in South Africa.

204

THK BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AFRICA

BECHUANALAND PROTECTORATE

HISTORY. — A large region to the north of Cape Colony,
which was placed under British protection in 1885, when
Sir Charles Warren visited the principal chiefs, Khama,
Gasitsive and Sebele. The limits of the Protectorate were
more clearly denned in 1891, and since the annexation of
British Bechuanaland to the Cape, the Protectorate has been
governed as a separate territory.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1885.

AREA. — 275,000 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Healthy during the summer which lasts for
seven months of the year.

POPULATION. — 150,000.

CHIEF TOWNS. — Francistown, Gaberones, Tati. The
centre of administration is at Mafeking in Cape Colony.

GOVERNMENT. — By a High Commissioner assisted by two
Assistant Commissioners.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The principal native chief is Khama,
chief of the Bamangwato. The Bechuanaland Protectorate
Police Force is under the direct control of the Resident
Commissioner.

RESIDENT COMMISSIONER — Lieut. -Col. Pauzera.

RACES. — Bechuana Kaffirs, of Bantu race.

DEVELOPMENT. — The railway to Bulawayo runs along the
eastern border of the Protectorate. Little has been done
as yet to develop the country, a large portion of which is
taken up by the Kalahari Desert.

RELIGION. — Totemic, but Christianity is making good
progress.

LANGUAGE. — Chuana or Sechuana.

PRODUCTS. — Maize, cattle and wood.

SWAZILAND

HISTORY. — Swaziland or " Kwangwane " as it is called by
the natives, is a somewhat mountainous region adjacent to
the Transvaal and Natal. The natives are the descendants
of early Bantu invaders. The independence of Swaziland
was expressly stipulated for in the Conventions of Pretoria
(1881) and London 1884. In 1890, with the consent of the

205

THK BRITISH EMPIRK — IN AFRICA

S W A z I L A N D — continued

Swazis, a provisional government was set up under a Con-
vention between Great Britain and the South African
Republic. After the Boer war, the country passed with the
Transvaal under British rule.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1903.

AREA. — 6,536 square miles.

CLIMATE. — \Vell watered and healthy except in the Low
Veldt.

POPULATION. — 86,381 including 890 whites.

CAPITAL. — Mbabane.

GOVERNMENT. — A native Queen Regent, Lonatsebeni.
A Resident Commissioner, with Assistant Commissioners
and other Officers, administer justice and collect taxes.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The jurisdiction of the Paramount
and other chiefs is retained in civil cases affecting aboriginal
natives only. For Europeans the Roman-Dutch Common
Law as modified by Statute prevails.

RESIDENT COMMISSIONER. — R. T. Coryndon, Esq.

RACES. — Ama-Swazis, a section of the Zulu race.

DEVELOPMENT. — Tin mining is carried on extensively in
the neighbourhood of Mbabane. Experiments are being
conducted in cotton growing.

RELIGION. — The English Church Mission, the South
African General Mission and the Scandinavian Alliance
Mission have representatives in the country.

EDUCATION. — Schools for Europeans and native children
exist at Bremersdorp, Ferreira's Hluti and Zambodi.

PRODUCTS. — Tin, gold (small quantity), and agricultural
produce such as millet, maize, pumpkins and ground nuts.

RHODESIA

HISTORY. — A Royal charter was granted in 1889 to the
British South Africa Company conferring upon it large
administrative powers in the region north of the Transvaal.
This vast territory, as yet only partially developed, was
named Rhodesia after the distinguished South African
political leader, Cecil Rhodes.

206

THE BRITISH KMPIKK — IN AFRICA

R H o D E S I A— continued

In 1893, the Matabeles, having made a raid upon
Mashonaland, were defeated at Bulawayo.

A second rebellion of the natives
led to the war of 1896. During
the Boer war, Southern Rhodesia
raised a company of volunteers, who
took part in the relief of Mafeking.
DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1889.
AREA. — Southern Rhodesia,
184,000 square miles. North-
Eastern Rhodesia, 109,000 square
miles.

CLIMATE. — Sub-tropical, the
Uplands of Southern Rhodesia
are healthy and bracing.

POPULATION. — A little over a
million, of whom about 1000 are
Europeans.
CAPITAL. — Salisbury.

GOVERNMENT. — An Administrator assisted by an Executive
Council, consisting of four members who hold office for
three years, and a Legislative Council, consisting of the
Adminstrator, the Resident Commissioner and 14 members.
LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — As those in force in the Cape of
Good Hope Province as far as they are applicable.

RACES. — British ; Matabeles, an offshoot of the Zulu
nation, and Mashonas.

DEVELOPMENT. — In 1905, 1,900 miles of railways were
open, and the Cape to Cairo line reached the Victoria
Falls in 1904. There are about 300 registered companies
interested in mining and development work in the territory.
RELIGION. — Totemism and Fetishism still linger among
the natives.

LANGUAGES. — Ndau, Shona and Tabele.
EDUCATION. — There were in 1908, 22 State-aided schools
and 50 native schools.

PRODUCTS. — Gold, silver, copper, blende, antimony,
arsenic, lead and coal, ivory, tobacco, rubber, cotton,
cereals, hides, and skins.

THE BRITISH KMPIRK — IN AFRICA

George C. Denton

WEST AFRICAN DOMINIONS

GAMBIA

HISTORY. — The Gambia, one of the great rivers of Western
Africa, was discovered by^Portuguese navigators in 1447.
Queen Elizabeth granted a charter
to a British company to trade, and
in 1686, a fort was built upon a
rocky island. The settlement was
recognised as British, by the
Treaty of Versailles, 1783, and, in
1807, was put under the government
of Sierra Leone. It became a
Colony in 1843, and was con-
stituted a separate government in
1888, under which are now
included the Island of St. Mary,
British Combo, Albreda, the Ceded
Mile, McCarthy's Island and various
other islands and territories on the banks of the river.
DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1843.

AREA. — Including additional protected areas, 3,980
square miles.

CLIMATE. — The best part of the year is from the end of
November to the middle of May. Unhealthy during the
rainy season.

POPULATION. — 160,807.
CAPITAL. — Bathurst.

GOVERNMENT. — Administered under a Governor with an
Executive and a Legislative Council.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Travelling commissioners go for
200 miles up the river, there are also magistrates and native
courts. A hut tax of about 43. per family is imposed in the
Protectorate.

RACES. — Negroes of the Jollof, Mandingo, Sarahouli,
Fullah and Jolah tribes.

DEVELOPMENT. — Communication with the interior is
easy, owing to the numerous steamers on the river. There
are good roads. No railway systems, or local telegraph
have been opened up yet.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AFRICA

G AMBI A — continued

RELIGION. — Mohammedans and Pagans.

LANGUAGE. — Jollof and Mandingo are the chief native
dialects.

EDUCATION. — There are eight elementary Government-
aided schools, also a Wesleyan secondary, and a technical
school.

PRODUCTS. — Ground nuts, beeswax, hides, rice, millet,
sweet potatoes, cotton and india-rubber.

THE GOLD COAST COLONY

HISTORY. — The first European settlement on the Gold
Coast was established in 1482, when the Fort San Jorge da
Mina was built and garrisoned by the Portuguese. Later,
the Dutch and other nationalities set up trading stations on
the coast In 1807 the Ashantis conquered the Fantis, a
tribe friendly to the British, and, in 1824, defeated Sir Charles
McCarthy at Accra. Two years later the Ashantis were
totally defeated by Colonel Purdon, and a treaty of peace
was subsequently concluded by the governor, Mr. Maclean,
who greatly strengthened British influence on the coast, and
became Judicial Assessor to the native chiefs. By the
convention made between England and Holland in 1871, the
Dutch transferred all their forts and possessions to the
English. After the victories of Sir Garnet Wolseley in
the Ashanti war of 1873, the Gold Coast Colony was
separated from the West Africa Settlements, and placed
under a Governor-in-Chief.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1850.

AREA. — Including Ashanti and Protectorate, about
82.000 square miles.

CLIMATE. — On the low and swampy coast, very unhealthy ;
better inland.

POPULATION. — 1,500,000, of whom about 1000 are
Europeans.

CAPITAL. — Accra.

GOVERNMENT. — Administered by a governor with an
Executive and a Legislative Council.

209

THK HRITISH EMPIKF. — IN AFRICA

THE GOLD COAST COLONY— continued
LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — British Common Law and Equity
modified by local ordinances. Native law is administered
in all the courts, in so far as it
is not incompatible with statute
law.

RACES. — Ashanti, Fanti.
DEVELOPMENT. — Great efforts
are being made to improve sanitary
conditions of the coast towns.
Telegraph and railway systems
have been established.

LANGUAGE. — Accra or Ga,
Ashanti, Fanti and Ewe are the
chief native dialects.

RELIGION. — Fetishism among
the more degraded coast natives,
but the number of Mohammedans
and Christians is steadily increasing.

EDUCATION. — The Government assists the Wesleyan,
Roman Catholic and German missionaries in educational
matters, and has established schools of its own.

PRODUCTS. — Gold, rubber, ivory, gum-copal, cocoa,
cotton, lumber, grains and oil.

J. F. Thorburn, Esq.. C.il.

SIERRA LEONE

HISTORY. — This old-established British colony dates from
the cession, by King Nembana, of certain coast lands to
Captain John Taylor and a company of settlers in 1788.
During the period when England was struggling to sup-
press the over-sea traffic in slaves, Sierra Leone was
much used as a settlement for Africans rescued from slave
ships.

The eastern frontier of the colony was settled by an
agreement made between Great Britain and France in
January, 1895, by which the colony relinquished all control
of the head waters of the Niger.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1788.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AFRICA

SIERRA LEONE— continued

AREA. — Including protected territory, 53,100 square miles.
CLIMATE. — Very hot and moist. Temperature varies be-
tween 64-5° and 100-5° F. A dry, dust-laden wind, the
" Harmattan " is prevalent between December and March.

POPULATION. — About 1,500,000.

CAPITAL. — Freetown.

GOVERNMENT. — A Governor aided by Executive and
Legislative Councils.

GOVERNOR. — Sir Edward M. Merewether.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Among the natives, a curious
tribal system of government exists ; each village has its
nominal king but he, in turn, is subject to a secret and power-
ful association the purra or porro possessing its special
language, tattoo marks and symbols.

RACES. — The leading native tribes are the Temnes in the
north, the Mendes in the south, and the Yonnis in the middle
districts.

DEVELOPMENT. — A railway has been constructed from
Freetown into the interior as far as Pendemba, a distance
of 227 miles.

RELIGION. — Protestants, Roman Catholics, Moham-
medans and Pagans.

LANGUAGE. — English, and native dialects such as Mende,
Bullon and Yalunka.

EDUCATION. — There are 75 primary schools, 74 secondary
schools, a technical school, and Fourah Bay College, which
is affiliated to the University of Durham.

PRODUCTS. — Rubber, gum, palm oil, and palm kernels,
benni seed, rice, ground and kola nuts.

SOUTHERN NIGERIA

HISTORY. — The island of Lagos has been under British
protection since 1851, when King Kosoko, having refused to
co-operate in the suppression of the slave trade, was deposed.
In 1861, the island was ceded by his successor, King Docemo,
and it became, in 1866, part of the government of the

211

THE BRITISH EMPIKK — IN AFRICA

SOUTHERN NIGERIA— continued

West African Settlements. Later, Palma, Leckie, the King-
dom of Appa and parts of the Mahin Ogbo and Jekri
territories were added. In 1890,
Kotonu was exchanged with the
French for the kingdom of Pokra.
A military expedition in 1892 against
the Jebus resulted in the inclusion
in the protectorate of a portion of
their country and the opening up
of an important trade route to the
interior. In 1899, Ikorodu was
ceded and the protectorate extended
to the boundaries of Northern
Nigeria. It was constituted the
colony of Southern Nigeria by
Royal Letters Patent, in 1906.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1861.
AREA. — 77,260 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Unhealthy for Europeans ; there are four
seasons : the wet, the dry, and two tornado seasons. Mean
temperature 80*5° F.

POPULATION. — Approximately, six millions ; Europeans,
1120.

CAPITAL. — Lagos.

GOVERNMENT. — Governor, assisted by Executive and
Legislative Councils.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — There is a Supreme Court for the
whole colony, presided over by the Chief Justice ; the laws
in force have been codified. Native law is administered
when not incompatible with any statute nor repugnant to
natural justice. There is a superintendent of native affairs
at Abeokuta.

RACES. — Europeans, Jejis, Yorubas, and Benins (or Benis).
DEVELOPMENT. — Railways, steam tramways, telegraph
and telephone systems have been instituted. Rubber,
cocoa and cotton planting are being actively developed.

RELIGION. — Paganism, but Christianity is making
progress.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AFRICA

SOUTHERN NIGERIA— continued
LANGUAGES. — (Native) Yoruba, Hausa, Ibo.
EDUCATION. — Government has instituted a system of

primary and secondary schools. There are also grammar

and high schools.

PRODUCTS. — Palm oil and kernels, ivory, gum-copal,

rubber, coffee, cocoa, cotton, hides and fruit.

NORTHERN NIGERIA

HISTORY. — British traders visited the Niger and adjacent
rivers and creeks known as the Oil Rivers in the iyth
century, and made successful settlements during the follow-
ing century. Early in the igth century, Mungo Park traced
the course of the Upper Niger from Bamako to Boussa. In
1852, McGregor Laird established stations and endea-
voured to bring the country under British influence.
Largely owing to the exertions of Sir George Goldie,
who visited the Niger in 1877, the National African
Company was formed to take over local mercantile
interests and secure a charter. This company, after-
wards re-organised as the Royal Niger Company, raised a
military force and extended the sphere of influence,
successfully resisting the attacks of the Fulah tribes and
actively discouraging the slave trade In 1895 the rights
and powers of the Company were transferred to the
crown, and in 1900 the whole of Northern Nigeria was
constituted a British Protectorate.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1895.

AREA. — 258,000 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Fairly healthy in the inland regions.

POPULATION. — Estimated at 8,000,000.

CHIEF TOWN. — Kamo ; centre of administration, Zungeru.

GOVERNMENT. — A Governor and Commander-in-Chief
controls the Protectorate, which_is divided into provinces,
each under the supervision of a resident.

213

THK BRITISH KMPIRF — IN AFRICA

NORTHERN NIGERI A— c ontinued

LAW AND CUSTOMS. — There is a supreme court, presided
over by the Chief Justice, also provincial and native
courts, under the supervision of
residents.

RACES. — Negroes of the Haussa,
Fulah and other tribes.

DEVELOPMENT. — A railway exists
from Barijuks to Zungeru and
another is being constructed from
Baro to Kano, a distance of 400
miles.

RELIGION. — Mohammedanism is
widely diffused, and in some parts
Paganism. Protestant and Catholic
sir :•-:. Beaketb : missions are at work.

LANGUAGE. — Principal native
language is Hansa.

EDUCATION. — Projects are under consideration for the
formation of a comprehensive school system.

PRODUCTS. — Cotton, indigo, rubber, hides, ivory and
minerals.

BRITISH EAST AND CENTRAL AFRICA
THE SOMALILAND PROTECTORATE

HISTORY. — A Protectorate was established over the tribes
on the Somali coast in 1884. It was administered till 1898
by the Resident at Aden as a dependency of the Govern-
ment of India. In 1901, Captain Swayne led a successful
expedition against the fanatical Somali leader the Mullah
Mohammed Abdullah. Hostilities were continued until
1904, when the dervishes were finally defeated by British
and native troops under Sir C. E. Egerton at the battle of
Jidballi. In the following year, an agreement was concluded
whereby peace was declared between the dervishes and the
neighbouring tribes.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AFRICA

SOMALILAN D— continued

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1884.

AREA. — About 68,000 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Intensely hot and dry ; there is a great desert
in the south known as the Haud.

POPULATION. — 300,000.

CHIEF TOWN. — Berbera.

GOVERNMENT. — By a Commissioner appointed by the
Colonial Officer.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The people are nomadic in habits,
being chiefly engaged in hunting and cattle herding.

COMMISSIONER AND COMMANDER-IN-CHIEF. — Brig. -Gen.
W. H. Manning, K.C.M.G., C.B.

RACES. — The Somalis are regarded as consisting of
mingled arab and negro grafts on the original Hamitic
stock.

RELIGION. — Mohammedan.

LANGUAGE. — Somal is a language whose structure and
vocabulary are essentially Hamitic with affinities in the
Galla and Dankali dialects, spoken by neighbouring tribes.
It has no written standard, and but little in the way of oral
literature, save a few proverbs, brief stories and songs.

PRODUCTS. — Skins and hides, ostrich feathers and gum.

THE EAST AFRICA PROTECTORATE

HISTORY. — The East Africa Protectorate extends from
German East Africa to Abyssinia, and as far inland as the
borders of Uganda. The original concession was made
to a company called the British East Africa Company,
but the territory was transferred, in 1895, to the British
Government, and in 1905 was placed under the supervision
of the Colonial Office.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1895.

AREA. — Estimated to be 200,000 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Fairly healthy for the tropics ; the highlands
or central plateaux have a temperate climate ; mean
average temperature 78° F.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IX AFRICA

EAST AFRICA PROTECTORATE— continued
POPULATION. — Estimated at 4,000,000.
CAPITAL. — Mombasa.

GOVERNMENT. — By a Governor
and Commander-in-Chief assisted
by Legislative and Executive
Councils.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The Indian
Codes are followed as much as
possible; the High Court is situated
at Mombasa,

RACES. — A few Europeans and
Eurasians ; Asiatics. On the coast
Arabs and Swahilis predominate ;
farther inland Bantu and non-
Bantu tribes, such as the Masai,
the Somalis and the Gallas.

DEVELOPMENT. — The Uganda
railway connects Mombasa with Lake Victoria Nyanza.
Agriculture is flourishing in the highlands.

RELIGION. — Paganism is prevalent, but Mohammedanism
has made great progress. There are many Christian mission
stations.

LANGUAGES. — Swahili, Soga, Kikuyu.
EDUCATION. — Elementary schools are established at the
mission stations.

PRODUCTS. — Ivory, grain, rubber, fibre and timber.

Sir E. P C.
K.C.M.G., Go\

THE UGANDA PROTECTORATE

HISTORY. — This fertile region extending along the north-
west shore of the Victoria Nyanza, and called by Stanley
" The Pearl of Africa," was first visited by Speke and Grant
in 1862. At the request of King Mtesa, English Protestant
missionaries settled in the country in 1877, but Mtesa's son and
successor, Mwanga, persecuted the Christians, and Bishop
Hannington was murdered at his instigation in 1855. By
the Anglo-German agreement of 1887, Uganda was recog-

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AFRICA

UGANDA PROTECTORATE— continued

nised as being within the British sphere, and a protectorate
was proclaimed in 1894, when the Government took over
the administrative functions of the
British East Africa Company.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1894.

AREA. — 117,681 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Mild; average maxi-
mum temperature 78-2° ; minimum
66-9° F.

POPULATION. — 3,240,000.

CAPITAL. — Mengo ; headquarters
of British administration, Entebbe.

GOVERNMENT. — The Governor
and Commander-in-Chief exercises
general control ; there is also a
native king, or " Kabaka," H. H.
Daudi Chua, and the native kings
and chiefs are encouraged to govern their own
subjects.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — There is a High Court for the
Protectorate, with an Appeal Court at Zanzibar ; the native
king is at present a minor, and is under a regency of three
chiefs ; there is also a native council of 80 chiefs called the
Lukiko.

RACES. — The Waganda.

DEVELOPMENT. — The railway runs from Mombasa on the
coast, to Port Florence, on the Victoria Nyanza, a distance
of 584 miles.

RELIGION. — Christianity has to a large extent replaced the
primitive paganism of the natives.
LANGUAGE . — Bantu.

EDUCATION. — There are schools in connection with the
various missions.

PRODUCTS. — Ivory, skins, chillies, cotton, rubber, ground
nuts and sugar.

217

THE BRITISH KMPIRK — IN AFRICA

NYASALAND PROTECTORATE

HISTORY. — This territory was first opened up to British
influence by Dr. Livingstone in 1859. In 1889 an applica-
tion was made for a charter by
the British South Africa Company,
and an expedition under Major
Pinto, was despatched to the Upper
Zambesi and Lower Loangwa. In
the same year Sir H. H. Johnston
arrived at Mozambique as H.B.M.
Consul, and, travelling into the
interior, arranged important treaties
with the native chiefs of the Nyasa
region. The Anglo-Portuguese
convention of 1891 ratified the
work of Sir H. H. Johnston, Sir
Alfred Sharpe, and other pioneers
of British Central Africa. Troubles
with Arab slave traders and hostile
tribes resulted in three gunboats
being placed upon the Lake Nyasa.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1891.
AREA. — 43,608 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Tropical ; temperature reaches i2oc F. in the
summer, but the Shire highlands are cooler.

POPULATION. — 948,276.

CHIEF TOWNS. — Blantyre, Zomba (headquarters of the
Government).

GOVERNMENT. — By a Governor and Commander-in-Chief,
assisted by an executive and a legislative council.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Local ordinances and such British
Acts as are of general application. There is a High Court
and also a Court of Admiralty.

RACES. — Europeans, Indians and natives (Arabs,
Wahengas, Yaos).

DEVELOPMENT. — A railway has been opened up, and a
telegraph line connects the Protectorate with Cape Town,
At Zomba a system of official telephones has been installed.

LANGUAGES. — Nyanja, Nya?a and Yao.

EDUCATION. — There are 839 schools, with 75 European
teachers, and ten Christian missions are at work.

PRODUCTS. — Ivory, tobacco, india-rubber, oil seeds,
coffee, wheat and rice. Merino sheep thrive well.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AFRICA

Cavendish. Boyle

MAURITIUS

HISTORY. — An island in the Indian Ocean, 500 miles east
of Madagascar. It was uninhabited when discovered, in
1507, by Mascarenhas. The Portu-
guese held it till 1598, when it
passed to the Dutch, who named
it Mauritius, after their Prince
Maurice, but abandoned it in 1712.
A French Governor Mahe de
Labourdonnais laid the foundation
of the prosperity of the colony by
the introduction of the sugar cane
(1735-1746).

The island was captured by the
English during the Napoleonic
wars, and its possession confirmed
by the Treaty of Paris, 1814.
Among the dependencies of the
colony are Rodrigues, the Oil
Islands, and the St. Brandon group,

with a total area of 172 square miles, and apopulation of 4,859.
DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1810.
AREA. — 705 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Hot, but not unhealthy, except in a few low-
lying districts. Mean temperature 78° F.
POPULATION. — 375,385.
CAPITAL. — Port Louis.

GOVERNMENT. — Administered by a Governor, aided by
executive and legislative councils.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The law is based upon the code
Napoleon and other French laws, modified by colonial
ordinances.

RACES. — There are many residents of French descent ;
also negroes, Malagasy, Cingalese, Malays and Chinese, but
the greater part of the population consists of Indian coolies.

DEVELOPMENT. — Railways, tramways, telegraph and
telephone systems exist. The capital is strongly fortified.

RELIGION. — Christian denominations, of which the Roman
Catholic is the chief. Hinduism and Mohammedanism.

LANGUAGE. — French is spoken all over the island, English
and French in the Council, and English in the Courts of
Justice.

EDUCATION. — There are government elementary and
secondary schools.

PRODUCTS. — Sugar, rum, vanilla, aloe fibres and cocoa-
nut oil.

219

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AERICA

Esq.. C.il.

THE SEYCHELLES

HISTORY. — A group of eighty-nine islands in the Indian
Ocean, situated about 935 miles north of Mauritius. Their
position was first defined in
1743, when Labourdonnais was
Governor of Mauritius and M.
Picault took possession of them
in the name of the King of France.
Later the group was named the
Seychelles in honour of the
Vicomte Moreau de Seychelles,
a Minister of Louis XV. During
the war of the French revolution
Mahe was captured by Captain
Newcombe, and, in 1810, was
formally taken possession of by
the appointment of an Agent. In
1903 the Seychelles became a
separate crown colony.

DATE OF ANNEXATION'. — 1810.
AREA. — 155 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Tropical but healthy, temperature 70° to 93° F.
POPULATION. — 22,409.
C APITAL . — Victoria.

GOVERNMENT. — The government is vested in the
Governor, assisted by an executive and a legislative
council. The Governor is president of both Councils.
LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Similar to those of Mauritius.
RACES. — French Creoles, Negroes, Coolies.
DEVELOPMENT. — There is a good road system in Mahe,
and further road-making is in progress in other islands.
RELIGION. — Roman Catholic.
LANGUAGE. — English and French.

EDUCATION. — There are 24 Roman Catholic and Church
of England primary schools, and a Government school (the
Victoria School) where education of a higher class is
provided.

PRODUCTS. — Cocoanuts, vanilla and cacao.

ASCENSION

HISTORY. — A solitary island in the middle of the South
Atlantic, 685 miles north-west of St. Helena. Said to have
received its name from having been discovered by a

220

THK BRITISH EMPIRK — IN AFRICA

A S C E N S I O N— c onti n u e cl

Portuguese explorer on Ascension Day, 1501. Ascension
island was first occupied by the British in 1815, when
Napoleon was at. St. Helena ; it is
now used as a sanatorium.
DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1815.
AREA. — 38 square miles.
CLIMATE. — Dry and salubrious
up to i, 800 feet, but above that
height to its limit it is damp and

foggy.

POPULATION. — 266.

GARRISON STATION. — George-
town.

GOVERNMENT. — The island of
Ascension is rated on the books
of the Admiralty as a warship.

RACES. — The inhabitants consist
of seamen, marines, officers and
their families and Kroomen.
PRODUCTS. — Turtles, turtle eggs, fruit and vegetables.

FALKLAND ISLANDS

HISTORY. — East Falkland, West Falkland, and about 100
small islands are situated in the south Atlantic Ocean some
480 miles north-east of Cape Horn.
They were discovered by Davis in
1592, and visited by Hawkins two
years later.

In 1764, the islands were taken
possession of by France, but the
small colony settled by Bourgain-
ville, on E. Falkland, was brought
out by the Spaniards. The British
maintained a settlement with some
interruption from 1767 to 1774,
but after that date no formal
occupation was made until 1832,
when the Government took pos-
session of the islands for the
protection of the whale fishery.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1832.

221

THK BRITISH EMFIKK — IN AFRICA

FALKLAND ISLANDS— continued

AREA. — 6,500 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Temperature 20° to 50° F. in winter, 40° to
65° F. in summer.

POPULATION. — 2,323.

CHIEF TOWN. — Port Stanley.

GOVERNMENT. — Is vested in a Governor, aided by an
executive and a legislative council.

RELIGION. — There are three places of worship (one Church
of England, one Roman Catholic, and one Baptist).

LANGUAGE. — English.

EDUCATION. — Compulsory Government, Roman Catholic
and other schools.

PRODUCTS. — Wool, hides and skins and tallow.

ST. HELENA

HISTORY. — A lonely island in the Atlantic, 1,200 miles from
the west coast of Africa. It was discovered by the Portuguese in
1502, and taken possession of by the
British East India Company in 1651.
Napoleon Bonaparte was con-
fined to this island from 1815 till
his death in 1821.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1651.
AREA. — 47 square miles.
CLIMATE. — Salubrious. Even
temperature.

POPULATION. — 3,577.
CAPITAL. — Jamestown.
GOVERNMENT. — Administered by
a Governor, with the aid of an
executive council. The Governor
alone makes ordinances, there being
no legislative council, put power
is reserved to legislate by Order of
His Majesty in Council.
LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — British law prevails and is adminis-
tered by ajudgeof the Summary Court and Police Magistrate.
RACES. — British and Negroes.

DEVELOPMENT. — Connected by cable with Cape Town,
and with St. Vincent.

RELIGION. — There is an Anglican Bishop.
LANGUAGE. — English.

EDUCATION. — There are nine schools receiving a
government grant.

PRODUCTS. — Flax and other agricultural produce and fish.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE

NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA

224

THE DOMINION OF CANADA

The vast territory extending for 4000 miles from east to
west across the upper half of the North American continent,
from St. Lawrence and Labrador to British Columbia and
the Alaskan frontier, presents the most remarkable spectacle
of successful colonisation which the world affords. Canada
has become the greatest of Britannia's daughter States, great
alike in the natural resources of the country and in the
character of her people. The name Canada is probably
derived from an Indian word Kannatha, meaning village,
but understood by the first French settlers to apply to the
country at large. Its eastern shores were discovered by
Sebastian Cabot in 1497. It was in 1534 that Jacques
Cartier landed near Gasp£, but little was done by way of
settlement till 1608, when Champlain founded Quebec, and
explored the St. Lawrence river.

From this time till 1763, the greater part of the country,
excluding Hudson Bay Territory, Nova Scotia and New-
foundland, was French territory, but after a prolonged
struggle, Quebec was captured by General Wolfe in 1759,
and four years later Canada was ceded to the British by the
Treaty of Paris.

The territory thus brought under the British flag is almost The world's
as large as the continent of Europe, and contains granary
within itself all kinds of climate, all sorts of natural
productions, vast mineral wealth, and an enormous area
of fertile land destined to be the future granary of the
world. South of the latitude of St. Petersburg there are in
Canadian territory 2,000,000 square miles of land capable of
cultivation, of which fully one-half will produce every crop
that is grown in Great Britain.

The most striking physical features of Canada are the
Rocky Mountains, the Laurentian Range, and the chain of
immense fresh water lakes and mighty rivers which intersect
the plains and valleys of this wonderful land.

To the far north all the great Arctic Islands, except
Greenland, belong to Canada.

Vast forests, which supply timber to all parts of the
world, and constitute an important part of the natural
wealth of the country, are found in the eastern provinces,

225

THE RIGHT HON. EARI, GRKV
Governor-General of the Dominion of Canada

226

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AMERICA

in British Columbia, and in the great north-west territories
beyond Saskatchewan.

The climate is favourable to the white race and to agri-
culture. The air is dry, bracing and exhilarating. The
cold in winter, and the heat in summer, are greater than in
England, but the conditions for the rapid growth of cereals,
namely, warm sunshine and a sufficiency of rain, are present,
and combine to produce abundant crops throughout the
great wheat-growing belt.

Among the immense mineral deposits which appear prac-
tically inexhaustible are coal, iron, nickel, copper and gold.

In 1867, the provinces of Ontario, Quebec, Nova Scotia
and New Brunswick were united under one federal govern-
ment ; in 1870, Manitoba and the north-east territories were
added, British Columbia joined the Confederation in 1871,
and Prince Edward Island in 1873. Territory not comprised
within any province, for instance, the north-east territory
and the Arctic Islands, is administered by the Minister of
the Interior.

AREA. — 3,745,574 square miles.

POPULATION. — (In 1909) 7,184,000.

CAPITAL. — Ottawa.

GOVERNMENT. — The political institutions of Canada are
modelled upon those of the Mother Country, there is a
Federal Parliament with a Senate whose members are
nominated for life, a House of Commons consisting of 221
members elected quinquennially by ballot.

The Governor, .representing the King, is assisted by a
Privy Council chosen by himself. In each of the provinces
there is a Lieutenant-Governor appointed by the Governor-
General in Council.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The Dominion Parliament has
executive and legislative power in all matters, including
finance, trade, postal service, currency, banking, naviga-
tion, defence, except those specifically delegated to the
Provincial legislatures.

RACES. — Canadians of British and French descent,
Germans, North American Indians.

DEVELOPMENT. — Means of transit have been greatly
developed in recent years. In 1909 there where sixty-five
railway lines in the Dominion, with a total mileage of 24,104.
In addition to the magnificent natural waterways provided
by the lakes and rivers, a great system of canals has been
constructed.

RELIGION. — Roman Catholic, Methodist, Presbyterian,
Church of England, Baptist.

227

THE R T . HON. SIR WILFRID L A u R i ic R
Premier and President of the Privy Council of Canada

228

THK BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AMERICA

ONTARIO

HISTORY. — After the cession of Canada to Great Britain
by the Treaty of Paris, 1763, Ontario was governed by
military authority for several
years. In 1791 an act was passed
dividing the country into two
provinces, Upper Canada (now
Ontario), and Lower Canada
(Quebec). Ontario was largely
founded by the immigration of
Loyalists from the United States
after the War of Independence.
Some dissatisfaction arose owing
to the governors and executive
councils not possessing the
confidence of the provincial
Hon. sir j. P. Whitney, assemblies. This culminated in
a rebellion in 1837-38. Lord

Durham having been sent out from England with special
powers, he recommended a union of the provinces
and foreshadowed the larger confederation which has since
been adopted.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1763.
AREA. — 220,000 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Dry, bracing and very healthy, although the
range of temperature is very great. Mean temperature at
Toronto is 45° F.

POPULATION. — 2,182,947.

CAPITAL. — (Of the Dominion) Ottawa. (Of the Province)
Toronto.

GOVERNMENT. — Is vested in a Lieutenant-Governor and
legislative assembly composed of 106 members, elected for
four years. The executive council consists of eleven
members, eight of whom act as the ministry of the Province,
and three are without portfolios.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The law has its basis in British
Common Law, with such modifications as have been
introduced by the Federal and Provincial Legislatures.

229

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AMERICA

ONTARIO— c on tinned

LIEUTENANT-GOVERNOR. — Col. John Morrison Gibson,
K.C., LL.D.

RACES. — Mainly of British descent.

DEVELOPMENT. — There are between 6000 and 7000 miles
of railway in the province. Farming, mining, fisheries and
manufactures are all very important and successful
industries.

RELIGION. — Methodist, Presbyterian, Roman Catholic,
Church of England and Baptist.

LANGUAGE. — English.

EDUCATION. — Is under the control of the Minister of
Education. There are 6,418 elementary and high schools
in the province, and a fine university at Toronto. The
Ontario Agricultural College at Guelph supplies a general
education, together with a technical training in agriculture.

PRODUCTS. — Wheat, barley, oats, rye, peas, corn, cheese,
butter and fruit.

QUEBEC

HISTORY. — Quebec (formerly called Lower Canada) lies
to the east of Ontario on either side of the St. Lawrence
River. It is the historic home of French Canada, and
80 per cent, of the present inhabitants are of French
descent. The early settlers, missionaries and fur traders
who landed in 1608 suffered many hardships and were
frequently engaged in conflicts with Indian tribes.
From 1629 to 1632, Quebec was in English possession,
having been captured by David Kirk.

When Quebec was finally ceded to the British in 1763,
religious freedom for both Protestants and Roman Catholics
was secured, and at the same time the rights of the
Catholic clergy recognised. In 1791, a constitution was
established for Lower Canada, consisting of a legislative
council and house of assembly. When the Dominion of
Canada was formed, these bodies were merged in the
Federal Parliament. Quebec sends 24 members to the
Federal Senate and 65 to the House of Commons.

230

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AMERICA

Q U E B E C— c ontinued

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1763.
AREA. — 346,928 square miles.

POPULATION. — 1,620,974.
CLIMATE. — Dry, bracing, and
very healthy ; mean temperature
at Montreal 42°F.
CAPITAL. — Quebec.

GOVERNMENT OF THE PROVINCE.
— Is vested in a Lieutenant-Gov-
ernor and a Legislative Council
consisting of 24 members and a Leg-
islative Assembly of 74 members

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Based on
British Common Law.

Hon. Sir I.omer Gouiu LIEUTENANT - GOVERNOR. Sir

Premier and Attorney-General -,-, • T i-

Francois Langeher.
RACES. — Canadians, chiefly of French descent.

DEVELOPMENT. — Far advanced ; Montreal, a splendid
city on the St. Lawrence, is the chief seaport and most
populous town in the Dominion.

RELIGION. — Roman Catholic, Church of England,
Presbyterian, Methodist and Baptist.

LANGUAGE. — French, English.

EDUCATION. — Is under a Superintendent of Public
Instruction assisted by a council and 35 members. There
were, in 1908, 6,511 schools including high schools. The
Catholic University of Laval is situated in the City of
Quebec. There are also two protestant universities, McGill
College, Montreal, and Bishop's College, Lennoxville.

PRODUCTS. — Beside the immensely valuable produce of its
farms, forests, mines, and fisheries, Quebec is a great
manufacturing country, its industries representing 47 per
cent, of the total capital invested in manufactures
throughout Canada.

231 o

THE BRITISH EMPIRK — IS AMERICA

NOVA SCOTIA

HISTORY. — A well-watered province, consisting of a long
narrow peninsular, and the island of Cape Breton.

It was discovered by Cabot in 1497, and partly colonised
by the French, who called it Acadie. It was ceded to the
British Crown in 1714, and entered the Confederation of the
Dominion of Canada in 1867.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1714.

AREA. — 20,907 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Temperate.

POPULATION. — 500,000.

CAPITAL. — Halifax.

GOVERNMENT. — By a Lieutenant-Governor, executive and
legislative councils.

LIEUTENANT-GOVERNOR. — Hon. J. D. McGregor.

PREMIER AND PROVINCIAL SECRETARY. — Hon. George
H. Murray.

RACES. — British ; many loyalist immigrants settled in
Nova Scotia after the American War of Independence.

DEVELOPMENT. — Coal mining and extensive steel and
iron works are carried on ; Halifax has a magnificent
harbour, and is one of the terminals of the inter-colonial
railway.

RELIGION. — Protestant.

LANGUAGE. — English.

EDUCATION. — Compulsory, 2,465 schools, also a technical
college and schools.

PRODUCTS. — Agricultural produce, fish, apples; minerals
and manufactures.

NEW BRUNSWICK

HISTORY. — A province nearly as large as Scotland, which
lies between the Gulf of St. Lawrence and the State of
Maine. It was part of the antient French province of
Acadie, and was ceded to England by the Treaty of Utrecht
in 1713. First colonised by British subjects in 1761, and
in 1763 by disbanded troops from New England.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1713.
. AREA.— 27,105 square miles.

232

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AMERICA

NEW BRUNSWICK— continued

CLIMATE. — Healthy, mean temperature 41° F.

POPULATION. — 331,120.

CAPITAL. — Fredericton, but the largest commercial centre
is St. John.

GOVERNMENT. — By a Lieutenant-Governor and executive
and legislative councils.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — New Brunswick is represented in
the Canadian Senate by ten members, and sends thirteen
members to the House of Commons.

LIEUTENANT-GOVERNOR. — Hon. L. J. Tweedie.

PREMIER AND ATTORNEY-GENERAL. — Hon. J. D. Hazen.

RACES. — Chiefly of British descent.

DEVELOPMENT. — A great portion of the province is
covered with forests of pine, spruce, hemlock, and other
timber.

RELIGION. — Protestant.

LANGUAGE. — English.

EDUCATION. — 1,820 schools; university at Fredericton,
also at Sackville and Memramcook.

PRODUCTS. — Coal, copper, iron, mineral oil ; also wheat,
Indian corn and other cereals.

MANITOBA

HISTORY. — The Earl of Selkirk brought a party of High-
land settlers to this region in 1812. It was called the Red
River Settlement until 1868, and was part of the territory
placed under the control of the Hudson Bay Company.
After the Company had surrendered their charter to the
Crown, an insurrection, headed by Kiel, occurred in the
colony, but was suppressed by Sir Garnet Wolseley.

During the last few years Manitoba has received a constant
stream of immigrants from Europe and the United States,
and bids fair to become the greatest wheat-growing province
of Canada. Its soil appears inexhaustibly rich and fertile,
and produces enormous crops.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1868.

AREA. — 72,864 square miles. vfc* *

233

THE BRITISH EMPIRE— IN AMERICA

M A N I T O B A — c onti n it e d

CLIMATE. — Cold but health}', mean temperature 33° F.

POPULATION. — 360,590.

CAPITAL. — Winnipeg.

GOVERNMENT. — By a Lieutenant-Governor, a ministry
and legislative assembly.

LIEUTENANT-GOVERNOR. — The Hon. Sir D. H. McMillan,
K.C.M.G.

PREMIER. — Hon. R. P. Roblin.

RACES. — Mainly British.

DEVELOPMENT. — There are at present 4,500 miles of
railway in the province, all built since 1879.

RELIGION. — Protestant and Catholic.

LANGUAGE. — English.

EDUCATION. — There is a Board of Education controlling
2,014 schools, and a University of Manitoba, with examining
and degree conferring powers.

PRODUCTS. — Wheat, horses, cattle, sheep and swine ;
gold is worked in the east ; coal, iron and timber.

BRITISH COLUMBIA

HISTORY. — British Columbia was constituted a Crown
Colony in 1858, owing to the large immigration on the dis-
covery of gold in that year.

Vancouver Island was leased to the Hudson Bay Company
in 1843, and made a Crown Colony in 1849.

In 1866 the Colonies of British Columbia and Vancouver
were united, and in 1871 entered the Canadian Confederation.

AREA. — 395,610 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Cold, but healthy.

POPULATION. — 260,000.

CAPITAL. — Victoria.

GOVERNMENT. — By a Lieutenant-Governor, a ministry and
legislative assembly.

LIEUTENANT - GOVERNOR. — Hon. Thomas William
Paterson.

THE BRITISH KMPIRE — IN AMERICA

BRITISH COLUMBI A — c o n t i n « e d

PREMIER. — Hon. Richard MacBride, K.C.

RACES. — In addition to the white population there are
about 29,000 Indians, 17,000 Chinese, 16,000 Japanese and
5,000 Hindus.

DEVELOPMENT. — There are 1,750 miles of railway (mainly
C.P.R.) in the province. Only one-tenth of the available
agricultural and fruit lands have as yet been settled upon,
and the coal mining industry is in the early stages.

EDUCATION. — There is a Council of Public Instruction.
The schools (numbering in 1908, 422) are free and non-
sectarian.

PRODUCTS. — Minerals (chiefly gold, silver, copper and
coal) ; fisheries (salmon, halibut, herrings, whale products
and oil) ; lumber, furs, skins, etc.

SASKATCHEWAN

HISTORY. — In the very centre of Canada, immediately west
of Manitoba, lies the great new province of Saskatchewan.
It comprises the eastern half of Athabasca and the greater
part of the old districts of Assiniboia and Saskatchewan, and
was constituted a separate province in 1905.

AREA. — 250,000 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Similar to that of Manitoba.

POPULATION. — 337,000.

CAPITAL. — Regina.

GOVERNMENT. — By a Lieutenant-Governor, a ministry
and a legislative council.

LIEUTENANT-GOVERNOR. — Hon. A. E. Forget.

RACES. — British, North American Indians.

DEVELOPMENT. — It is computed that there are over
150,600,000 acres of land suitable for cultivation and
awaiting settlement in Saskatchewan and Alberta. The
Canadian Pacific Railway runs through Regina.

ALBERTA

HISTORY. — A new province of Alberta was proclaimed on
September ist, 1905. It lies between Saskatchewan and
British Columbia, and formed part of what was formerly
called the North-West Territories. It includes the former

235

THK KKITISH EMPIRE — IN AMERICA

ALBERTA — continued

district of Alberta, the western half of Athabasca, and a strip
of Assiniboia and Saskatchewan.

AREA. — 253,000 square miles.

CLIMATE. — The mean temperature is slightly higher than
at Winnipeg.

POPULATION. — 350,000.

CAPITAL. — Edmonton.

GOVERNMENT. — By a Lientenant-Governor, a ministry and
legislative assembly.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The Dominion Government retains
control of the public lands, and pays an annual allowance
to the Provincial Government in consideration thereof.

LIEUTENANT-GOVERNOR. — Hon. G. H. V. Bulyea.

PREMIER, TREASURER AND MINISTER OF PUBLIC WORKS. —
Hon. Arthur Lewis Sefton.

RACES. — British, and immigrants of other nationalities are
rapidly taking up lands ; Indians.

DEVELOPMENT. — A branch of the C.P.R. runs through
the province, which is becoming a great wheat-growing
territory, the area in crops in 1909 was 1,262,644 acres.

RELIGION. — Protestant.

LANGUAGE. — English.

EDUCATION. — The Attorney-General is also the Minister
of Education.

PRODUCTS. — Wheat, cattle and dairy produce,

NEWFOUNDLAND

HISTORY. — A large island on the north-east side of the
Gulf of St. Lawrence, discovered by John Cabot in 1497.
It was visited as early as 1500 by Portuguese, Spanish
and French for its fisheries. In 1623, Sir G. Calvert,
afterwards Lord Baltimore, established himself in the
Peninsula of Avalon, and appointed his son as governor.
The French established a station at Placentia about
1620. The sovereignty of the island was acknowledged
to belong to Great Britain by the Treaty of Utrecht in 1713.
Disputes between the English and French fishermen were
finally settled by the Anglo-French Convention of 1904.

236

THE HRITISH EMPIRE — IN AMERICA

NEVVFOUNDLAN D— c onti n u e d

Labrador on the mainland, from Hudson's Strait to Blanc
Sablon, is included in the colony of Newfoundland.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1713.
AREA. — 42,734 square miles.
CLIMATE. — Salubrious. The
thermometer seldom falls below
zero in the winter, and in the
summer ranges from 70° to 80° F.
in the shade.

POPULATION. — 230,000.
CAPITAL. — St. Johns.
GOVERNMENT. — Is administered
by a Governor, executive and
legislative councils, and a House
of Assembly.
.lorris GOVERNOR. — Sir Ralph Champ-

neys Williams, K.C.M.G.

RACES. — British, also a few residents of French extrac-
tion.

DEVELOPMENT. — 638 miles of railway have opened up
large tracts of rich agricultural land.

RELIGION. — Church of England, Roman Catholic,
Methodist, Presbyterian and other denominations.

EDUCATION. — There is a government system of primary
education with 918 schools. Grants are also made in aid of
secondary and technical schools.

PRODUCTS. — Fish, potatoes, turnips, barley, oats, iron,
copper and coal.

JAMAICA

HISTORY. — The largest of the British West Indies,
Jamaica was discovered by Columbus in 1494. He called
it St. Jago, after the patron Saint of Spain, but its native
name (Xaymaca, well watered) has survived.

The island remained in the possession of the Spaniards
for 161 years, until captured by an English force sent by
Cromwell in 1655. It remained under military rule for
some years, but in 1660 a civil government was established.

237

THE BRITISH EMPIRE— IX AMERICA

Sir Sydney Olivier. K.C.M.G.

Captain, General and

Governor-in.Chief

J A M A I C A — c onti n it e d

Port Royal became the headquarters of the buccaneers.
At the abolition of slavery in 1807, there were 323,827
slaves in the colony.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1655.
AREA. — 4,207 square miles.
CLIMATE. — Mean temperature
78 -i z F. The island has suffered
terrible disasters from hurricanes
and earthquakes.

CAPITAL.— Kingston.
GOVERNMENT. — The Governor is
assisted by a Privy Council. The
legislative council consists of the
Governor, the senior military
officer, the colonial secretary, the
attorney-general, the director of
public works, the collector-general
and others.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — British law, as modified by local
ordinances, is administered by the High Court of Justice
and the Petty Sessions of Magistrates throughout the
island. Elective parochial boards in Kingston, and four-
teen other parishes have jurisdiction over roads, markets,
sanitation, etc.

RACES. — Chiefly Negroes.

DEVELOPMENT. — There are 184 miles of railway ; a large
loan was granted by the home exchequer for rebuilding
property after the disastrous earthquake of 1907.

RELIGION. — There is no established church. The
religious denominations represented are : Church of
England, Wesleyan, Methodist, Baptist, Presbyterian,
Roman Catholic, etc.
LANGUAGE. — English.

EDUCATION. — There are public elementary schools re-
ceiving a government grant, government training colleges,
high, secondary and industrial schools.

PRODUCTS. — Sugar, rum, coffee, fruit, maize, Indian
corn.

238

THE BRITISH UMPIRE — IN AMERICA

THE BAHAMAS

HISTORY. — A chain of islands 600 miles in length, between
Cuba and Florida. San Salvador was the first land dis-
covered by Columbus on his
voyage in 1492. The Spaniards
took possession of the Bahamas
and transported the aboriginal
Caribs to Cuba to work the mines.
In the seventeenth century a few
settlers from the Bermudas, came
to Eleuthera and New Providence.
Charles II. granted the islands to
a company, but no regular system
of government was set up, and in
1703 the French and Spaniards
annihilated the settlement. For
some years the islands became the
haunt of pirates, and were surren-
dered to Spain in 1781, but, at the

conclusion of the war, were again annexed by Great Britain
and their possession confirmed by the Peace of Versailles.
DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1783.
AREA. — 4,466 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Salubrious; temperature ranges from 57° to
113° F.

POPULATION. — 61,277.
CAPITAL. — Nassau.

GOVERNMENT. — Is vested in a Governor, aided by an
executive council, a legislative council, and a representative
assembly.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — British law, as modified by local
ordinances is administered by a Chief Justice and two
stipendiary magistrates.

RACES. — The majority of the population is of Negro race.

DEVELOPMENT. — There are no railways (except at Abaco

in connection with the lumber industry). New Providence

has plenty of good roads. The islands are in telegraphic

communication with Florida.

RELIGION. — Protestant and Roman Catholic.

239

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AMERICA

THE BAHAMAS — continued
LANGUAGE. — English is universally spoken.
EDUCATION. — There are 46 government schools, also
Church of England, Roman Catholic and private schools.

PRODUCTS. — Fruit, vegetables, sponges ; mahogany and
other hard woods.

THE LEEWARD ISLANDS

HISTORY. — The Leeward Islands form the most northerly
group of the Lesser Antilles ; those under the British flag
comprise Antigua, Montserrat, St. Kitts, Nevis, Dominica
and the Virgin Islands. They were discovered by
Columbus on his second voyage in 1493, and have all
been colonised from St. Kitts as a centre. An Englishman
named Warner commenced tobacco growing in St. Kitts
in 1623. Several fierce encounters have taken place
between the French and British for the possession of
this island. It was captured by the French in 1782, but
restored by the Treaty of Versailles, 1783.

AREA. — Antigua, 108 square miles; St. Christopher (St.
Kitts), 68 square miles; Dominica, 291 square miles;
Montserrat, 33^ square miles; the Virgin Islands, 58 square
miles.

CLIMATE.— Dry and fairly healthy ; mean temperature
80° F.

POPULATION. — 129,240.

CAPITAL. — St. John.

CHIEF TOWNS. — Antigua — St. Johns ; St. Kitts —
Bosseterre ; Dominica — Roseau ; Montserrat — Plymouth ;
the Virgin Islands — Road Town.

GOVERNMENT. — The Leeward Islands Confederation
has representative government with a Governor, executive
and federal legislative councils, each presidency retaining
its own local constitution.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. —British law modified by local
ordinances. Some acts passed by the Colonial Legislature
in the time of William and Mary affecting land tenure
anticipated by nearly a century and a half reforms only
effected by the home government in 1833.

RACES. — British and Negro.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN" AMERICA

THE LEEWARD ISLAN DS— continued

DEVELOPMENT. — There are no railways or internal tele-
graphs. Two telegraph cables connect Dominica and St.
Lucia (via Martinique), and two
cables connect St. Kitts with
Antigua and St. Thomas.

RELIGION. — Anglican, Moravian,
Wesleyan, and Roman Catholic.

LANGUAGE. — English.

EDUCATION. — There are 144
aided and government primary
schools, also grammar and
secondary schools.

PRODUCTS. — Sugar and mo-
lasses, lime juice, arrowroot, rum,
fruit, cocoa and cotton.

THE WINDWARD ISLANDS

HISTORY. — The southern group of the West Indian
islands, known as the Windward Islands, includes
Barbados, St. Lucia, St. Vincent, Grenada, The Grena-
dines, and Tobago. Of these, Barbados has a separate
government, and Tobago is now attached for administrative
purposes to Trinidad. The remaining three islands with
their small dependencies are under one government which
has its seat in Grenada.

GRENADA is a mountainous and picturesque island,
situated about 96 miles to the north of Trinidad, and 100
miles south-west of Barbados. Discovered by Columbus on
August 15, 1498, and named by him Conception, it was left
in the undisturbed possession of its aboriginal inhabitants
for more than a hundred years, but in 1609 a party of some
208 colonists, sent out by a company of London
merchants, landed on the coast.

Their efforts to subdue the wild Caribs were, however,
unsuccessful, and the remnant of the band returned to
England in the same year. Since then Grenada has had

241

THK HRITISH KMPIRK — IN AMERICA

THE WINDWARD ISLANDS— continued

an eventful history, being one of the pawns in the game
which, at the commencement of the seventeenth century,
English and French kings, ministers
and merchant adventurers began to
play, with the New World as their
chessboard, and colonial empire as
the stake.

Thus Grenada figured among the
theoretical possessions of a French
" Company of the Islands of
America," founded by Cardinal
Richelieu, and was also included
in a general grant of the " Carib-
bees," made to the Earl of Carlisle
by King Charles I. in 1626. A
shareholder in the French company
named Du Parquet, bought the
hypothetical claims of his company,
and, landing onGrenadawith 200 followers, succeeded in per-
suading the natives to cede the island to him for a few trinkets.
The French occupation which was maintained by a war
against the aboriginal Caribs, lasted until 1761, when the
islands were captured by Admiral Rodney. Grenada and
the Grenadines were formally ceded to Great Britain by
the Treaty of Peace signed at Paris two years later. Since
then, with the exception of four-and-a-half years during the
war of American Independence, when it was taken by the
French, the island has remained a British possession.

ST. LUCIA, round which many a fierce fight has raged in
the stormy years of West Indian history, is go miles W.N.W.
of Barbados, and 21 miles S.E. of Martinique. It is
covered, to a great extent, with forest and tropical vegeta-
tion. Its mountains rise at their highest point to 3,145
feet above the sea level. Port Castries, its capital, is a fine
town and a famous coaling depot.

ST. VINCENT lies about 95 miles west of Barbados. It
was secured to Great Britain in 1783, and is more thoroughly
English than the other two islands of the group.

242

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AMERICA

THE WINDWARD ISLAND s— c onti n u e d

TOTAL AREA. — 524 square miles.

CLIMATE. --Very fire in the dry season, which lasts from
December to June.

POPULATION. — 78,000.

CHIEF TOWN. — In Grenada — St. George ; St. Lucia —
Castries ; St. Vincent — Kingstown.

GOVERNMENT. — The islands are under one Governor and
Commander-in-Chief, but each has its own administrator
and separate institutions. Administrator of St. Lucia,
E. J. Cameron, Esq., C.M.G. ; Administrator of St. Vincent,
Hon. C. G. Murray.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Each administration has its own
legislature, but there is a Common Court of Appeal, con-
sisting of the Chief Justices of the Islands and of Barbados.
The civil law is based upon the old French code.

RACES. — The majority of the inhabitants are of Negro
race ; a few Caribs still remain in St. Vincent, and there are
about 5,000 Indian coolies.

DEVELOPMENT. — There is a small coast railway, 56 miles
in length, on St. Vincent, and good roads in Grenada, also
telephone and telegraph lines.

RELIGION. — The Roman Catholic faith predominates

LANGUAGE. — English is usually spoken except in Grenada
and St. Lucia, where the prevailing language among the
peasantry is a French patois.

EDUCATION. —There are 119 elementary schools on the
islands, beside government agricultural schools.

PRODUCTS. — (Grenada). — The soil of Grenada is extremely
fertile, and cocoa, spices, rubber, cotton, coffee and
numerous fruits are grown. The forests are rich in valuable
timbers such as bullet wood, mahogany, white cedar and
galba. Vanilla and several kinds of gum-bearing trees are
indigenous, and along the coasts turtles are caught and
exported. (St. Lucia). — Arrowroot, sugar, cocoa, cotton,
live stock. (St. Vincent). — The chief products are sugar,
molasses, rum, arrowroot, cassava, cocoa, coffee, cotton
and spices.

243

THK BRITISH KMPIKK — IN AMKRICA

BARBADOS

HISTORY. — Barbados is said to have received its name
from the Portuguese, who found it almost uninhabited,
but abounding in bearded fig-trees.
The island was nominally taken
possession of in 1605 by the British
ship " Oliph Blossome," and in
1625 Sir William Courteen, a
London merchant, sent out a party
of colonists. The island was
granted by James I. to the Earl of
Marlborough, and afterwards by
Charles I. to the Earl of Carlisle
in a general grant of all the
Caribbee islands.

On the downfall of Charles many
royalist families found refuge in
Barbados, and Lord Willoughby
became Governor, but was banished during the Common-
wealth. After the Restoration, the proprietary government
was dissolved and the sovereignty of Barbados annexed to
the British Crown.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1625.
AREA. — 166 square miles.

CLIMATE. — The healthiest of the West Indian Islands;
temperature varies from 75° to Sy F.
POPULATION. — Estimated at 196,287.
CAPITAL. — Bridgetown.

GOVERNMENT. — Consists of a Governor aided by an execu-
tive council and executive committee, a legislative council
and a house of assembly.
RACES. — British and Negro.

DEVELOPMENT. — There are 470 miles of roads and 28
miles of railway. A telephone system is in vogue.

RELIGION. — Church of England, Wesleyan, Moravian
and Roman Catholic.
LANGUAGE. — English.

EDUCATION. — Liberal provision is made for elementary
education and at Harrison's College for higher education.
PRODUCTS. — Sugar, molasses, rum and cotton.

THE BRITISH KMFIRK — IN AMERICA

TRINIDAD AND TOBAGO

HISTORY. — Trinidad is a beautiful island situated about
N. of the equator in the southern part of the Caribbean
Sea, and separated from the coast
of Venezuela by the Gulf of Paris.
It was discovered by Columbus in
1498, at which time it was peopled
by several tribes of Indians, the
chief being the Arouacks and the
Chaimas.

Columbus gave the island the
name of Trinidad, from the three
sister peaks of Moringa, which
rise from it. Prior to this it had
borne the Indian name of lere,
or the land of humming birds.

Both the Spanish and French
colonised Trinidad, but in 1797 the
British, being then at variance with Spain, sent an
expedition under Sir Ralph Abercromby and Rear Admiral
Harvey to capture the island. For over a hundred years it
has been a British colony.

The chief towns are Port of Spain, one of the finest in the
West Indies, San Fernando and Princestown.

The soil is remarkably fertile, and owing to the wealth of
its natural resources, and the variety of its crops, Trinidad
has suffered less than other cane-growing West Indian
islands during the last thirty years from the competition of
beet sugar.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1797.

AREA. — Trinidad, 1,750 square miles. Tobago, 114 square
miles.

CLIMATE. — Healthy; mean temperature 78° F.
POPULATION. — (including Tobago), 351,422.
CHIEF TOWN. — Port of Spain.

GOVERNMENT. — Is vested in a Governor, an executive
council, and a legislative council.

RACES. — The white population is composed of English,
Germans, French and Spanish ; there is also a large

proportion of East Indians.

245

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AMERICA

TRINIDAD AND TOBAG o — c on tinned

DEVELOPMENT. — There are about 80 miles of railways in
the island all constructed and worked by the government.

RELIGION. — Protestant and Roman Catholic.

LANGUAGE. — English, a French patois peculiar to the
West Indies is spoken and also Spanish.

EDUCATION. — There are numerous elementary and private
schools and several colleges.

PRODUCTS. — Its staple product in addition to sugar, rum,
and molasses, is cocoa, but cocoanuts, coffee, bananas,
oranges, rubber and tobacco are also exported, and the
forests of the island abound in trees yielding valuable hard-
wood timber such as the poui, roble, purple-heart, balata,
leopard wood and cyp, some of which have a very fine
grain, and are capable of a brilliant polish. There is a
remarkable lake of pitch near the village of Le Brea, no
acres in extent, and containing an apparently inexhaustible
supply. Coal has been found in Manzanilla, and increasing
attention is being paid to the rich petroleum deposits of
Guapo and Guayaguayare in the south and south-east of
the island.

BRITISH GUIANA

HISTORY. — Since the days when Sir Walter Raleigh
brought back to the court of Elizabeth the news of the
' ' Wild Coasts " of South America, the region bordering
the Atlantic ocean, and immediately to the north of the
Lower Amazon Basin has been called "Guyana" or
" Guiana."

Of the three colonies, British, Dutch and French
Guiana, which constitute the only European possessions on
the vast continent of South America, the British is the
most westerly, and lies between Venezuela and Dutch
Guiana, with its southern borders touching Brazil.

The frontier extends inland from the Atlantic seaboard
some 540 miles on the west of the colony, and 300 miles
on the eastern side.

Guiana was the Indian name for the country between the
Orinoco and the Amazon, probably derived from the root
word wina, meaning water.

246

THE BRITISH KMPIRF. — IN AMERICA

Sir F Mitchell Hod^s
K.C.AI.G., Governc

BRITISH GUIANA — continued

The coast was sighted by Columbus in 1498, and two
years later by Pinson, but no Spanish voyager seems to have
landed on what is now British
Guiana. In early maps the country
was marked as Cannibalor Terra.
Raleigh's book, "The Discoverie
of Guiana," aroused great interest,
and led to trading voyages to the
coast by English, Dutch and
French. The Dutch attempted to

A ? settle on the Pomeroon as early

^H as in 1580. In 1650 the Governor

£ ^^k of Barbados founded a British

^ ^frjf^ colony on the Surinam river, and

it is a curious historical fact that
in 1667, after the war between
England and the Netherlands, this little colony of Surinam
was exchanged for what is now New York.

A few white settlers and slaves were living in Guiana at
the commencement of the next century, but it was not until
1740, when, at the instigation of Governor Gravesande, the
river Essequibo was opened to all nations, and free land
and freedom from taxes for ten years offered, that any
considerable increase in the number of white residents
took place.

In 1781, the country was again captured by the British,
who, during a brief occupation, chose a site for a new town
near the mouth of the Demerara. This settlement, after
being held by the French and Dutch successively, the latter
giving it the name of Stabroeck, reverted to the British, and
took the name of Georgetown in 1812.

Thereafter the colony has grown and prospered in spite of
a slight set back due to economic disturbance on the
liberation of the slaves in 1834.

Population and agriculture is chiefly centred on the coast
lands which lie between the Pomeroon and the Courantyne.
DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1812.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AMERICA

BRITISH GUIANA — continued

AREA. — 90,277 square miles.

CLIMATE. — The seasons are divided into dry and wet, the
two dry seasons lasting from the middle of February to the
end of April and from the middle of August to the end of
November. The climate though hot, its temperature
ranging from 75° to 95° F., is not unhealthy.

POPULATION. — 305,090.

CAPITAL. — Georgetown.

GOVERNMENT. — Consists of a Governor, a Court of Policy
and an Executive Council.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The Civil law is modified Roman-
Dutch, criminal law is based upon that of Great Britain.

RACES. — About 10,000 aboriginal Indians are resident in
the colony, belonging chiefly to the Arawatk, Acawoi, Carib
and Warau tribes. The population has been recruited by
immigrants of various nationalities. Besides British and
European settlers there are Africans from Sierra Leone,
Madeirans and a few Maltese. Since the immigration of
East Indian coolies has been put upon a sound footing, the
number of persons in the colony has grown from 100,000 to
over 300,000.

DEVELOPMENT. — There is a good net-work of roads and
about 100 miles of railway ; the rivers and canals also furnish
means of transit. Telegraph and telephone systems are
established. The area under cultivation amounts to
140,930 acres, of which 69,827 acres are in sugar-cane.

RELIGION. — The Church of England, the Church of
Scotland, the Roman Catholic and Wesleyan denomina-
tions are represented in the colony.

EDUCATION. — A state-aided system of elementary education
is established. There are 223 schools and a government
college which is situated in Georgetown.

PRODUCTS. — Sugar, rum, coffee, gold, diamonds and
timber.

BRITISH HONDURAS

HISTORY. — A well-wooded region on the east coast of
Central America south of Yucatan, which attracted adven-
turers from Jamaica as early as 1638. In 1739, the native

248

THE BRITISH F.MPIRK— IN AMERICA

BRITISH HONDURAS— continued

king made a treaty ceding the country to Great Britain, and
forts were built on the island of Ruatan and at Black River.
By the Treaty of Paris, 1673, it was
agreed to abandon these settle-
ments, and the garrisons were
withdrawn. The settlers chiefly
engaged in the wood - cuiting
industry remained, in spite of
attempts by the Spaniards to expel
them by force. The last attempt
to establish the sovereignty of
Spain was defeated by the inhabi-
tants at the " Battle of St. George's
Cay " in 1798. The settlement was
declared a British Colony in 1862.
DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1839.
AREA. — 8,598 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Sub-tropical; maximum shade temperature
98°, minimum, 50° F.

POPULATION. — Estimated at 42,406.

CAPITAL. — Belize.

GOVERNMENT. — Is vested in a Governor, assisted by
executive and legislative councils.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — For many years the settlers
elected magistrates who discharged all executive and
judicial functions, and resolutions passed at public
meetings formed the laws of the community. These
were codified and were known as " Burnaby's Laws" and
still form, together with English common law, the basis
of judicial decisions in the colony.

RACES.— Besides white residents, there are aboriginal
Indians, Caribs, Negroes, East Indians and Chinese.

DEVELOPMENT. — A railway is in process of construction.
Belize and the most southerly town of the colony, Punta
Gorda, are connected by telegraph and telephone wires.

249

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AMERICA

BRITISH H o N D u R A s— c o n t i n u e d

RELIGION. — There is an Anglican and also a Roman
Catholic Bishop of Honduras ; the Church of Scotland ;
the Wesleyan Methodist and Baptist denominations are
represented.

LANGUAGE. — English, Carib.

EDUCATION. — The primary and secondary schools (chiefly
denominational) receive grants from the Colonial govern-
ment.

PRODUCTS. — Mahogany and logwood, sugar, rubber and
fruit.

BERMUDA

HISTORY. — The Bermudas or Somers' Islands form a group
of about 300 islands 580 miles to the east of Cape Hatteras
in North Carolina. They were discovered by a Spanish
mariner, Juan Bermudez, in 1515, and named after him.
The Spaniards did not, however, form a settlement, and
in 1609 Admiral Sir George Somers' ship "The Sea
Venture," bearing colonists to Virginia, was wrecked on
this coast. This event stimulated British interest in the
islands which were granted by James I. to the Virginia
Company, who afterwards transferred them to the
"Governor and Company of the City of London for
the plantation of the Somers' Islands."

Owing to their geographical position the Bermudas
have become an important naval station, and they possess
a remarkably fine floating dock which was towed out
from England in 1869.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1609.

AREA. — 19 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Celebrated for its mildness and salubrity ; there
is practically no winter, the temperature never falling below
40° F., while in summer it does not rise beyond 85° F.

POPULATION. — 17,535.

CAPITAL. — Hamilton.

GOVERNMENT. — Is vested in a Governor aided by executive
and legislative councils.

250

TUP: BRITISH KMPIRK — IN AMERICA

B E R M U D A— c onti n 11 e d

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — British law as modified by colonial
ordinances prevails.

GOVERNOR. — Lieut. -General Walter Kitchener, C.B.

RACES. — A little over one-third of the population are of
English descent ; the remainder belong to the negro race.

DEVELOPMENT. — Ireland Island in the centre of the group
is given up to H.M. Dockyard and other naval establish-
ments. A telegraphic cable connects the islands with
Halifax, Nova Scotia. There are good roads but no
railways within the colony.

LANGUAGE. — English.

EDUCATION. — All the schools are private schools charging
fees. Attendance is compulsory : 27 schools receive State
aid and 25 are without it.

PRODUCTS. — Large crops of early potatoes, onions, and
lily bulbs, tomatoes and beetroot are raised. Arrowroot is
grown and manufactured.

251

252

THE BRITISH EMPIRE

AUSTRALIA

His E X C E I. L K N C V T H K R T . H O N . T H K EARL OF D I' I) I. E Y

P.C., G.C.M.G., G.C.V.O.
Governor -General of the Australian Commonwealth

AUSTRALIA

Australia was the last of the great discoveries which
opened up a New World to the astonished gaze of the Old.

Rumours of a mysterious "Terra Australis," or great
southern land, had begun to reach Europe in the sixteenth
century, and a vague shape, sometimes styled "Java le
Grande," appears in maps of the world as early as 1555.

In 1605, Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, a Spanish seaman
'who had sailed as pilot with Alvaro de Mandana, on his its
voyage to Santa Cruz, reached the New Hebrides, and discovery
his lieutenant, Louis Vaez de Torres, sailed through the
straits which still bear his name, landing at New Guinea,
and doubtless sighting the northern shores of Queensland.

A few years later, Dirck Hartog, and then Abel Janszoon
Tasman, sailed along the west coast to New Zealand and
Tasmania.

In 1688, Dampier explored 1000 miles of the north-west
coast and re-visited it in 1699 in " H.M.S. Roebuck."

Yet so little had been definitely ascertained about the great
island continent of the southern seas as late as the end of the
seventeenth century, that Dampier, who at that period
certainly knew more about it than anyone else, wrote " New
Holland is a very large tract of land. It is not yet deter-
mined whether it is an island or a main continent ; but I am
certain that it joyns neither to Asia, Africa nor America."

The first great impetus towards British occupation of
the country was given 70 years later, when James Cook,
having set out in 1768, as Lieutenant-in-Command of
H.M.S. "Endeavour" with a party of men of science to
observe the transit of Venus from Tahiti, determined
to return by the Pacific route.

He sailed through the narrow strait separating the New
Zealand Islands, explored their coast line, and reached the
eastern shore of Australia.

The spot where he landed was covered with the abundant
verdure of the Australian autumn season, and the voyagers
called it " Botany Bay."

Captain Cook made two subsequent voyages to the
southern seas, and before his death in 1779, had cleared up
most of the problems of Australasian exploration.

255

256

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AUSTRALIA

The voyages of the " Investigator " and the "Beagle," and
the discovery of the channel between Tasmania and the
mainland, by Surgeon Bass in 1798, served to complete, in
main outline, the coast map of Australia.

The practical task of colonisation was commenced in
1788, when Captain Phillip landed with a party numbering colonisation
about 1,100 persons. He disembarked at Botany Bay, but
almost immediately transferred his followers to Port
Jackson, near the site of the modern city of Sydney. The
prosperity of the infant colony was greatly enhanced by
the introduction, by Captain MacArthur and Captain
Waterhouse, of breeds of Spanish and other sheep. Sheep-
breeding has been one of the staple industries of Australia
ever since.

Having surmounted some early difficulties, including a
mutiny against Governor Bligh, the colony rapidly advanced
in wealth and in numbers.

The nineteenth century witnessed enormous progress in
many directions.

Vast fertile plains to the west of the Blue Mountains were
discovered, and in addition to the original settlement of New states
South Wales, great and nourishing States grew into being.
Western Australia was formed in 1829, Victoria in 1837, and
in the same year the city of Adelaide, destined to be the
capital of the great central State of South Australia. In
1842, Brisbane was established and the number of white
inhabitants of the Australian colonies had risen to a total of
145,000.

The practice of sending convicts to Australia was dis-
continued in 1841, and the discovery of gold, ten years later,
gave an immense stimulus to immigration.

The various sections into which Australian territory had
been divided became self-governing States, with representa-
tive institutions and separate responsible administrations.

The need for a co-ordinating and central organisation for
common purposes having made itself felt, these States com-
bined with Tasmania to form the Commonwealth of
Australia, while retaining their several provincial govern-
ments for local purposes.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AUSTRALIA

The Commonwealth thus formed was sanctioned by the
British Government on July 9, 1900, and was proclaimed in
Sydney on January i, 1901.

With the exception of a slight set-back, due to a wave of
financial depression in 1893, the progress of Australia has
been rapid and continuous, and as yet only the fringe of its
vast territory and the first fruits of its boundless natural
resources have been exploited.

The great plains of the centre, and the illimitable desert
reaches of the north-west may yet be subjugated by the art
of man, and fertilised by the new aids which mechanical
science will place at his disposal.

Millions of acres have already been brought under
cultivation or utilised for pasturage, and the results
obtained, together with those of mining and manufacturing
industries, during little more than one century of effort,
serve but as the index of the magnificent possibilities of the
future.

A great and vigorous nation of British ancestry, and
strongly imbued with British traditions, is growing up under
the Southern Cross and is rapidly pressing forward in
civilisation and in material wealth beneath the banner
inscribed " Advance Australia."

NEW SOUTH WALES

HISTORY. — The oldest colony of Australia received its
name from Captain Cook, who visited the coast in 1770.
The settlement of New South Wales, which was started by
Captain Phillip in 1788, was at first held to include the whole
eastern portion of the continent. The States of Victoria
and Queensland were afterwards delimited. During its
early years the colony suffered somewhat from scarcity of
food, but the introduction of free colonists, to whom grants
of land were given, soon stimulated agriculture and
sheep - breeding to a point which rendered the colony
self-supporting. The black aborigines belong to a very
primitive nomadic type, and have not offered any serious
resistance to British colonisation. Gold was discovered at
Bathurst in 1851, and the deposits extend over a wide

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AUSTRALIA

NEW SOUTH WALES— continued

area. Up to 1903 the value of the gold output
alone was £53,000,000.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1788.
AREA. — 310,367 square miles.
CLIMATE. — Temperature varies
from the coldest to be met with in
the British Isles, to the genial
warmth of the Mediterranean ;
the rainfall decreases as the
distance from the coast increases.
POPULATION. — 1,664,644.
CAPITAL . — Sydney.
GOVERNMENT. — Is vested in a
Governor appointed by the Crown,
a legislative council and a legisla-
tive assembly.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Owing to
the preponderance of the British element in the population,
laws and customs follow very largely those of the Mother
Country.

There are two forms of local government organisation,
namely, shires and municipalities. The shires are again
subdivided into ridings. The franchise extends to all males
over the age of 21 years.

LIEUT. -GOVERNOR.— H. E. Lord Chelmsford, K.C.M.G.
RACES. — The Australians, born of British descent, are in
the majority ; there are also many immigrants from the
United Kingdom ; Chinese ; Germans and other foreigners ;
about 7000 aboriginals and half-castes.

DEVELOPMENT. — There are government railways, tram-
ways, telegraph and telephone systems.

RELIGION. — All religions are free. Church of England,
Roman Catholic, Presbyterian and Methodist are the chief
denominations.

LANGUAGE. — English.

EDUCATION. — Is compulsory and free. In addition to the
State schools, there are private colleges and schools, and the
University of Sydney.

PRODUCTS. — Sheep, cattle and horses. Cereals, hay,
fruits, wine, silver, gold, coal, tin, copper and iron.

259

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AUSTRALIA

The Hon, Johr
Premier, Chief Se

VICTORIA

HISTORY. — Victoria is the smallest of the Australian States,
with the exception of Tasmania, in geographical area but
not in wealth. It was administered
from Sydney until 1851, when it
was constituted a separate colony.
Responsible government was
introduced in 1857.

Very large deposits of gold have
been discovered at Clunes, Bal-
larat, Forest Creek and Bendigo,
the quantity mined up to 1904
being valued at ^269,970,746.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1788.

AREA.— 87,884 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Warm, dry and
healthy.

POPULATION. — 1,297,557.

CAPITAL. — Melbourne.

Alinister for Labour /^ T , -,

GOVERNMENT. — Is vested in a

Governor aided by an Executive Council and a Parliament
consisting of a legislative council and a legislative assembly.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Universal adult suffrage exists :
women being eligible as voters. Members of the Legislative
Assembly are paid an official salary of ^300 a year. The
immigration of coloured persons into the Colony is restricted.

GOVERNOR. — Sir Thomas D. Gibson Carmichael, Bart.,
K.C.M.G.

RACES. — Almost all the Victorians are of British descent ;
there are a few aboriginal "black fellows" in the country
districts.

DEVELOPMENT. — Well advanced, government railways
(3,401 miles), telegraph and telephone systems are in full
operation.

RELIGION. — Church of England, Roman Catholic, Pres-
byterian, Methodist, Baptist.

LANGUAGE. — English.

EDUCATION. — Educational establishments in Victoria are
of four classes, namely: The Melbourne University, with its
three affiliated colleges ; State schools for primary education,
private schools for both primary and secondary education,
and technical schools for instruction in various arts.

PRODUCTS. — Wool, wheat, grapes, fruit, gold, tin, copper,
coal, sheep, horses and cattle.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AUSTRALIA

Hon. J. Verrar
?tnier and Comrni
of Works and Mi

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

HISTORY.— When first constituted a British province by
Act of Parliament of William IV., South Australia was
bounded on the north by the
26th degree of south latitude,
and on the west by the i32nd
degree east longitude. The south
coast of the State was surveyed
by Flinders in 1802, and Stuart
discovered the Murray river and
its upper tributaries in 1829.
The first settlements were formed
at Kangaroo Island, and at Ade-
laide, in 1836. Copper was dis-
covered in 1842. Responsible
government was established six
years later, and Stuart reached
Port Darwin in 1861. The
Northern Territory was then
added to the State, making its northern boundary the
Indian Ocean, and the western boundary was advanced to
the i2gth degree of east longitude, thus embracing the
territory formerly known as " No-man's Land."
AREA. — 903,690 square miles.
CLIMATE. — Dry and salubrious.
POPULATION. — 412,808.
CAPITAL. — Adelaide.

GOVERNMENT. — Is vested in a Governor aided by an
Executive Council and a Parliament consisting of a Legisla-
tive Council and a House of Assembly.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The franchise for both houses is
open to all adults, male and female, who are natural born
or naturalised subjects of His Majesty, and have lived for
six months continuously in South Australia.

GOVERNOR. — H. E. Admiral Sir Way Hort Bosanquet,
G.C.V.O., K.C.B.

RACES. — Chiefly Australian, there are some 2,500 Chinese
residents in the Northern Territory beside the aborigines.

261

THK BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AUSTRALIA

SOUTH AUSTR ALl A— c ontinued

The immigration of Chinese is controlled by the Common-
wealth Government.

DEVELOPMENT. — The great transcontinental telegraph of
Australia, from Port Augusta to Palmerston (nearly 2000
miles long), has more than anything else brought South
Australia into world-wide notice as a colony of astonishing
enterprise.

RELIGION. — The leading denominations are, Church of
England, Roman Catholic, Methodist, Lutheran, Baptist,
Presbyterian and Congregational.

EDUCATION. — Is compulsory. There are 690 primary
schools. The University of Adelaide is authorised to grant
degrees.

PRODUCTS. — Wheat, fruit, wines, sheep, cattle, horses,
copper, silver and gold.

QUEENSLAND

HISTORY. — In 1770, Captain Cook landed at Moreton Bay,
but the river Brisbane, from which the Capital city derives
its name, was not discovered until 1823. A settlement was
formed from New South Wales at Moreton Bay in
1824, and squatters began to settle on the Darling Downs,
after their exploration in 1828, but the territory was not
thrown open to colonisation until 1842. Its administration
was separated from that of New South Wales on December
10, 1859, and the new colony named Queensland. It
had responsible government from the first.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1788.

AREA. — 670,500 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Hot, suitable to Europeans.

POPULATION. — Estimated at 578,548.

CAPITAL. — Brisbane.

GOVERNMENT. — The Parliament consists of a legislative
assembly and a legislative council. The Governor is
assisted by eight responsible Ministers.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — No property qualification is
required for membership in either branch of legislature, the

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AUSTRALIA

QUEENSLAND— cont inued

voting for members of the assembly is by ballot, and the
Elections Act Amendment Act of 1905, provides for male
and female adult franchise on
residential qualification only.

GOVERNOR. — Sir. Wm. Mac-
Gregor, G.C.M.G., C.B., M.D.

RACES. — Mostly Australasian
born of European parentage.
There are also Chinese, Poly-
nesians, and other Asiatics, besides
the aborigines.

DEVELOPMENT. — Both the coast
and the interior are well supplied
with railways, 3,498 miles being at
present in operation. There is also
a steam tramway line from Towns-
ville to Ayr, a distance of 50 miles.
Telegraph and telephone communi-
cations are widely extended.

RELIGION. — Church of England, Roman Catholic,
Presbyterian, Wesleyan, Lutheran and Baptist are the
principal denominations.

EDUCATION. — Elementary education is free and compul-
sory. There are numerous State, private and grammar
schools. Technical education is liberally endowed, and a
university is in course of formation.

PRODUCTS. — Wool, gold, maize, wheat, fruit, meat,
butter and sugar.

TASMANIA

HISTORY. — In 1642, a Dutch seaman, Abel Jansz Tasman,
sailing southward from Mauritius in search of ' ' Terra
Australis " landed upon this island. Tasman called it after
the Governor of the Indies, Van Diemen's Land, but his
own name, as the discoverer, has now become inseparably
associated with it. It was formally taken possession of

263

THE BRITISH KMPIRK — IN AUSTRALIA

T A S A\ A N I A — c onti n u e A

by England in 1803, and made auxiliary to the penal settle-
ment at Botany Bay. The first free immigrants arrived in
1816, and responsible government
was introduced in 1856.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1803.

AKEA. — 26,215 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Healthy and tem-
perate, well suited to Europeans.

POPULATION. — 185,824 .

CAPITAL. — Hobart.

GOVERNMENT. — The Parliament
consists of a Legislative Council
and a House of Assembly. The
Governor is advised by a Cabinet of
responsible Ministers.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Universal
adult suffrage, including women,
obtains. For purposes of local government, the country
is divided into 49 municipalities, exclusive of Hobart and
Launceston. The Presidents of the municipal councils are
called wardens, and are elected annually.

GOVERNOR. — H. E. Major-General Sir Harry Barren,
K.C.M.G., C.V.O.

RACES. — Immigrants from Australia and Europe; native-
born Australians of British descent. The black aboriginals
are now extinct.

DEVELOPMENT. — There are abundant railway, telegraph
and telephone communications.

RELIGION. — Church of England, Roman Catholic, Wes-
leyan Methodist, Presbyterian, Independent and other
denominations.

EDUCATION. — Is compulsory. There are 356 State
schools.

PRODUCTS. — Wool, gold, silver, copper, tin, lead, coal,
timber, fruit and sheep.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AUSTRALIA

WESTERN AUSTRALIA

HISTORY. — A settlement was formed at King George Sound
in 1826, at the instance of the New South Wales govern-
ment, and the coast from that point
to the Swan River surveyed
by Captain James (afterwards
Sir James) Stirling, in "H.M.S.
Success." In May, 1829, Capt.
Freemantle (afterwards Sir Charles
Freemantle, G.C.B.), in "H.M.S.
Challenge," took possession of the
territory, and in June, 1829, Captain
Stirling founded the Swan River
Settlement, now the Common-
wealth State of Western Australia.
In 1850 the inhabitants petitioned
Hon. F. wnson that it might be made a penal

Premier and Colonial . ,

Treasurer settlement. Convicts were accord-

ingly sent out from that time until

1868, and their work in making roads did much to
open up the country.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1829.
AREA. — 975,920 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Variable in parts. Generally dry and pleasant
to Europeans. Mean temperature at Perth 64° F.

POPULATION. — 282,856.
CAPITAL. — Perth.

GOVERNMENT. — Consists of a Governor, a legislative
council and a legislative assembly.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Subject to certain qualifications,
any person not under 21 years of age, who is a natural born
or naturalised subject of His Majesty, and has resided in
Western Australia for six months continuously, and in the
district for which he claims to be enrolled for one month
previous to the election, is entitled to vote.

GOVERNOR. — H. E. Sir Gerald Strickland, K.C.M.G.

265

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN AUSTRALIA

WESTERN AUSTRALIA— continued

RACES. — Australasians, chiefly of British parentage or
descent, and immigrants from Europe. Some 1,500 Chinese,
and the aboriginal natives.

DEVELOPMENT. — Over two thousand miles of railway have
been laid in the colony under the auspices of the government,
besides several private lines. There is telegraphic com-
munication with Europe via South Australia.

RELIGION. — Church of England and Roman Catholic are
the principal denominations.

EDUCATION. — Is free and compulsory. There are numerous
government and private schools, and a fine technical school
at Perth which exercises some of the functions of a
university.

PRODUCTS. — Gold, wool, timber, pearls, copper, lead, tin
and coal.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE

NEW ZEALAND AND OCEANA

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN NEW ZEALAND AND OCEANA

NEW ZEALAND

HISTORY. — The Dominion of New Zealand consists of
three main islands, the North, South and Stewart Islands,
with several groups of smaller
islands at some distance from
the principal group.

New Zealand was discovered
by Tasman, but Captain Cook
was the first European to land
and explore the coasts. It
subsequently became a resort
for whalers and traders, chiefly
from Australia.

The native Maori chiefs ceded
the sovereignty of the country
to the British crown in 1840 at
the Treaty of Waitangi.

The Maoris are a remarkable
race, of Polynesian origin and of
much higher type than the

Aborigines of Australia. Many of the clans have always
been friendly to the British settlers, but two wars have
been waged, one in 1845-8, and the other lasting inter-
mittently for ten years, 1860-1870. The colony was at first
a dependency of New South Wales, but was separated by
letters patent in 1842.

The settlement of the territory was largely effected by the
New Zealand Company, whose Royal Charter was surren-
dered in 1850.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1840.

AREA. — North Island 44,468, South Island 58,525, and
Stewart Island 665 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Temperate, much like that of England, but
warmer and more equable.

POPULATION. — 936,309, including 47,731 natives.
CAPITAL. — Wellington, in the North Island.
GOVERNMENT. — Consists of a Governor aided by a
Ministry, a Legislative Council and a House of Represen-
tatives.

269

THK BRITISH EMPIRE — IX NEW ZEALAND AND OCEANA

NEW ZEALAND— continued

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — Adult suffrage, including women
as voters.

GOVERNOR AND COMMANDER-IN-CHIEF. — H.E. the Lord
Islington.

RACES. — British, Maori, Chinese.

DEVELOPMENT. — In March, 1910, there were 2,717 miles
of government railway lines in working order, and more
under construction. New Zealand is remarkable for the
great public works which have been undertaken, and carried
through by the government and by municipal bodies ; these
include besides railways, roads, bridges, telegraphs and
tramways.

RELIGION. — The principal denominations are Church of
England, Presbyterian and Wesleyan.

LANGUAGES. — English and Maori.

EDUCATION. — The State system of education is free,
secular and compulsory. There are public primary schools,
private schools, grammar schools, colleges and schools for
Maoris. The University of New Zealand has power to
confer degrees.

PRODUCTS. — Wool, cattle, sheep, butter, cheese, grain,
Kauri pine, Kauri gum, gold, coal, iron and copper.

FIJI

HISTORY. — A ring of islands, over 200 in number, open on
the southern side, and situated in the South Pacific Ocean,
1,100 miles from Auckland, New Zealand.

The islands were sighted by Tasman in 1643, and Turtle
Island (or Vatoa) in the extreme south-east of the group, was
discovered by Captain Cook in 1770. Some escaped convicts
from Australia are said to have settled here in 1804.

In 1835, Wesleyan missionaries first came over from
Tonga. The chief, Thakambau, offered the sovereignty of
the islands to England, and in 1874 they were taken
under British protection on the basis of a crown colony.

DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1874.

AREA. — 8,034 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Tropical.

270

THE BRITISH F.MP1RE — IN NEW ZEALAND AND OCEANA

Fl J I — continued

POPULATION. — 120,124.

CAPITAL. — Suva, in the island of Viti Levu.

GOVERNMENT. — Is vested in a
Governor aided by an Executive
Council.

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The
Colony is divided into seventeen
provinces, each under the control
of a European Commissioner or
a Roko Tui (chief native officer).
A large part of the taxes is still
paid in produce, such as copra,
sugar-cane, tobacco, etc.

RACES. — The Fijians are a race
akin to the Papuans, but an
admixture of the higher Poly-
nesians has leavened the native
Melanesian type.
DEVELOPMENT. Telegraph and telephone lines connect
various parts of the colony. There is no railway at present.
RELIGION. — Wesleyan and Roman Catholic missions are
at work.

LANGUAGE. — English, Fiji.

EDUCATION. — There are numerous State-aided schools and
mission schools.

PRODUCTS. — Fruit, cocoanuts, sugar, para-rubber, tea,
cotton, maize, tobacco, and arrowroot.

Sir Francis H. May
K.C.M.G-, C.B., Go veil

PAPUA

HISTORY. — The south-eastern part of the island of New
Guinea, and the neighbouring island groups, previously
known as "British New Guinea," were placed under
the control of the Australian Commonwealth Government
in 1905, and given the name " Papua."

New Guinea was discovered as early as 1511, by Antonio
de Abrea, and the Archipelagos by French navigators,
towards the close of the eighteenth century.

271

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN NEW ZEALAND AND OCEANA

PAPUA— continued
DATE OF ANNEXATION. — 1888.
AREA. — 90,540 square miles.

CLIMATE. — Warm in thesouthern
latitudes, average temperature at
Port Moresby 81-4° F.

POPULATION. — Estimated at
500,000.

CAPITAL. — Port Moresby.

GOVERNMENT. — Is under the
control of the Australian Common-
wealth, and is administered by
a Lieutenant-Governor.

J. H. P. Murray, Esq.

Lieutenant-Governor an

Chief Judicial Officer

LAWS AND CUSTOMS. — The
Papuans had no chiefs. There
was no form of government
among them save a loosely applied
patriarchal authority. Village police are now being
established. The general law of the territory is the same
as that of Queensland.

RACES. — Papuan.

DEVELOPMENT. —Substantial wharves have been built at
Port Moresby and Samarai, roads are being laid, internal
communication is largely by river. Gold mining chiefly
alluvial, has been accompanied by some measure of success.

RELIGION. — Protestant and Roman Catholic missionary
societies are at work in Papua.

LANGUAGE. — Motu, Keapara, Mukawa are some of the
more important of the native dialects.

EDUCATION. — In a backward state at present. The natives
have no history, and but few current well-defined traditions
referring only to the acts of the last four or five generations.

PRODUCTS. — Trepang, copra, pearls, gold, sandal-wood,
coffee and rubber.

2T2

K.C.M.G., C.B.

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN NEW ZEALAND AND OCEANA

THE WESTERN PACIFIC

HISTORY. — By an order in council of 1877, a High
Commissioner was appointed to have jurisdiction over all
islands in the Western Pacific not
within the limits of the Colonies
of Fiji, Queensland and New
South Wales, nor under the
authority of any civilised power.
Under this heading are
included :

THE TONGA OR FRIENDLY
ISLANDS. — These are governed
by a native hereditary monarch,
King George Tubou II., and
legislative assemblies of two
orders. The British protectorate
was proclaimed in 1900.

AREA. — 390 square miles.
POPULATION. — 2,240.
CAPITAL. — Tongatabu.

THE ELLICE AND GILBERT GROUPS. — The natives, who
are of Malayo-Polynesian race, have separate kings or
chiefs, who are assisted by councils of chiefs and
commoners.

Courts of law have been established, and the efforts of
Mr. C. R. Swayne, the first British Resident, and of his
successor, Mr. W. F. Campbell, to establish an efficient
system of administration, have met with considerable
success.

American and British nonconformist missions, and the
Roman Catholic Mission of the Sacred Heart, are at work
in the islands.

AREA. — Including the Union of Tokelau Islands, 297
square miles.

POPULATION . — 22 ,290 .

THE BRITISH SOLOMON ISLANDS. — Consist of the Southern
islands of the group including Shortland Island, Choiseul

273

THE BRITISH EMPIRE — IN NEW ZEALAND AND OCEANA

THE WESTERN PACIFIC— continued

Isabel, New Georgia, Guadalcanar, Malaita, San Christoval,
Bellona and the Rennell Islands, together with Ongtong-
Java and other small islands in the vicinity of the main
group.

AREA. — 8,357 square miles.

POPULATION. — 150,000, including no Europeans.

THE SANTA CRUZ ISLANDS. — Situated between the
Solomon Islands and the New Hebrides group, and included
in 1898 in the British Solomon Islands Protectorate. They
are inhabited by Melanesians, chiefly occupied in the copra
trade.

THE NEW HEBRIDES, to which are attached the
Banks and Torres Islands, are under the control of a joint
government of British and French resident commissioners.

The principal products are copra, maize and coffee.

The population which includes 630 Europeans is estimated
at between 100,000 and 140,000.

THE PHOENIX GROUP include eight islands.
AREA. — 16 square miles.
POPULATION. — 59.

PITCAIRN ISLAND. — Pitcairn Island, nearly equi-distant
from America and Australia, was discovered by Carteret
in 1767. It remained uninhabited until occupied in 1780, by
the Mutineers of H. M.S. "Bounty." Nothing was known
of the existence of these inhabitants until 1808, when the
island was again visited by a British ship.

AREA. — 219 square miles.
POPULATION. — 169.

THE KING'S
TOURS OF THE EMPIRE

MAP OF THE WORLD (ON
Showing the King':

H.M. KING GKOROE V. has travelled extensively through the vast empire over whicl
The principal tours undertaken have been: — (1) The two voyages with the Duke
with a plain red line) and then to the Far East (marked with a dotted li

(2) The visit of His Majesty (then Prince of Wales) to India, in 1906.

(3) The Colonial Tour in the " Ophir," 1901, when, as Prince and Princess of Wale

(marked with a wavy line).

276

SRCATOR'S PROJECTION)
mrs (in red ink)

now rules.

arence, in H.M.S. Bacchante, in 1880 and 1882, first to the West Indies (marked

:ir Majesties visited Ceylon, Australia, New Zealand, South Africa and Canada

277

SONS OF THE EMPIRE

The reception of the Colonial troops in London on their return from
South Africa after the Boer War

278

THE

EVOLUTION OF WEAPONS

^x~

FOR THE

BATTLE OF LIFE

ADAPA

About 6000 H.C.

Adapa is the earliest known personage directly associated with
medicine. He vyas the human incarnation of Marduk. the divine Son of
Ea, and was believed to possess the spells of life and death.
" Ea gave him wisdom,

So that his command was like unto the word of God.
To him also he gave deep knowledge ;
With the healing spell of life and the spell of death he was made."

(Translated from a Babylonian Tablet}

280

HISTORICAL EXHIBITION

RARE AND CURIOUS OBJECTS

RELATING TO

MEDICINE, CHEMISTRY, PHARMACY

AND THE ALLIED SCIENCES
TO BE HELD IN LONDON, 1913

ORGANISED BY, AND UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

HENRY S. WELLCOME

With the object of stimulating the study of the great past,
I have been for some time organising an exhibition in
connection with the history of medicine, chemistry,
pharmacy and the allied sciences, my aim being to bring
together a collection Of historical objects illustrating the
development of the art and science of healing, etc., through-
out the ages.

For many years I have been engaged in researches
respecting the early methods employed in the healing art,
both among civilised and uncivilised peoples. It has been
my object in particular to trace the origin of the use of
remedial agents, and enquire why and how certain substances
came to be employed in the treatment of disease.

A consideration of such questions is always of interest and
sometimes adds to our knowledge.

I anticipate that the exhibition will reveal many facts,
and will elucidate many obscure points in connection with
the origins of various medicines, and in respect to the
history of disease. It should also bring to light many
objects of historical interest hitherto known only to the
possessors and their personal friends.

I shall greatly value any information sent me in regard to
medical lore, early traditions or references toantient medical
treatment in manuscripts, printed works, etc. Even though
the items be but small, they may form important connecting
links in the chain of historical evidence. Medical
missionaries, and others in contact with native races, can
also obtain particulars of interest in this connection.
Every little helps, and, as I am desirous of making the
Historical Medical Exhibition as complete as possible, I shall
be grateful for any communication you may be able to make.

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EXHIBITION

It is my desire ultimately to place before the profession, in
a collected form, all the information obtained.

The success of the Historical Medical Exhibition will
depend largely upon the co-operation of those interested in
the subject with which it deals, and I again appeal, there-
fore, to all who possess objects of historical medical interest,
to render their kind assistance by loaning them to me so that
the Exhibition may be thoroughly representative. I should
also highly esteem your kindness if you would inform me of
any similar objects in the possession of others

I need hardly say that the greatest care will be taken of
every object lent. All exhibits will be insured (also while in
transit, if requested), and packing and carriage both ways
will be paid.

The exhibition will be strictly professional and scientific in
character, and will not be open to the general public.

The response to the preliminary announcement has been
beyond my expectations, and this, together with the many
valuable suggestions received from leading members of the
medical profession, chemists and others at home and abroad,
has prompted me to considerably widen the scope of the
undertaking since it was first projected.

I have been strongly urged, and have now decided, to
hold the Historical Medical Exhibition at the same time as
the International Medical Congress, which is fixed to take
place in London in the year 1913.

This decision will, I have no doubt, suit the convenience
of the many medical practitioners from all parts of the
world, who will be visiting England on the occasion of the
Congress, and the intervening time will enable me to make
the exhibition more comprehensive, and to include many
objects of exceptional interest that have been promised from
different quarters of the globe.

Hints and suggestions in connection with the exhibition
will be much appreciated.

HENRY S . WELLCOME
SNOW HILL BUILDINGS

LONDON, E.G., ENGLAND

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EXHIBITION

CLASSIFICATION OF EXHIBITS
SECTION i
Medicine : —

(a) Animal medicine ; materia medica
of the animal creation : the tradi-
tion of the connection of animals
with the healing art.

(b) Medical deities of savage tribes

and nations, figures, fetishes,
charms, implements, and other
objects associated with the art of
healing by primitive people?.

subjects associated with the art of
healing by primitive peoples and
the early civilisations.

(d) Votive offerings for health

(Donaria), amulets, amuletic medi-
cines, gems, emblems, talismans,
rings,
charms,

and other objects con-
nected with the art of
healing.

(e) Paintings, drawings, engrav-
ings, etchings, photo-
graphs, models, bas-
reliefs, sculptures and
casts of medical interest.

(/) Pictures from MSS. of all
ages, of medical, surgical,
pharmaceutical and al-
chemical interest. Hippocrates

The Greek Fatber of Medicine
ca. 480 B.O

Dhanwantari

The Vedic Fathe

Medicine and Phy

of the Gods

283

HISTORICAL MEDICAL KXHIHITION

(g) Portraits in oil, water-colours or wax, miniatures,
silhouettes, etchings and engravings, or busts in
sculpture of physicians, surgeons, alchemists,
botanists, apothecaries, chemists, pharmacists,
nurses, etc., of all periods.

(/;) Pictures of medical, chemical and pharmaceutical
institutions of all nations.

(i) Pictures representing the important epochs and
interesting events, such as original operations,
discoveries, etc., in the history of medicine, sur-
gery, chemistry and pharmacy.

(/) Medals, medallions, plaquettes and coins of histori-
cal medical interest.

(/v7) Rare and curious MSS., xylographs, incunabula,
early printed books and works of especial historic
interest, periodicals, pamphlets, book-plates, etc.,
of, and connected with, medicine, surgery, phar-
macy, chemistry, botany and the allied arts.

(/) Historic letters, prescriptions, autographs, case and
note books, records of experiments, antient

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EXHIBITION

diplomas, licences, corporate insignia, and personal
relics of medical, pharmaceutical and chemical interest.

(m) Relics of the influence of astrology in medicine,
horoscopes, and other astrological diagrams bear-
ing on the art of healing.

SECTION 2

Surgery, Dental Surgery, Veterinary
Surgery and Anaesthetics : —

(a) Instruments used in surgery
by pre-historic and savage
peoples.

(b) History and development of
instruments and appliances
used in surgery from the
earliest times.

285

An Amputation of the Leg

From a woodcut of the

XVI century

B A R H K R S f R G K O S ' S SHOP

From an Engraving of the XVII century

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EXHIBITION

(d) Improvised instruments and appliances that have
been used in emergencies, especially those that
have led to inventions and discoveries.

(e) Calculi, and other curious
specimens of historical
interest.

(/) Relics of antient dentis-
try ; early artificial den-
tures,
(g) Antient dental instruments

and appliances.
(h) Antient instruments used

in veterinary surgery.
(i ) Historical apparatus con-
nected with the discovery
and use of anaesthetics.

SECTION 3

Anatomy, Pathology, Ob-
stetrics, etc. : —
(<r) Curiosities of anatomy,
and curious anatomical
models in wax, ivory, etc.

(b) History of the nomenclature, causation and treat-

ment of the most important diseases that have
afflicted mankind from the earliest times.

and other appli-
ances used in
early midwifery
practice, the
lying-in room in
antient times,
models for ob-
stetrical teach-
ing.

(d) Manacles and

other appliances

used in the treat- obstetric chair— -xri

ment of the insane in antient times.

287

AN APOTHECARY'S SHOP
1505

288

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EXHIBITION

SECTION 4
Ophthalmias : —

(a) Antient spectacles, eye-glasses and instruments used

as an aid to sight.

(b) Antient instruments and

appliances for testing
.sight, employed by
oculists.

earliest period.

(d) Historic microscopes.

SECTION 5

Hygiene, Public Health and Pre-
ventive Medicine : —

(a) Objects of interest, antient
and modern, connected with
public health, preventive and
tropical medicine.

(h) Masks, and other preventive
methods of protection against
plague in antient times.

(c) Exhibits illustrative of physio-
logy, anthropology, micros-
copy, bacteriology, biology,
parasitology, and geography.

(d) Placards, posters, manifestos, declarations con-

cerning epidemic diseases, etc.

(e) Antient bills of health.

SECTION 6
Pharmacy : —

(a) Antient pharmacies.

(6) Materia medica of all ages, specimens of antient
medicines and remedial agents of various
periods.

Microscope — XVIII century

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EXHIBITION

(d) Early and curious relics of pharmacy.

(/) Specimens illustrating the history of early pharma-
ceutical preparations (julip, rob and lohoch).

(£) Curious bottles, carboys, ointment and specie jars,
drug vases, pots, ewers, mills, containers, and
implements and appliances used in pharmacy.

(h) Scales, weights and measures of all ages,

(I) Antient prescriptions and curious pharmaceutical

recipes and recipe books.

(_/) Antient prescription books and price lists.
(k) Antient counter bills, labels, business cards, curious

advertisements and trade tokens.
(/) Old travellers' note books and curious orders.
(m) Antient apothecaries' shop signs and early fittings,

early pharmaceutical preparations and specimens

of obsolete and curious medical combinations.
(n) Antient and modern medicine chests, civil, military

and naval.

SECTION 7

Chemistry and Botany : —
(a) Alchemists' laboratories.
(6) Antient stills, mortars and curious apparatus used

by early alchemists.

290

HISTORICAL MEDICAI, EXHIBITION

(c) Historical apparatus used by famous discoverers.
(<Y) Products and preparations, antient and modern, of
chemical and scientific research.

(e) First specimens of rare alkaloids, and other prepara-
tions made by their discoverers.

(/) Rare elements and their salts, etc.

(g) Curious astrological, magnetic and early electrical
appliances.

(h) Antient herbaria.

(i) Specimens of abnormal plant forms and curious
roots used in medicine.

(/) Relics of famous botanists.

SECTION 8

Hospitals, Nursing and Ambulance : —

(a) Objects connected with early hospitals and general

nursing.
(6) Early appliances in nursing the sick.

(d) Antient feeding cups, bottles, urinals and bed-pans.

(e) Naval and military nursing and ambulance appliances

and equipments.

291

ST . ROCH
Healing sufferers from the plague— XVI century

292

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EXHIBITION

(/) Relics and objects of interest associated with nurses.
(g) Relics of foundling hospitals.

ilandrakes-XV century

SECTION 9
Toxicology and Criminology : —

(a) Specimens of
rare and curious
poisons.

(b) Historical ob-
jects connected
with famous
poisoning and
other criminal
cases.

of torture and
execution.

(d) Improvised in-
struments used
for criminal
purposes.

Quackery:- SECTION 10

(a) Antient and modern pictures, prints and relics of
notorious quack doctors.

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EXHIBITION

(b) Antient and modern specimens of quack medicines,

preparations and appliances.

medicines.

SECTION u
Adulteration of Foods and Drugs : —

(a) Specimens showing the adulteration and falsification
of drugs, medicines, foods, fabrics and other
articles affecting health, or associated with
medicine, pharmacy and allied sciences.

Louis Jacques Handtt Datu
a pioneer of photography
Born 1780. Died 1851

SECTION 12
Photography : — -

(a) Objects illustrating the invention and history of
photography.

(b) Early cameras and apparatus.

(d) Portraits of the pioneers of photography.

(e) Original papers and MSS. connected with
photography.

(/) Application of photography to medicine and

surgery, X-ray photography.
(g) Early and rare apparatus.

(h) Curiosities of photography and its latest develop-
ment.

THE MARCH OF SCIENCE

'Without a scientific foundation no permanent super-
structure can be raised. Does not experience warn
us that the rule of thumb is dead and that the
rule of science has taken its place ; that to-day
we cannot be satisfied with the crude methods which
were sufficient for our forefathers, and that those
great industries which do not keep abreast of the
advance of science must surely and rapidly decline?"

Extract from a speech by H .M . King George V. (when

Prince of Wales) at the International Congress of

Applied Chemistry, London, May 27, 1909

WELLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES
KING STREET, LONDON I£NGLAND)

This INSTITUTION is conducted separately from ihe business

of BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co., and is under distinct

direction, although in the Laboratories a large amount of important

scientific work is carried out for the firm.

296

THE WELLCOME
CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

FREDERICK B. POWER, PH.D., LL.D

Director of the Laboratories

KING STREET. SNOW HILL, LONDON ( E N G . ;

297

AWAR DS

CONFERRED UPON THE

WELLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH
LABORATOR I ES

AT INTERNATIONAL EXHIBITIONS

ST. LOUIS' ONE GRAND PRIZE

1904 THREE GOLD MEDALS

LIEGE
1905

ONE GRAND PRIZE

ONE DIPLOMA OF HONOUR

TWO GOLD MEDALS

MILAN
1906

LONDON

(Franco-British)
1908

LONDON
(Japan-British)
1910

BRUSSELS
1910

ONE GRAND PRIZE

TWO GRAND PRIZES

ONE GRAND PRIZE

THREE GRAND PRIZES

ONE DIPLOMA OF HONOUR

CHEMICAL AND PH ARM ACOGNOSTICAL RESEARCH

ETC., ETC .

298

THE WELLCOME

CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES
ORGANISATION, EQUIPMENT AND DEVELOPMENT

THOSE who have observed the progress of events in
Great Britain during the last decade cannot fail to have
been impressed with the remarkable developments and
achievements by which it has been attended, especially in
the domains of the chemical, physical and biological
sciences. The discovery within the past few years of ™^™*™h
several new elements in the atmosphere, and of radio-
active substances, the liquefaction, and even solidification,
of gases that were hitherto regarded as permanent, the
synthesis of several important organic compounds, the
isolation of new substances, and the more precise
characterisation of those previously known, together
with the perfection of chemical processes and the appli-
cations of electricity in chemical and metallurgical opera-
tions, are but a few examples of the contributions to
knowledge and the industrial progress which have signalised
the closing years of the past, and the beginning of the new,
century.

The spirit of research has, in fact, now become so
diffused as to have penetrated into almost every depart-
ment of human knowledge and activity. With a broader
recognition of its usefulness, and even of its necessity, as The spirit
an element of progress, research is no longer confined to ofresearch
institutions of learning, but has proved to be a quite
indispensable factor in its relation to industrial pursuits,
as well as for the study of those important problems
in medical science which are so intimately associated with
the health and happiness of mankind. It has indeed been
truly said that "without a knowledge of the constitution
or structure of the molecules which go to make up the
substances employed as remedies, therapeutics, or the
administration of these remedies, can never be an exact
science. Thus the research chemist may contribute,
though indirectly, his share towards placing medicine
upon a real and scientific basis."

ONE OF T H K LABORATORIES — FIRST FLOOR

ONE OF THE LABORATORIES — SECOND FLOOR

WKI.LCOMF. CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

It is worthy of note that the year 1896 was marked by
the establishment in Great Britain of at least three
laboratories devoted exclusively to scientific research — British
namely, the Davy-Faraday Research Laboratory con- Research
nected with the Royal Institution, which was formally Laboratories
inaugurated in December, 1896; the new Research Labora-
tory of the Royal College of Physicians of Edinburgh,
which was formally opened in November, 1896 ; and the
WELLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES, which
were established in the summer of 1896.

The scope of these laboratories and the directions in
which research is conducted in them, naturally differ.
The first-mentioned, for example, is more especially of
an academic character, and is therefore devoted to some-
what abstract investigations in chemistry and physics ; the ™e
second is stated to have for its primary object the examina- chemical
tion of morbid specimens and material, the study of Research

,. . . , . . , Laboratories

zymotic diseases, and, in general, bacteriological, physio-
logical and pathological work; while the third, the
WELLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES, are
designed for investigations in both pure and applied
chemistry, and, in the latter instance, with special reference
to the study of that large class of both organic and
inorganic compounds which are employed as medicinal
agents in the treatment of disease.

The importance of the work which it is the purpose
to accomplish in these different, but more or less closely
related, departments of science, is apparent, and is duly
appreciated by those who recognise the deficiencies of
existing knowledge.

In response to numerous requests, it has been con-
sidered that a brief sketch of the WELLCOME CHEMICAL
RESEARCH LABORATORIES, descriptive of their organisation,
equipment and development would prove of interest to a
considerable number who have not the opportunity of
inspecting them.

The first announcement of Mr. Henry S. Wellcome's
plan to establish the Chemical Research Laboratories

301

THE COMBUSTION ROOM

WELLCOMK CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

which bear his name, was made on the occasion of a dinner
given by him to Dr. Frederick B. Power, the present
Director, at the Holborn Restaurant, London, on the

T-I • ui Appreciation by

evening of July 21, 1896. The occasion was a memorable distinguished
one in many respects, for the gathering included a large scientists
number of distinguished representatives of the various
sections of the scientific world. It was then explained
by Mr. Wellcome that the work which he proposed to
inaugurate was one which he personally had very much
at heart, that it would be carried out on no selfish lines, but
would be controlled and dictated with the highest regard
for science. It was also made clear that the new
Chemical Research Laboratories were to be entirely distinct
from those of the Works of his firm, in which, as hereto-
fore, research would also continue to be conducted. The
expressions of appreciation of the high purpose and the
scientific spirit which had actuated Mr. Wellcome in the
development of such extended plans for chemical research,
as manifested by various distinguished speakers on the
occasion referred to, were indeed most auspicious, and
fittingly commemorated the inauguration of the work that
was to be undertaken.

The first home of the laboratories was in a building
located at No. 42, Snow Hill, but it was soon found
desirable to make considerable extensions. In order to
accomplish this, it was decided that the laboratories should Locatlonm

r central London

be transferred to a building of their own, of which they
should have complete use and possession. Such premises
were secured at No. 6, King Street, Snow Hill, where in a
very central part of London, and amid surroundings replete
with many of its most interesting historical associations,
the laboratories are now located.

The building is a handsome, modern one of Venetian
style of architecture, and comprises four stories and a
basement. A view of it is represented on page 296.

On the ground floor of the building are the office of
the Director, and the library, the latter being quite complete
for the special requirements. It contains not only a

303

WEU.COME CHEMICAL RKSEARCH LABORATORIES

considerable number of recent chemical and pharmacological
works, but also complete sets of many journals, such as the
Journal of the Chemical Society, Berichte tier deutschen
library chcmisclun Gesellsclicift , the Chemical News, Journal of the

Society of Chemical Industry, etc. Files of many of the
more important chemical, pharmaceutical and medical
periodicals of England, America and Germany are also
kept. As several very large and complete scientific and
technical libraries are also at all times accessible to members
of the staff, it is evident that the requirements in this
direction are most abundantly supplied. In the library
there is also a cabinet containing specimens of the various
substances obtained in the course of laboratory investiga-
tions, which already form a collection of considerable
interest.

The laboratories proper are located on the first, second
and third floors of the building, and are represented on
pages 300, 302. They are similar in their arrangement, are
provided with gas and electricity for both illuminating
and heating purposes, and completely equipped with all
ub^ratori'eV^ ^Ie necessary apparatus and appliances for conducting
chemical investigations. There are pumps on each table
for filtration under pressure, and special adaptations for
vacuum distillations. A separate connection with the
electric mains supplies the current for heating iron plates
used for the distillation of ether and other similar
liquids. Each laboratory is provided with fine analytical
and ordinary balances, which are carefully protected from
dust and moisture by tightly-fitting glass cases. There are
also telephones on each floor, so that communication
bstween the different laboratories or with the Director's
office can be quickly effected.

The basement of the building, which is well-lighted by
electricity, contains a combustion furnace and all the
appliances for conducting ultimate analyses, whilst two
other furnaces of the most approved construction are
available in the laboratories; it also contains a large electric
motor for working the shaking and stirring apparatus,

WELLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

drug mill, etc., and a dark-room adapted for polari-
metric or photographic work. A view of a portion of
the combustion room is shown on page 302. In direct
communication with the basement are dry and com-
modious vaults, which afford ample room for the storage
of the heavier chemicals and the reserve stock of glass-
ware, etc. By means of a small lift, articles may be
conveniently transported from the basement to any floor
of the building.

From this brief description, and the accompanying
photographic illustrations, it will be seen that the
WELLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES are unique
in their appointments and in the purpose they are designed
to accomplish.

It is perhaps, hardly necessary to explain that some of
the problems which engage the time and attention of
members of the staff — which comprises a number of
highly-skilled and experienced chemists — are of technical Original
application, having reference to the perfection of the ^"entmcf
chemical products of Burroughs Wellcome & Co. These publicatio
naturally do not always afford material for publication,
and many other difficult researches extend over con-
siderable periods of time. Nevertheless, a considerable
number of publications, embodying the results of original
work contributed to various scientific societies, which are
now consecutively numbered, have already been issued.

Other investigations in progress will, from time to
time, form the subjects of future communications.

Although too short a period has elapsed, since the
establishment of these laboratories, to afford much
material for a historical retrospect, their present measure
of success may be considered to have justified the
expectations of their founder and of those who are in
sympathy with the work which they aim to accomplish.

WELLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIKS

SCIENTIFIC PAPERS PUBLISHED BY

THE WELLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH
LABORATORIES

1. SOME NEW GOLD S\LTS OF HvOSCINE, Hv'OSCYAMINE AND AlROPlNE

2. THK CHARACTERS AND METHOD.S OF ASSAY OF THE OFFICIAL

HYPO PHOSPHITES

3. NOTE ON THE MYDRIATIC ALKALOIDS

4. PREPARATION OF ACID PHENYLIC SALTS OF DIBASIC ACIDS

5. A NEW METHOD FOR THE ANALYSIS OF COMMERCIAL PHENOLS

6. THE ASSAY OF PREPARATIONS CONTAINING PILOCARPISE

7. PILOCARPISE AND THE ALKALOIDS OF JABORANDI LEAVES

8. A NKW GLUCOSIDE FROM WlLLOW BARK

9. THE CONSTITUTION OF PILOCARPINE — Part I

10. THK COMPOSITION AND DETERMINATION OF CERIUM OXALATK
n. RESEARCHES ON MORPHINE — Part I

12. OBSERVATIONS RELATING TO THE CHEMISTRY OF THE BRITISH

PHARMACOPOEIA

13. MERCUROUS IODIDE

14. THE COMPOSITION OF BEKBERINE PHOSPHATE

15. A CONTRIBUTION TO THE PH ARMACOGNOSY OF OFFICIAL STROI'HAN-

THUS SEED

16. THE CHEMISTRY OF THE JABORASDI ALKALOIDS

17. A NEW ADMIXTURE OF COMMERCIAL STROPHANTHUS SEED

18. RESEARCHES ON MORPHINE — Pan II

iq. THE CONSTITUTION OF PILOCARPINE— Part II

20. THE CHEMISTRY OF THE BARK OF RoiilNIA PSEUD-ACACIA. Linn.

21. THE ANATOMY OF THE BARK OF RoiilNIA PSEUD-ACACIA, Lillll.

22. A SOLUBLE MANGANESE ClTRATE AM) COMPOUNDS OF MANGANESE

WITH IRON

23. THE CHEMICAL CHARACTERS OF SO-CALLED loDO-TANN IN COMPOUNDS

24. THE CONSTITUTION OF PILOCARPINE — Part III

25. A NEW SYNTHESIS OF a-ETHYLTRicARBALLYLic ACID

26. THE CONSTITUENTS OF TH E ESSENTIAL OIL OF ASARUM CANADENSF,

Linn.

27. DERIVATIVES OF GALLIC ACID

28. THE OCCURRENCE OF SALICIN IN DIFFERENT WILLOW AND

POPLAR BARKS

3C6

WKLLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

SCIENTIFIC PAPERS — continued

29. THK CONSTITUENTS OF COMMERCIAL CHRYSAROHIX

30. THE CONSTITUENTS OF AN ESSENTIAL OIL OK RUE

3r. METHYL P.METHYLHEXYL KETONK

32. INTERACTION OF KETONES AND ALDEHYDES WITH ACID CHLORIDES

33. THE ANATOMY OF THE STEM OF DURRIS ULIGINOSA, Bentli.

34. THB CHEMISTRY OK THE STEM OF DERRIS ULIGINOSA, Bentli.

35. THE CONSTITUTION OF PILOCARPINE — Part IV

36. PREPARATION AND PROPERTIES OF DIMETHYLGLYOXALINE AND

DlMETHYLPYRAZOLE

37. THE ELECTROLYTIC REDUCTION OF PHENO- AND NAPHTHO-

MORPHOI.ONES

38. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF KO-SAM SEEDS (BRUCEA SUMATRANA,

Roxb.)

59 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY OF THE BARKS OF THE SALICACE.I; —
Part I

40. THE CONSTITUTION OF CHRYSOPHANIC ACID AND OF EMODIN

41. THK CONSTITUTION OF EPINEPHRINE

42 A L.liVO- ROTATORY MODIFICATION OF QuERCITOL

43. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THE ESSENTIAL OlL OF CALIFORNIAN LAUREL

44. SOME DERIVATIVES OF UMBELLULONE

45. THE CONSTITUENTS OF CHAULMOOGRA SEEDS

46. THE CONSTITUTION OF CHAULMOOGRIC ACID — Part I
47 CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF CASCARA BARK

48. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF GYMNEMA LEAVES

4-). THE RELATION BETWEEN NATURAL AND SYNTHETIC M. Gl.YCERYL-
PHOSPHORIC ACIDS

50. GYNOCARDIN, A NEW CYANOGENETIC GLUCOSIDE

51. PREPARATION AND PROPERTIES OF 1:4: 5 — TRIMETHYLGLYOXALINE

52. THE CONSTITUTION OF PILOCARPINE— Part V

53. THE CONSTITUTION OF HARBALOIN — Part I

5J. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THE SEEDS OK HVDNOCARPUS WIGHTIANA,

Blum;, AND OK HYDNOCARPUS ANTHELMINTICA, Picric

55. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THE SEEDS OF GYNOCARDIA ODORATA, R.Br.

56. THE SYNTHESIS OK SUBSTANCES ALLIED TO EPINEPHRINE

57. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF GRINDELIA

58 CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF AETHUSA CYNAPIUM, Linn.

59. PREPARATION AND PROPERTIES OF SOMK NEW TROPEINES

60. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THE ESSENTIAL OIL FROM THK FRUIT OF

PlTTOSPORUM UNDULATUM, Vent

307

WKLLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

SCIENTIFIC PAPERS — continued

61. THE CONSTITUTION OF UMBELLULONE

62. LONDON BOTANIC GARDENS

63. CHEMICAL AND PHYSIOLOGICAL EXAMINATION OF THE FRUIT OF

CHAILLETIA TOXICARIA

64. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF ERIODICTYON

65. THE BOTANICAL CHARACTERS OF SOME CALIFORNIAN SPECIES OF

GRINDELIA

66. THE RELATIONS BETWEEN NATURAL AND SYNTHETICAL GLYCERYL-

PHOSPHORIC ACIDS — Part II

67. THE CONSTITUTION OF UMBF.LLULONE — Part II

68. THE REDUCTION or HYDROXYLAMINODIHYDROUMBELLULONEOXIME

69. THE CONSTITUTION OF CHAULMOOGRIC AND HYDNOCARPIC ACIDS

70. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THE ESSENTIAL OIL OF AMERICAN

PENNYROYAL

71. THE CONSTITUTION OF HOMO-ERIODICTYOL

72. THE INTERACTION OF METHYLENE CHLORIDE AND THE SODIUM

DERIVATIVK OF ETHYL MALONATE

73. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF THE FRUIT OF BRUCKA ANTIDYSENTERICA.

Lain.

74. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF THE BARKS OF BRUCKA ANTIDYSENTERICA,

Lain., AND BRUCEA SUMATRANA, Roxb.

75. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF GRINDELIA — Part II

76. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF LIPPIA SCABERRIMA, Sunder ('' Beukes>s

Boss")

77. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF THE ROOT AND LEAVES OF MORINDA

I ONG1FLORA

78. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THF. ESSENTIAL OIL OF \UTMEG

79. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF MICROMERIA CHAMISSONIS (Yerba

Buena)

80. THE CONSTITUTION OF UMBELLULONE — Part III
8t. THE CONSTITUENTS OF OLIVE LEAVES

82. THE CONSTITUENTS OF Ol.IVE BARK

83. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF IPOMCF.A PURPUREA

84. THE CHARACTERS OF OFFICIAL IRON ARSENATE

85. PREPARATION OF A SOLUBLE FERRIC ARSENATE

86. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THE EXPRESSED OIL OF NUTMEG

87. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION AND PHYSIOLOGICAL ACTION OF NUTMEG

88. SOME OBSERVATIONS REGARDING " OLEUROPEIN " FROM OLIVE

LEAVES

308

WKLLCOME CHEMICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

SCIENTIFIC PAPERS — continued

89. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF ERIODICTYON — Part II

go. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THE BARK OF PRUNUS SEROTINA

91. THK CONSTITUENTS OF THE RHIZOME OF APOCYNUM ANDRO-

SAEMIFOLIUM

92. /SO-AMYGDALIN, AND THE RESOLUTION OF ITS HEPTA-ACF.TYL

DERIVATIVE

93. THK ACTION OF NITRIC ACID ON THE ETHERS OF AROMATIC

HYDROXYALDEHYDES

94. THF: SYNTHESIS OF SUBSTANCES ALLIED TO COTARNINE

95. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF ELATERIUM AND THE CHARACTERS OF

ELATERIN

96. THE TESTS FOR PURITY OF QUININE SALTS

97. THE CONFIGURATION OF TROPINE AND ^T-TROPINE AND THE

RESOLUTION OF ATROPINE

98. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THE FRUIT OF ECBALLIUM ELATERIUM

99. SYNTHESES IN THE EPINETHRINE SERIES

100. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF JALAH

101. THE CONSTITUENTS OF RUMEX EcKLONIANUS

102. THE CONSTITUENTS OF COLOCYNTH

103. THE CONSTITUENTS OF RED CLOVER FLOWERS

104. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF PUMPKIN SEED

105. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF WATERMELON SEED

106. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF ORNITHOGALUM THYRSOIDES

107. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THE FLOWERS OF TRIFOLIUM INCARNATUM

108. THE CONSTITUENTS OF THE LEAVES OF PRUNUS SEROTINA

109. SYNTHESIS OF COTARNINE

no. NOTE ON GYNOCARDINE AND GYNOCARDASF.

in. CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF THE TUBEROUS ROOT OF IPOMCEA
HORSFALLI/E

112. THE RESOLUTION OF BENZOYLOSC1NK

113. NOTE ON THE CONSTITUTION CF a-El.ATERIN

114. THE CONSTITUENTS OF L.EPTANDRA

115. THE CONSTITUTION OF ERIODICTYOL OF HOMOERIODICTYOL, AND

OF HESPERITIN

116. THE SYNTHESIS OF 2:4:6- TRIMETHOXYPHENYL -3:4-

DlMETHOXYSTYRYL I<ETONE

310

THE WELLCOME

PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH

LABORATORIES

H. H. DALE, M.A., M.D,

BROCKWEL L HALL, HERNE HILL, LONDON (ENG.)
311

312

AWARDS

CONFERRED UPON THE

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH
LABORATORIES

AT INTERNATIONAL EXHIBITIONS

ST. LOUIS
1904

LIEGE
1905

ONE GRAND PRIZE

TWO GOLD MEDALS

MILAN
1906

ONE GRAND PRIZE

LONDON

(Franco- British)
1908

L ONDON

'Japan-British)
1910

BRUSSELS
1910

TWO GRAND PRIZES

ONE GRAND PRIZE

THREE GRAND PRIZES

ONE DIPLOMA OF HONOUR

FOR

PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH A N]D PREPARATIONS

ETC . , ETC.

313 T

THE WELLCOME
PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

THE activities of the Wellcome Physiological Research
Laboratories cover a wide field of therapeutic investiga-
tion. The production of Anti-Sera and of bacterial
preparations for therapeutic inoculation, and the researches
in bacteriology and the mechanism of immunity necessitated
by the progressive development of this comparatively new
department of therapeutics, have been carried on side by
side with investigations into the mode of action and the
nature of the active principles of drugs of animal and
vegetable origin, and the production by synthesis of sub-
stances identical with, or related to, the naturally-occurring
principles, in chemical structure and pharmacological action.
Incidental to this pharmacological work has been the
development of methods for controlling and standardising,
by physiological means, the activity of potent drugs to
which chemical methods of assay are not applicable.

ANTI-SERA

A large series of Anti-Sera is now available for thera-
peutic use, and many have been first produced in these
Laboratories. They may be classified into Antitoxic sera,
possessing the power of neutralising the soluble toxins
produced in artificial culture by certain organisms, or
elaborated in the poison glands of animals ; and Bactericidal
sera which are obtained by immunising horses against the
actual bacterial substance of such pathogenic organisms
as do not form soluble toxins. Early representatives of
the two classes were Diphtheria Antitoxic Serum and
Anti-streptococcus Serum, and these have maintained
their position as the most widely and successfully used
sera of their respective classes. These Laboratories were
pioneers in the production of these sera in the British
Empire, and produced the first Anti-Diphtheria Serum
used in the United States of America.

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LARORATORIES

DIPHTHERIA ANTITOXIC SERUM, 'WELLCOME'

Since the foundation of the Wellcome Physiological
Research Laboratories, a number of pamphlets, leaflets
and reports dealing with therapeutic sera have been issued
in connection therewith.

In the early editions, the origin, history and develop-
ment of serum therapy were given, as well as an
explanation of the meaning of the expression ' ' antitoxin Antitoxii
unit." It is scarcely necessary to repeat that the antitoxin
unit adopted at the Wellcome Physiological Research
Laboratories is the Ehrlich-Behring unit. It is not
intended in these notes to take into view any of these
aspects, but merely to bring up to date and present, in a
succinct form, the progress of the treatment and the results
obtained by means of it in more recent years. Diphtheria
Antitoxic Serum is standardised by Ehrlich's method. In
its earlier form the unit was based upon the power of
completely neutralising the local as well as the general
effects of the minimum dose of a given specimen of
diphtheria toxin which sufficed to kill, in 48 hours, a
guinea pig weighing 250 grammes. The quantity which
just sufficed for this was said to contain one-tenth of
a unit. Thus, if o-oi c.c. just completely protected, the
serum was said to contain 10 units per c.c.

Samples of serum, carefully standardised by this method
in the early days of its introduction, having been pre-
served, it soon became known that one-tenth of a unit of Toxoids
serum would not protect against ten times the minimal in filter*
fatal dose of every filtered culture. An explanation of
this curious fact has been put forward by Ehrlich. The
filtered culture contains, besides the specific toxin, other
bodies, named by him " toxoids," which, while in moderate
doses incapable of causing death, have yet the power of
combining with the antitoxin and rendering this inert.
The number of minimal fatal doses which one-tenth of a
unit of serum will neutralise depends, therefore, on the
ratio of toxoids to toxin in the filtrate. For the purpose
of testing serum, therefore, it is necessary to use a filtrate,

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LAHOKATORIKS

The new
method

the neutralising capacity of which has been ascertained
by careful titration with standard diphtheria antitoxic serum.
This standard has remained unaltered throughout, thanks
to the fact that some of the earliest serum tested has been
carefully preserved.

In May, 1897, a change in the method of standardising
serum was introduced by Ehrlich. The presence or
absence of a local swelling at the seat of injection is no
longer taken as the criterion of neutralisation, but the
death or survival of the animal — four days being taken as
the limit; and the test dose of filtrate is no longer that
which is neutralised by one-tenth of a unit, but that which
just suffices to kill the animal within four days when
mixed with a whole unit of serum. This change did not
introduce any alteration of the standard, because the test
dose is ascertained by a series of experiments in which a
unit of the standard serum is employed. It has the great
advantage of being a purely objective method. For
instance, no discrepancies can arise from difference of
opinion as to what is to be considered as the smallest local
swelling worthy of notice. All errors of measurement,
also, are reduced ten per cent.

Statistics

diphtheria

STATISTICS OF TREATMENT BY
ANTITOXIC SERUM

DIPHTHERIA

Amongst the most valuable English statistics on the sub-
ject are those compiled by the Medical Officers of the
Metropolitan Asylums Board ; and from them may be
gathered the following figures : In 1894, only a small
number of cases were treated with antitoxin. In 1895,
6i'8 per cent., and in 1896, 71-3 per cent., of the total cases
were treated with antitoxin, it not having been employed
in moribund or hopeless cases, nor in those which were
doubtful in nature, or so mild as not to require any specific
treatment. The accompanying table shows clearly a regular
percentage decrease in mortality pan passn with a regular
increase in the percentage of cases treated with antitoxin : —

316

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

CASES OF DIPHTHERIA TREATED IN THE HOSPITALS OF
THE METROPOLITAN ASYLUMS BOARD

Mortality.
Year Per cent.

of all cases
1890-93 ............ 30-4

1894 ... ... ... ... 29-6

1895 ... ... ... ... 28'!

1896 ... ... ... ... 25-9

1897 ............ 20-4

1898 ............ 17-5

1899 ............ I5-4

1900 ... ... ... ... i2'g

... ... ... ... I2'6

1902 ... ... ... ... ii'8

1903 ... ... ... ... IO'2

1904 ... ... ... ... 109

1905 ... ... ... ... g'o

1906 ... ... ... ... io-4

1907 ... ... ... ... 10-9

The Colchester epidemic in the summer of 1901
furnishes evidence of especial weight.* Up to a certain
date, the cases in hospital were treated with antiseptic
sprays. These in all amounted to 81, of whom 21 died, Jhf

Colchester

giving a case mortality of 25-9 per cent. After this date, epidemic
all the cases were treated with antitoxin without antiseptic
spray, and of 119 so treated, 7 died. The case mortality of
this group was therefore 5'8 per cent.

The inference that antitoxin thus saved many lives is
much strengthened by the fact that of 37 cases treated at
home before the date indicated, io-8 per cent, died, whilst
of 48 cases treated at home after this date, 14 '5 per cent.
died. This concurrent evidence clearly shows that the
severity of the disease was not declining at the time when
such good results were being obtained at hospital with
antitoxin.

* Journal of Hygiene, April 1, 1902
317

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

CURATIVE AND PROPHYLACTIC DOSES OF
DIPHTHERIA ANTITOXIC SERUM

Experiments on animals have shown that the amount
of antitoxin which is necessary to save life increases at a
rapidly accelerating rate, according to the length of time
which elapses between the injection of the diphtheria
virus and the administration of the curative serum, and
this is amply confirmed by the results of experience in
hospitals. Thus Wernicke and Behring, having determined
the amount of antitoxic serum necessary to save from death
a guinea pig which had immediately before been injected
subcutaneously with a lethal dose of diphtheria toxin,
found that ten times this amount was required to effect
a cure if this administration was deferred until eight hours
after the injection of the toxin ; whilst twenty-four hours
afterwards, fifty times the initial quantity was necessary.

The efficacy of antitoxin given early in the disease,
and the urgent necessity of beginning the treatment at
the earliest possible moment, are well illustrated by the
following statistics from the Brook Hospital, published
in the Metropolitan Asylums Board Report for 1902 : —

Day of the disease
on which treatment
commenced

Mortality per cent.

1898

1899

1900

1901

1902

First

•o

Second

5'4

3'8

3'6

4'I

4'6

Third

H'5

14-3

122

6-7

irg

10-5

Fourth

19 o

18-1

20'0

14 9

12-4

19-8

Fifth

21'0

22-5

2O'4

2IJ2

16-6

19-4

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

The serum from normal horses may cause rashes and rise
of temperature in susceptible individuals, but apart from Li it f
this the only limit to the administration of antitoxin is the dose
bulk of the fluid in which it is contained. Therefore, a large
dose should be given at the earliest possible moment, when- D

Repeated

ever there is reason to suspect diphtheria ; and in cases injections
which progress unfavourably, the treatment may be repeated
in about six hours, giving at least double the initial dose.

Far less, however, is to be expected from repeated
injections at intervals than from one full dose given at
the outset of the attack. In no case should either the
administration of antitoxin or the repetition of the dose
be delayed until the result of a bacteriological examination
has been made known.

CURATIVE DOSE. — The dose for a case of moderate
severity should not be less than 2000 units, and in severe
cases 4000 units at least should be given at once, and larger
doses are recommended by many authorities. These doses °r°s*ectiv
should be given irrespective of age, because diphtheria is ofage
very fatal to young children. If any difference were to be
made, adults would have the smaller doses, as the prognosis
in diphtheria improves with the age of the patient.

As the question of the keeping-quality of sera is frequently
raised, it may be stated generally that, provided they are Keeping-
kept in a cool place at a fairly constant temperature, and iuallty of
protected from light, these sera may be relied upon to
remain practically unaltered for at least a year from the
date of issue. They are issued in phials hermetically-sealed
in the blow-pipe flame, a method which greatly favours
this result.

PROPHYLACTIC DOSE. — Protective injections, of at least
1000 units, may be administered to the rest of the family
whereof one member has been attacked with diphtheria.

Prophylax.

It must be borne in mind, however, that the prophylactic
action gives only a temporary protection against attack to
the person so treated, the protection thus conferred lasting
probably about three weeks at the most. The whole of
the contents of one phial may be injected in each case. It

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

should be carefully noted that, when once a phial is opened,
it is highly undesirable, owing to risk of contamination, to
reserve a portion of the contents for a future occasion. It
should all be used at once on one or more patients.

BACTERIOLOGICAL DIAGNOSIS OF DIPHTHERIA

The injection of antitoxin at the earliest possible moment
in the course of the disease may be a matter of such
importance to the patient that this should be done on the
clinical evidence alone where the diagnosis is doubtful; but
immediate steps should be taken to confirm the diagnosis
by bacteriological methods.

ON SERUM ERUPTIONS

In some cases, the administration of a curative serum
is followed by rashes and transitory rise of temperature ;
occasionally by pains and swellings in the joints. These
accidents have been shown to be also caused by normal
horse serum, so that they are not to be attributed to the
anti-bodies in the serum. The introduction of more highly

serum potent serum, allowing a diminution of the bulk to be

injected, has rendered these complications less frequent.
They arise for the most part during convalescence, and
do not appear to have resulted, in any case, in death,
though they have doubtless sometimes retarded recovery.
The following account of this subject, by Dr. Arthur
Stanley,* deals with 500 cases of diphtheria at the North-
Western Hospital of the Metropolitan Asylums Board, all
of which were treated with antitoxin: "The diagnosis of

Diphtheria doubtful cases was verified by bacteriological examination.

antitoxin fhe total number of deaths in the series was So, a death-

rate of 16 per cent. The antitoxin was injected in quantities
usually of 4000 Behring antitoxin units immediately after
admission, but varied from 1000 to 30,000 units according
to the severity of the case and the time of admission after
onset. No constant relation between the quantity of

* British Medical Journal, February 15, 1902

showing thr Ray fungus
stained by Gram's mftho.

(' Soloid ' Gentian Violet

1 Soloid ' Gram's Iodine Sol in

and ' 8oloid ' Kpsiu)

REPRODUCTIONS IN ACTUAL COLOURS OF PREPARATIONS

STAINED WITH 'SOLOID' MICROSCOPIC STAINS

(Magnification WOO diameters]

No 4. BA.- i I i.n s A a s K

stained with

Methyl Violet

(• Soloid Methyl Violet)

(Aerobic Culture ou
Acid Serum ASar, showiuS

No. 5. BACI 1. 1, c

showing spores

stained by iloeller's method

(•Soloid1 Fuchsine [Basic] and

1 Soloid ' Methylene Blue)

stained with

REPRODUCTIONS IN ACTUAL COLOURS OF PREPARATIONS

STAINED WITH 'SOLOID' MICROSCOPIC STAINS

(Magnification 1000 diameters)

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

antitoxin given and the frequency of eruption was noted,

but in one case, where antitoxins from two different sources Different

were injected at the same time, two separate antitoxin rashes sources of

r . 1 1 i , antitoxin

were observed ; the first occurring ten days, and the second
fourteen days, after the giving of the antitoxins. No special
sources of antitoxin were found to cause a preponderating
number of eruptions, and the eruptions occurred through-
out the two years I was working with diphtheria.

"Skin eruptions appeared in about a fourth of the
cases. The period of onset was usually during the second
week after the giving of the antitoxin. The eruption met
with was not so peculiar as to be pathognomonic, but was
sufficiently marked, especially in relation to the general
symptoms, as to constitute a distinct type.

" There may be a little desquamation after severe and
prolonged erythemata, but there is rarely any confusion
between true scarlet fever occurring in the course of
diphtheria and eruptions produced by antitoxin.

"The general symptoms, beyond a rise of temperature
of some 3° F. and its accompanying malaise, are not
marked. Pains in the joints have been frequently described,
but were not observed in one of these 500 cases. This result
may have been due to the cases being chiefly among Rise of

, . , temperature

children. The only marked case in which pain was present
was that of a girl of 13, who had frontal headache and
lumbar pain extending down the thighs. She had a
marginate erythematous eruption, and the temperature
rose to 101° F.

" Transient early erythematous blushes, and also urticaria,
often occur soon after the injection of antitoxin, but these
may be generally considered to be of traumatic origin, and
not to be related to any specific property of the antitoxin.
The area of skin, before injection, was sterilised with soap
and carbolic lotion, and the injection syringe was boiled
before each injection. No abscess at the seat of injection
occurred.

"The occurrence of an antitoxin eruption during the
course of a case of diphtheria did not appear to influence the

321

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

prognosis seriously, though it cannot but be held that any
febrile disturbance of the heart would tend to have a
harmful effect. No case, however, was observed where
fatal heart-failure was precipitated by the occurrence of
an antitoxin eruption."

A long experience of reports received at the Wellcome
Physiological Research Laboratories, leads to the con-
clusion that idiosyncrasy of the patient is more responsible
for the varying severity of the eruption and other symptoms
attributable to serum than the use of serum from different
horses.

Several observers have found the administration of calcium
salts efficacious in preventing or dispelling serum-rashes.

An interesting light has in recent years been thrown on
the susceptibility of some patients to the toxic action of
serum, by the observation that the injection of a small
quantity of horse-serum into an animal, renders it liable to
fatal intoxication by a large dose given upwards of ten days
later. Goodall ° has shown that an injection of serum may
render a patient liable to severe constitutional effects when
another injection is given even two years later ; and inter-
esting cases are on record in which patients have had
progressively more severe symptoms as a result of three or
more successive injections of serum separated by intervals
of years. It must be borne in mind, however, that cases
of natural abnormal susceptibility to other substances are
not uncommon. Eggs, strawberries, shell-fish, etc., produce
in certain individuals, when taken in comparatively minute
quantities, symptoms very similar to the serum rashes.

The administration of the large doses of diphtheria
antitoxin, which most authorities now advocate, is much
facilitated by reducing the volume containing the requisite
number of units. Formerly this was onlv made possible bv

ri ,-,

the chance discovery ot a horse which responded well to the
immunising injections and yielded a natural serum of high
potency. During the last few years, however, methods of

* Journal of Hygiene, 1907

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

separation of the antitoxin by salt-precipitation have been
developed, which render it possible to get high unit value in
small volume and at the same time to eliminate those
proteins of the serum which, though they have no antitoxic
value, are at least equally responsible with the antitoxin-
bearing fraction for the incidental toxic symptoms which
serum produces in susceptible patients. Such concentrated
solutions of the antitoxic globulins have been reported in
practice to cause a smaller percentage of rashes and other
symptoms, and those of a milder type, than are produced
by equivalent injections of untreated serum.

' Wellcome ' Brand Concentrated Diphtheria Antitoxin is
prepared by such a method of salt-precipitation and fraction-
ation the final product containing 1000 antitoxic units in
i c.c. or less.

ANTIVENENE

This serum continues to maintain its claim to be a trust-
worthy remedy for snake-bite, if injected in large quantity,
not later than three or four hours after the bite. A case Antlvenene
reported in the Lancet of January 5, 1901, illustrates the
efficiency of fresh antivenom serum, even after the appear-
ance of general symptoms, and in the absence of any local
treatment except sucking the wound. The serum was
injected into each flank, about 3^ hours after the bite.

' Wellcome ' Brand Anti-venom Serum is standardised
against the venom of the cobra and Russell viper (Daboia) ,
and is the result of immunising horses against these venoms.

The surgical treatment of snake-bite is very important, and
depends upon the fact that " it is possible, after even half an
hour or more from the time of the bite, a considerable treatment c
portion of the venom may still be unabsorbed at the site of snake-bite
the injection, and so may still be destroyed" by suitable
means.*

The first thing to do in every case where the position of
the bite makes it possible, is to place a ligature (rope, cord

* Lancet, February 6, 1904, page 355
323

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

or handkerchief) round the limb between the wound made
by the fangs of the snake and the body, and wash the
wound thoroughly, encouraging it to bleed.

The wound should then at once bo bathed with a fresh
solution of chloride of lime (1/60 in distilled water), or with
a i per cent, solution of chloride of gold, with the object of
destroying in situ any venom which may remain unabsorbed
(Calmette, Institut Pasteur de Lille).

Or a small incision may be made through the wound,
and pure crystals of permanganate of potassium, moistened
with a little water, rubbed into it. (Captain L. Rogers,
I. M.S., quoting Brunton, Fayrer and others.*)

The successful carrying-out of either of these procedures

depends upon an intelligent appreciation of the exact

The posit"™ position of the poison, which may be indicated by a local

of the poison

extravasation of blood-stained serum.

The following important considerations should be
specially noted : —

In severe cases, and in others where some time (two or
three hours) has elapsed after the bite, the serum should, if
possible, be injected intravenously.

The dose should not be less than 10 c.c., whether injected
subcutaneously or intravenously. The snake-bite should be
very carefully cleansed and disinfected before injecting the
serum.

"Artificial respiration may . . . be of great value while
medical aid or antivenene is being sent for. . . ." f

ANTI-TETANUS SERUM

This serum, like anti-diphtheria serum, is antitoxic in its

• action. Although it may be stated that some cases of this

disease have been distinctly benefited by its administration,

Anti-tetanus ' '

serum in many others the serum has failed. A consideration of

the nature of the disease shows why this is so, and why,
even more than in diphtheria, it is necessary to commence
the treatment at the earliest possible moment.

* Lancet, February 6, 1904, page 354. t Lancet, February 6, 1904,
page 352.

324

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

Tetanus is a disease caused by the action of the toxin of
the bacillus tetani upon the central nervous system ; the
toxin, as in the case of diphtheria, being produced in some
local lesion, the seat of the growth and multiplication
of the specific organisms. In tetanus, the toxin makes its
way to the motor ganglion cells, partly by way of the
nerves in connection with the affected part, and partly by
way of the blood.

Unfortunately, the convulsive stage of tetanus is an
indication not of the commencement of the disease, as
is the appearance of a membrane in diphtheria, but of a
comparatively advanced stage of the disease, and of the
occurrence of serious damage to the nervous system. The
remedy should therefore be administered immediately on
the manifestation of any distinct symptoms, possibly tetanic,
such as difficulty in opening the mouth, stiffness in the neck, symPtomsof

0 ' tetanus

or the onset, some days after the accident and without

obvious cause, of an acute pain at the point of injury ; and

in view of the fact that the tetanus bacillus is localised

and restricted to the seat of infection, attention is called

to the advantage, in cases of punctured wounds, of excising

freely and thoroughly the tissues around. The curative dose

of anti-tetanus serum may vary from 50 c.c. to 100 c.c., in

one dose or more, but, as a prophylactic in the treatment

of wounds contaminated with dust, dirt, soil, etc., a smaller

dose of 10 c.c. is said to be sufficient. This protection,

however, does not persist longer than five or six weeks. It

should be remembered, in considering doses, that it is Dosejrfthe

impossible at present to state definitely the quantity of

serum necessary to meet a given case, for so much depends

on the severity of the attack, and the stage at which

treatment is begun. It is, therefore, better to give a large

•dose at the commencement. The old medicinal treatment

should not be neglected.

The records of 98 cases treated by serum were collected
by Weischer.* Of these, 41 died, the mortality per cent,
thus being 41-8.

* Miinch. Med. Woch., Nov. 16, 1897
325

serum

WELLCOMK PHYSIOLOGICAL RKSHARCH I.ABORATORIKS

The serum has been injected directly into the substance
of the brain with success, and it has been claimed that this
method gives the best results. A full account of this, giving
details of the operation, may be found in the medical
papers.*

Whilst, as a curative agent, the serum has thus proved
a relative failure, it has proved a most valuable prophy-
lactic in the case of wounds infected with soil in districts
where tetanus abounds.

BACTERICIDAL SERA

Anti-streptococcus Serum. — The disappointing results
which were obtained in many cases in the early days of
the preparation of anti-streptococcus serum were doubtless
due in part to the absence, at the time, of any adequate
classification of the streptococci, with the result that a
serum prepared against one strain of streptococcus was tried
for a wide range of different infections, which would now be
recognised as due to specifically distinct organisms.

Polyvalent Anti-streptococcus Sera. — A prolonged and
serious attempt has been made in conjunction with clinical
observation and laboratory tests to obtain specific polyvalent
anti-streptococcus sera. Cultures were obtained from as
many cases as possible of a particular disease, taken from
such situations and under such precautions as to make
it probable that the organisms were causally associated
with the disease. The following are details of the
origin of the organisms used in producing some of the
' Wellcome ' Sera : —

Anti-streptococcus Serum (Puerperal Fever). — Cultures
from 26 cases, mostly fatal, obtained from the uterus or the
spleen.

Anti-streptococcus Serum (Erysipelas). — Cultures from
3 cases.

Anti-streptococcus Serum (Scarlet Fever). — Cultures
from 9 cases, several of which were fatal, obtained from
the blood, the spleen and the knee-joint.

* British Medical Journal, January 7, 1899
323

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

Anti-streptococcus Serum, Rheumatism (Micrococcus
Rheumaticus). — Cultures from 6 cases, obtained from the
knee or shoulder-joint.

Anti-streptococcus Serum, Polyvalent. — The horses are
immunised against all the strains mentioned above, and, in
addition, with strains obtained from 2 cases of Angina
Ludovici and 6 cases of Ulcerative Endocarditis (from blood
cultures obtained during life), and with 10 strains of
Streptococcus Pyogenes from Pyaemia, Mammary Abscess,
Acute Peritonitis, Suppurative Arthritis, etc.

This serum has found more extended application than
any of those prepared from organisms associated with a
particular clinical picture, and the recorded cases in
•which its use has been attended with beneficial results are
now too numerous to leave much room for doubt of its
efficacy in streptococcal infections.

A point to be specially borne in mind is that all cases of
puerperal fever, spreading inflammation of the skin or ,
subcutaneous tissues, are not necessarily associated with the ,
presence of .actively growing streptococci. They may be due .
to some quite different organism, and so would not be., due to various
benefited by injections of anti-streptococcus serum. The micro-organisms
importance of ascertaining by bacteriological tests the kind
of organism at work in all such cases is thus manifest.

Other anti-bacterial sera which have been prepared at
the Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories are : —

Anti-coli Serum. — In the preparation of this, 20 strains
of Bacillus coll are used, obtained mostly from the
peritoneum in fatal peritonitis and the uterus in puerperal
fever due to B. coll.

Anti-staphylococcus Serum. — This is also a polyvalent
serum, cultures of staphylococcus albus, aureus, citreus and
hasmorrhagictis, 15 in all, and all obtained from pus, being
used in its preparation.

Anti-dysentery Serum. — Prepared by injecting killed
cultures of Shiga's, Flexner's and Kruse's bacilli, 6 strains
in all being used.

327

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

Anti-gonococcus Serum. — This is prepared from strains
obtained from urethritis and gonorrhoeal conjunctivitis,
and is described as having given good results in the acute
stage of the disease.

Anti-meningococcus Serum. — Four strains of the
diplococcus of Weichselbaum are used.

BACTERIAL VACCINES

While it seems clear that, even with the methods of
preparation which have as yet been fully tried, the anti-
bacterial sera have a certain value, it cannot be denied that
they have not, in the same degree as the antitoxic sera,
activity7" fulfilled the early hopes of their efficacy. Meanwhile, the

technique for estimating phagocytic activity introduced by
Leishman, and its application and development at the hands
of Wright and others, has given a noteworthy impetus to the
method of actively immunising the patient against the
organism attacking him, by injection of very small doses of
a killed culture of the same organism. The new method
of controlling the effect of an injection, by determination
of the " opsonic index," has not only given a stimulus to
the extensive use of vaccination with killed cultures in

The opsonic

index various chronic suppurations and localised inflammations ;

it has also, to a remarkable extent, reinstated in the
confidence of the medical world the tuberculin (T. R.)
of Koch, which had been brought into discredit by the
unfavourable results of its early application, in doses which,
as the new methods of control indicate, were much too
large for safety or benefit. While Wright's opsonic method
has undoubtedly been largely responsible for the revival of
interest in specific inoculation and the widening of its scope,
its complicated and specialised technique has probably had
a deterrent effect on the spread of the method in general
practice. At present there is a perceptible tendency to
doubt the need for the elaborate and difficult opsonic
determination, and its adequacy as a control. If this

328

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RHSKARCH LABORATORIES

movement continues in the direction of reliance on
constitutional indications or a more simple phagocytic
determination, it will undoubtedly lead to a wider use
of these so-called bacterial vaccines.

Vaccines are usually prepared by suspending in saline
solution organisms grown on nutrient agar or some such
solid medium, and killing them by heat. They are standard-
ised according to the number of micro-organisms present in
i c.c. The counting may be done by the absolute method,
i.e. direct counting of a known dilution in a Thoma-Zeiss Meth°ds of

standardisat

apparatus by a method similar to that employed in enumera-
tion of red blood corpuscles. This is a tedious process, and
it is more usual to employ Wright's or Harrison's method.
Wright's method is to mix the vaccine with fresh blood in
known proportion, make a film of the mixture, stain and
then compare the total number of red corpuscles in a large
number of fields with the number of organisms in the
same fields. If the number of red blood corpuscles per
cubic mm., the proportion by volume of blood and vaccine,
and the ratio of the counts are known, it is a matter of
simple calculation to determine the number of organisms
present per c.c. of vaccine. The objection to this method
is that many organisms may be dissolved by the bacterio-
lysins of the blood plasma. To overcome this difficulty,
Harrison washes the blood corpuscles by several centrifugal-
isations with citrated saline to remove all the blood fluids,
determines, by a Thoma-Zeiss count, the number of cells _

Counting

present in the suspension of red corpuscles in saline, and the blood
then proceeds as in Wright's method. It is of considerable cells
value to control the counts by means of the dried weight,
which, for each organism used, bears a fairly constant
ratio to the bacterial count.

Typhoid Vaccine is used only as a prophylactic, and not
at present as a curative, agent in typhoid fever. To secure
immunisation, two doses are given. The first dose consists
of o-5 c.c. of vaccine, equivalent to 500 million bacteria.
The second, given ten days later, is i c.c., equivalent to
1000 million bacteria.

329 u

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

After the first, and, to a much smaller degree, after the
second inoculation, local and constitutional symptoms may
occur. The local symptoms, present at the site of injection,
are redness, swelling, pain and tenderness.

The following vaccines have been successfully employed
therapeutically : —

Staphylococcus Vaccine, Mixed

Containing Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus, albus and citreus.

This vaccine may be employed in various staphylococcic
infections, such as pustular acne, furunculosis, carbuncle,
sycosis, blepharitis and localised abscesses.

The initial dose is usually 500 million organisms.
A second dose may be given in a week's time, or, if the
constitutional effects of the first dose have been slight
and evanescent, 1000 million organisms may be deemed
necessary. Many authorities recommend the use of much
smaller doses.

Staphylococcus Vaccine, Aureus

Containing Staphylococcus pyogenes anrcus.

This vaccine is employed in the treatment of acne and
sycosis. It should only be used when the infection has
been shown to be due to Staphylococcus aureus alone.

The dose usually employed is similar to that in the case
of Staphylococcus Vaccine, Mixed.

Gonococcus Vaccine

Containing Micrococcus gonorrhoea.

This vaccine may be used in the chronic and later stages
of gonorrhoea, in gleet and gonorrhosal prostatitis, and
also in such generalised infections as gonorrhosal arthritis.
Good results have also been obtained in the acute stages
of gonorrhoea.

The initial dose recommended by different authorities
varies considerably: in some cases only 5 million organisms,
and in other cases as many as 250 million are injected as
an initial dose. Subsequent dosage is regulated by the
constitutional effect.

330

WKLLCOMK PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

Streptococcus Vaccine, Polyvalent

Containing over 60 strains of streptococci obtained from
the following sources : erysipelas, scarlet fever, puerperal
fever, rheumatic fever, septicaemia, angina, pneumonia
and ulcerative endocarditis.

This vaccine may be used in all forms of localised or
generalised streptococcic infection, e.g. abscesses, pyaemia,
septicaemia, otitis media, endocarditis, peritonitis of
streptococcic origin, puerperal septicaemia, and erysipelas.

The dose is from 20-50 million organisms, and it may
be administered at intervals of from one to three weeks,
according to the reaction produced.
Bacillus Coli Vaccine

Containing the Bacillus coli comninnis.

This vaccine may be used in all forms of coli infection of
the bladder, ureters, kidneys and peritoneum ; in mucous
colitis, and in coli infection of the uterus and gall bladder.

The initial dose is 5-15 million organisms, which may be
repeated, or increased, according to the reaction produced,
from 2 to 10 days later.

Pneumococcus Vaccine

Containing various strains of the Diplococcns pneumonia
(Weichselbanm).

This vaccine is used in pneumococcic infections of all
kinds, pneumonia, empyema, pericarditis, endocarditis,
septicaemia, meningitis and pneumococcic infections of joints.

The usual dose is 10-50 million organisms, which may be
repeated, according to the reaction produced, every 36 or 48
hours.

Acne Vaccines

Recent research has shown that acne is primarily due to
infection by a micro-organism known as the Acne Bacillus.
In the early stage, when the eruption is papular in character,
a bacteriological examination of the comedones or "black-
heads" shows a pure acne bacillus infection. Later on,
infection by the staphylococcus occurs, giving rise to the
acne pustule.

331

Temp.

At
timeof
injec-
tion

After

9
hours

After

hours

After

18
hours

After
hours

day

3rd
day

4th
day

104

102
99

,-°

"~°\

,-*

"^0

-°-x

^0—

Temperature

lOO'O

102 6

IOa-4

,OI-8

iot'6

roo'6

,000

Swelling

2" A 3"

well
denned

3'' * 5'

," X. 8"

De-
creas-
ing

Reaction to mallein of a healthy horse immunised against

Diphtheria toxin. The horse was subsequently killed

and the absence of glanders confirmed by post-mortem

examination

Temp.

At
time of
injec-
tion

After
9

After
hours

After

hours

After
18
hours

After

hours

2nd
day

3rd
day

4th
day

105
104

J02

— O— -_

100

Temperature

99-8

,04.

104-2

,040

,C4'0

103-0

Swelling

4" X 4"
sharply
defined

In-
creas
ing

rapidly

Very
large

Reaction to mallein of a glandered horse
332

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

A vaccine is chosen for treatment, therefore, in accord-
ance with the stage and nature of the infection.
Acne Bacillus Vaccine

This is intended for the treatment of the papular form of
acne. In this form comedones are abundant, but suppu-
ration has not yet occurred. There is no febrile reaction
after the injection of this vaccine, but if the dose be
excessive, a prolonged negative phase results, in which a
fresh crop of acne papules appears. However, these
papules disappear by subsequent injections.

Acne Vaccine, Mixed

This is for use in ordinary cases of acne, usually
characterised by the presence of comedones and pustules.
A bacteriological examination of such cases shows a
mixed infection by the acne bacillus and the staphylococcus
(aureus, dibits or citreus).

DOSE. — The initial dose is 4 or 5 million acne bacilli
with or without staphylococci, according to the nature of
the case. Subsequent dosage is regulated by the local
effect. Larger doses than 10 million acne bacilli can rarely
be tolerated.

In the pustular and furuncular forms of acne without
comedones, Staphylococcus Vaccine, Mixed, is used.
Tubercle Vaccine (Human or Bovine)

An emulsion of killed tubercle bacilli of human or bovine
origin.

Treatment should commence with a dose of i c.c. of
emulsion containing O-QOOI mgm. dried tubercle bacilli,
increasing to 0-0005 rngrn-. or even more, according to the
indications of the opsonic index, or the clinical symptoms.

MALLEIN AND TUBERCULIN

Mallein is a bacterial filtrate used in the diagnosis
of glanders. It is prepared from cultures of the organism
causing glanders (Bacillus mallei) which have been grown
for about six weeks on bouillon containing glycerin, sterilised
by heat and filtered. A small quantity of some antiseptic,

333

WF.I.LCOMB PHYSIOr.OGICAT. RESEARCH LABORATORIES

such as phenol, is added as a preservative. When injected
under the skin of a normal horse, mallein produces little
or no apparent effect, but, should the horse be suffering from
glanders, a large swelling forms at the seat of injection, and
this is usually accompanied by a rise in the temperature of
the animal.

Recent investigation at these Laboratories * has shown that
many non-glandered horses, if they have been immunised
against other bacterial products, give a reaction to mallein
in some ways similar to that given by glandered animals.

The size of the swelling produced in such cases appears
to depend on the degree of immunity. Thus, in the case
of a group of horses injected with diphtheria toxin, 6 of
which were highly immune, all gave large local reactions ;
Reactions of out of 7 moderately immune, 4 gave large swellings; and

healthy and in 4 horses in which the serum had a low antitoxic value,

houses"5 only small mallein reactions were produced. The local

swelling obtained in such healthy, immune horses differs
very markedly from that given by the glandered animal in
its rapid disappearance. Similarly, when a rise of tempera-
ture is produced by mallein in a healthy horse immunised
against other bacterial products, this is smaller, attains
its maximum more rapidly, and is far less persistent than
the febrile reaction to mallein of a horse suffering from
glanders. These differences are illustrated in the charts
on page 332.

Similar results were obtained upon immune horses with
tuberculin and several other bacterial products, such as
those obtained from Streptococcus, Bacillus coli communis,
Bacillus typhosus.

Tuberculin ("Old" Tuberculin). — Tuberculin for
veterinary diagnostic use is prepared from bacillus tuber-
culosis by a method similar to that used in the production
of mallein from bacillus mallei. For the diagnosis of tuber-
culosis in cattle, the temperature reaction is of much
greater importance than the local effect of the injection.
A rise in temperature of 2-5° F. within 12 to 15 hours of

* Siidmersen and Glenny, Journal of Hygiene, 1908
334

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

injection is usually considered sufficient to warrant the
condemnation of an animal.

Ophthalmo-Tuberculin Reaction. — The reaction is
produced by purified tuberculin obtained by the alcoholic
precipitation of ordinary tuberculin. If a small quantity
of the precipitate, dissolved in water, be applied to the
surface of the conjunctiva, a marked reaction results in the
case of tuberculous individuals. Cases have been reported
where some inconvenience due to persistence of inflammation
has arisen as a consequence of the application to the
eye. Cases have also been reported in which reactions have
been obtained in non-tuberculous subjects.

Other modifications are the reaction of v. Pirquet, in
which the "old" tuberculin, applied to lightly scarified
areas of skin, produces, in a large proportion of tuberculous
subjects, inflamed papules persisting for some days, and
Moro's modification, in which an ointment containing
tuberculin is rubbed on the skin, with a similar result.

THE SERUM DIAGNOSIS OF TYPHOID FEVER

A series of investigations, made in different countries,
has brought to light the fact that the serum of an animal
rendered highly immune to the typhoid bacillus has a
marked action upon the organisms, causing them to lose
their motility, and to become collected together into little
masses, which rapidly sink to the bottom of the tube
containing the mixture of serum and culture.

Following this, the fact that the serum of patients
suffering from typhoid fever usually gives a reaction with
cultures of the typhoid bacillus, similar to, though less
marked than, that given by the serum of animals immunised Typhoid
by the bacillus, has been confirmed by a host of observers.
This affords evidence of great weight that the bacillus is
really the cause of typhoid fever, and it also affords a
valuable method of diagnosis.

In the serum of those suffering from typhoid fever, the
reaction is said to have been observed as early as the fourth

335

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

day. Usually it appears about the beginning of the second
week, but it is undoubtedly often absent at this period.
According to Courmont,* it is in cases which are excep-
tional, either on account of complications or severity, or
because they are extremely mild, that the agglutinative
power is feeble or delayed ; in simple cases of moderate
severity it appears constantly about the sixth or seventh
day, is active, in dilution of i in 100, about the tenth day,
undergoes a more or less rapid rise towards the end of the
febrile period (critical rise), and then disappears more or AgKiutiRat.;v
less rapidly. The persistence of the agglutinative power power
after recovery appears to be very variable, in some cases
rapidly disappearing, in others remaining for years. The
blood of those who are not suffering from typhoid fever,
and from whom no history of this disease can be obtained,
occasionally gives a reaction in dilution of i in 10, or even
i in 30 (the dilutions recommended by Widal). But these
instances do not appear to be sufficiently numerous to impair
seriously the value of the test. It is thought desirable,
however, to use higher dilutions, viz., i in 50.

From the considerations briefly set out above, it seems
permissible to conclude that — (i) A negative reaction is of
little value in the early days of the fever. It is of greater
importance in proportion to the lateness of the period at Conclusions
which it is observed. It can, however, never absolutely
exclude typhoid fever. (2) A positive reaction, on the
other hand, except with dilutions of less than i in 40, is
sound evidence of typhoid fever, present or past. The
latter can be excluded if several quantitative tests have
been made at different periods, and decided changes in
the agglutinative power observed.

Recently an ophthalmo-reaction in typhoid fever, produced
by a special culture nitrate and resembling the tuberculo-
ophthalmic reaction, has been described by Chautemesse,
and some promising results of a similar nature have been
obtained by the use of a typhoid endotoxin prepared at the
Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories.

* Revue de Medecine, October, 1897
337

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

ORGANO-THERAPY

The brilliant success which attended the introduction of
the treatment of myxcedema by administration of thyroid
substance, led to the investigation of the effects of other
ductless glands. In no other case has a similar success
attended similar methods; but the attention directed to these
organs has resulted in the discovery of marked physiological
actions, of great therapeutic importance, possessed by some
of them. It has been shown, by Schafer and others, that
the posterior or infundibular lobe of the pituitary gland
contains an active principle — as yet of unknown nature —
the effects of which are not less striking than those of the
more familiar active principle of the supra-renal medulla.
The effects of the pituitary extract include a pronounced
rise of blood-pressure chiefly due to arterial constriction, the
h3art-beat being somewhat slower and more powerful ;
intense and prolonged contraction of the uterus,* and
profuse secretion of urine. All these effects have already
found important therapeutic applications, the clinical value
of the extract having been demonstrated by Blair Bell.f

ORGANIC AMINES
'HEMISINE'

' Hemisine ' is a name given to the active principle
occurring in the medulla of the supra-renal gland and other
smaller masses of paragangl ionic tissue related to sympa-
thetic ganglia. Its action likewise is closely connected with
the sympathetic nervous system, intravenous injection
producing all the effects which are elicited by stimulation of
the nerve fibres of the true sympathetic system. Prominent
among these is a great rise of blood-pressure, produced by
constriction of peripheral arteries and augmentation of the
heart's activity. So active is 'Hemisine' in this direction,
that a dose of as little as o-oooooi gramme will produce a
perceptible rise of blood-pressure. Contraction of the uterus

* Dale, Bio-Chemical Journal, 1909

t Blair Bell, British Medical Journal, 1909

339

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RFSEABCH LABORATORIES

is also caused in those animals in which the sympathetic
nerve-supply to that organ is motor in function. These
effects are illustrated by tracings (see page 342).

•TYRAMINE1

' Tyramine ' is a name which has been given to the organic
base Para-hydroxyphenylethylamine (HO-<^> CH2-CH2-
NH2). It has been recognised now for some years, having

Is^1^ been first pointed out by Abelous and his associates, that

extracts of putrefied meat contain substances which, when
injected into the circulation, produce an effect on the blood-
pressure reminiscent of that produced by supra -renal
extracts. The same phenomenon was encountered by Dixon
and Taylor, who found that certain extracts of human
placenta caused a rise of blood-pressure and contraction of
the uterus, it being subsequently demonstrated by Rosen-
heim that a certain amount of putrefaction of the placenta
was necessary for the development of this activity. The
substances concerned in this action have recently been
isolated at the Wellcome Physiological Research Labora-
tories, and identified as /so-amylamine, phenylethylamine,
and ^>-hydroxyphenylethylamine.* The action of these
substances has been found to be similar in most respects
to that of the supra-renal active principle, but weaker and
more prolonged.!

Of the three, />-hydroxyphenylethylamine is much the most
active, being also the most nearly related in chemical

•Tyramine' the structure to the supra-renal principle. Its relatively weak
and prolonged action, as compared with the latter, enables
it to be absorbed from the alimentary canal or the sub-
cutaneous tissues, so that its general constitutional effects,
rise of blood-pressure, increased vigour of the heart's action,
and contraction of the uterus, can be produced by
administering it by the mouth or hypodermically. The
study of this substance has recently gained greatly in interest
by the discovery that it is present in watery extracts of

* Barger and Walpole./ounia/ of Physiology, xxxviii,
t Dale and Dixon, Journal of Physiology, xxxix, p. 25,

p. 344, 1909-
1909.

340

WELLCOMB PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH I.ABORATORIKS

ergot, and is chiefly responsible for the well-known effects
of such extracts on the blood-pressure and the uterus.*

Several methods of preparing this base synthetically have
been worked out at the Wellcome Physiological Research
Laboratories f and it will probably find wide therapeutic use.

Another amine derived from an amino-acid by splitting off
carbon dioxide is ft-iminazolylethylamine, which can be
obtained from histidine by the action of certain putrefactive
bacteria (Ackermann) or by chemical agents,

This base has an action of quite a different type, being a
very potent stimulant of plain muscle, conspicuously of
uterine muscle, irrespective of innervation. In carnivora,
however, it causes a large fall of systemic pressure by
arterial dilatation, its action in this and other respects being
markedly similar to that of various depressor organ extracts
of certain commercial preparations of " peptone " (Dale and
Laidlow). Barger and Dale identified as this base the
constituent of ergot extracts chiefly concerned in the
very powerful action on the isolated uterus described by
Kebrer.

ERGOTOXINE AND 'ERNUTIN'

Many substances which have in the past been described
as active principles of ergot, and which undoubtedly showed
physiological activity, have not possessed the characteristics
of pure chemical substances. Such were the sphacelinic
acid and cornutin of Robert, and the chrysotoxin, secalin- Active
toxin, and sphacelotoxin of Jacobj. On the other hand, principles
the alkaloid which Tanret isolated in an undoubtedly pure
and crystalline form, and named "ergotinine," was found by
several observers to possess practically no pharmacological The
action, although there was some clinical evidence of its g^^me
activity. Recent work in the Wellcome Physiological
Research Laboratories J has cleared up this anomaly by

* Barger and Dale, Journal of Physiology, 1909, xxxviii, p. 77 [Proc.
Phys. Soc.]

t Barger, Journal of the Chemical Society, xcv, p. 1123, 1909.

iDale,/OM>-n. of Physio! . xxxiv, p. 163, 1906; Barger and Carr,/o«r«.
Chem. Soc., xci, p. 337, 1907; Barger and Dale, Bio-Chem. Journ. "•
p. 240, 1907.

341

a s

^_, oe

?-§.

WELLCOME 1'HYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

demonstrating the presence in ergot of the alkaloid
ergotoxine, which is closely related chemically to ergotinine,
being a hydrate of the latter and easily produced from it,
but differing from it in being intensely active physiologically.
Subsequent investigations have shown that ergotoxine
has acid as well as basic properties. Unlike ergotinine,
therefore, it is soluble in dilute alkali, and also forms
organic esters, of which the ethyl- and methyl-esters have
been prepared.

These facts throw further light on the occurrence

Its crystalline

of ergotoxine as the true active constituent ot various saits
preparations both of basic and acidic nature which
have, from time to time, been described as "active
principles" of ergot. Ergotoxine, though itself amorphous,
forms crystalline salts, and has accordingly been prepared
in a chemically pure condition. Its physiological action is
characteristic, consisting of a stimulant action on plain
muscular organs, and in particular on the arteries and
the uterus. When a large dose is given, a secondary
paralytic effect on the motor functions of the true sympathetic
nervous system is produced. As a result, the injection of
'Hemisine,' or stimuli applied to the sympathetic nerves
concerned, now cause a fall of blood-pressure and relaxation
of the uterus in place of the previous rise of pressure and
contraction. This secondary action affords a convenient
means of recognising the presence of the active alkaloid,
and estimating the quantity present in any specimen or
preparation of ergot. This physiological method of assay ph . . .
is the more valuable in that no satisfactory chemical method assay of ergot
is yet available for estimating ergotoxine. preparations

While ergotoxine is the only active principle identified as
specific and peculiar to ergot, it does not account for the
whole of the activity of all ergot preparations. It was
pointed out by Barger and Dale, in 1907, that certain
extracts of ergot, and in particular the official watery
preparations, possess a pharmacological activity too great
to be attributed to the traces of ergotoxine which they
contain.

WELLCOMB PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

Two distinct types of activity, neither due to ergotoxine,
can be recognised in such extracts, i.e. (i) a pressor effect
due to a principle which, in general features of its action,
resembles the supra-renal active principle ; this has been
shown to be due chiefly to the presence of ^>-hydroxyphenyl-
ethylamine ; and (2) an intense stimulating action on the
plain muscle of the uterus, independent of its reaction to
nerve impulses ; this has been traced to the presence of
£}-iminazolylethylamine (Barger and Dale). It is quite in
accord with what might be expected on theoretical grounds,
that the ferments of a fungus like ergot should, equally ,

' ' Ferments and

with putrefactive bacteria, have the power of producing putrefactive
these bases from the amino-acids, derived, in this bactena
instance, from the proteins of the rye-grain. The presence
of varying amounts of ^-hydroxyphenylethylamine, together
with small amounts of ergotoxine, accounts for the whole of
that action of ergot extracts on the blood-pressure, which
has been widely recommended as a basis of standardisation.
' Ernutin ' is a fluid preparation which contains
these active principles of ergot in a definite and uniform
proportion, unmixed with depressant and harmful
impurities.

PHYSIOLOGICAL STANDARDISATION
No insistence is needed on the desirability of a uniform
standard of activity in all drugs, and especially in such
as contain principles of a highly active and toxic nature. Necessity for

r u u 11 J t_ Physiological

In the case of some, such as cinchona or belladonna, such methods
a standardisation is easily carried out by chemical means.
There are, however, other drugs in which the active
principles are of such a nature that attempts at chemical
estimation are only misleading, even though the active
principles are recognised and something known of their
chemical nature. Typical instances of such drugs are
those of the group including digitalis, strophanthus and
squill. In the case of digitalis, research in these Laboratories*
has shown the futility of the chemical methods suggested
and the adequacy of an estimation based on the effect of

* Barger and Shaw, y car-Book of Pharmacy, 1904

345 v

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

the drug on the frog's heart. The conclusions reached
apply, with little modification, to strophanthus and squill,
and preparations of all these drugs are now standardised by
this method in these Laboratories.

Cannabis indica is a notoriously variable drug, but, by
observing the nervous symptoms produced by a given dose
in a dog or cat, a fair estimate of the activity of any
specimen can be made.

Ergot is another drug in which the amount of the active
principles varies to a very marked degree. The isolation of
ergotoxine and the other active principles, and the demon-
stration of the presence of p-hydroxyphenylethylamine in
ergot extracts, may eventually lead to the development of a
satisfactory chemical method of determining its activity.
Hitherto, however, physiological methods, based on the
action of ergotoxine and of the amines described above,
have proved a far surer guide than any chemical assay.

The purity of a specimen of ' Hemisine ' can be much
more satisfactorily determined by comparison of its activity
to that of a standard specimen than by chemical tests.
The method illustrated, in which the amount of a given
specimen is determined, which produces a rise of blood-
pressure equal to that given by a given dose of a specially-
prepared pure standard sample, is found in these Laboratories
to be workable to an accuracy of about 5 per cent., and is
used in standardising all supra-renal preparations.

Kymograph tracings are reproduced on pages 352 and 354.
They represent the results of pharmacological research and
some methods of physiological standardisation in use at the
Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories.

DESCRIPTION OF TRACINGS

(i) ' Hemisine.' The lines of tracing, from above down-
wards, are : —

I. Plethysmographic tracing of heart volume.
II. Manometer-record of blood-pressure from the

carotid artery.
III. Signal line, showing time of injection.

346

WKLLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

At H, croooi gm. of ' Hemisine ' was injected into the
jugular vein, causing a large rise of blood-pressure, and
quickening and strengthening the heart-beat.

(2) ' Hemisine' —

(a) Effect of ' Hemisine ' on the blood-pressure of a
decerebrate cat : —

Lines of tracing —

(1) Blood-pressure.

(2) Signal line marking the point of injection.

(3) Time-clock marking every 10 seconds.

(6) Method of standardising ' Hemisine ' and other supra-
renal gland preparations. Varying doses of the solu-
tion to be tested are interposed between injections of
0-00002 gm. of the standard specimen of ' Hemisine.'
Effects of standard doses are indicated by a X.
Between the injections the recording drum is moved
back so as to produce partial superposition and
facilitate comparison.

(c) Effect of ' Hemisine ' on the isolated heart of a
rabbit, perfused through the coronary circulation
with oxygenated Ringer's solution (Locke's method).
At X 0*00005 gm- °f ' Hemisine ' was added to the
perfusion fluid.

(3) Effect of ' Hemisine ' and ' Ernutin ' on the blood-

pressure —

(a) Effect on the blood-pressure of intravenous injection
of

(A) 0-00005 gm. of ' Hemisine.'

(B) 2 c.c. ' Ernutin.'

Showing the rise of blood-pressure and the subsequent
reversal of the effect of ' Hemisine,' due to ergotoxine
in the ' Ernutin.'

347

o .a

</) 5 .2 .8

0 E

w >^

<*. ^j

*_, CD

S -S

348

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

DESCRIPTION OF THE WELLCOME
PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

The original laboratories, established in 1894, were
enlarged from time to time to meet the requirements The new

laboratories

of constantly increasing work, until it was found
necessary to acquire more commodious premises. The new
laboratories were established at Brockwell Hall, Herne
Hill, London (Eng.), in the early part of 1899.

Brockwell Hall is an old-fashioned country mansion,
standing in its own grounds. The adaptation of these
premises to the requirements of research work has been
carried out with the greatest care, and no pains or expense
have been spared in rendering their appointments as
complete as possible, so that the Institution's highly-
qualified staff of research workers have full scope for their
energy.

The room shown in the illustration on page 336, is the
principal Bacteriological Laboratory. In this laboratory
research is carried on in bacteriology and serum-thera- Bacterio-
peutics, injections are made for the standardisation of sera chemica"
prepared in the establishment, and the elaborate series of Laboratories
sterility tests is made to which all sera are submitted before
issue. On the other side of the entrance-hall is the principal
Chemical Laboratory (see page 338), devoted to research on
the nature of naturally occurring substances of biological
importance, and the synthesis of new compounds likely to
be pharmacologically and therapeutically interesting.

A small Chemical Laboratory, the Secretary's office, a
dark-room for photographic work, and the Library, are
also on the ground floor. The Library is well supplied
with standard works of reference, both chemical and
physiological, and the current scientific literature of both
these subjects, as well as that of bacteriology, is well
represented.

The spacious cellarage contains, in addition to compart-
ments for storage of various materials, a cold chamber,

349

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

9 ft. x 7 ft. in floor area, kept constantly below freezing-
point by means of an ammonia freezing installation, and
also an incubating room.

The Physiological Laboratories are situated on the first
floor of the building. In these rooms physiological and Physiological
pharmacological research, and the physiological testing Laboratories
and standardising of various drugs and chemicals are
carried on.

On the same floor are : —

(1) The Directors' Office.

(2) Serum office. A small room at the head of the
staircase where all the records of procedures connected
with serum production are preserved in perfect order for
daily work and reference.

(3) Serum Concentration Laboratories. A room
paved with cement is fitted with special glass benches for
the manipulation of serum. It can be flushed all over
with water to free the air from dust, and, with the door
closed, can be sterilised with formalin. This and the
adjoining laboratory are used for the processes involved in
the artificial concentration of antitoxin. A special chemical
laboratory is devoted to research in connection with
these processes.

(4) Vaccine Laboratory. A room devoted to the
preparation and standardisation of bacterial vaccines.

(5) Serum testing room. A room set apart for making
dilutions of diphtheria antitoxic serum and preparation
of injections of mixed diphtheria toxin and serum used in
standardising the latter for issue from the laboratories
(to Burroughs Wellcome & Co.). The standard apparatus
employed is never moved from this room nor used for
any other purpose.

Two special laboratories are devoted to the preparation
of media : one, a small pent-house, occupied entirely in Nutrient
the production of test-tube media for use in the media
bacteriological laboratory ; the other, a commodious
well-lit outbuilding communicating with the boiler-house,
having a floor paved with cement, and the walls enamelled

351

ONE ov THE INCUBATING CHAMBERS

Co i. D STORAGE CHAMBER

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RKSF.ARCH LABORATORIES

in order to facilitate cleaning. Here is made nutrient
broth of various kinds on a large scale, to be used in the
preparation of the various cultures and toxins for use in
the stables. This laboratory is also used for the initial
work upon crude animal material before it is sent to the
chemical laboratory for further elaboration. Between this
room and the boiler-house are two compartments, one for
stores, the other to accommodate the large high-pressure
steriliser which can deal with bottles, containers, etc., of
large size.

The serum, after being obtained in the collection-labora-
tory adjacent to the stables, is taken to a special building
recently erected, where all further processes involved in
separating it and measuring it into phials are now carried
out. The building contains a cleaning-room for all apparatus
used in the manipulations ; a sterilising-room, for the heat- Germ-proof
sterilisation of the same ; and a phial-room, where the phials,
in which the sera and vaccines are issued, are cleaned and
prepared for sterilisation, and subjected to scrutiny after
filling. The rest of this building is completely closed from
the outside air, and ventilated by an ample current supplied
by a large motor fan, placed outside in a special building.
The air is passed through a germ-proof filter before it
enters the main building ; the rooms are constructed with-
out angles or corners, and can be sterilised nightly
with formaldehyde vapour, which the sterile, fan-driven
air removes again in a few minutes. This sterile section
includes : —

(1) A store-room in which the sera and vaccines are
kept, ready to be run into the issuing-phials.

(2) Duplicate rooms in which the process of separating
the serum from the clot is carried out. One of these
rooms is always being sterilised while the other is in use.
These rooms open out of the serum store, and can only be
approached through it. A small chamber, in which
the serum is mechanically driven through germ-proof
niters into the storage bottles, also opens out of the store-
room.

353

ONK OF THE ROOMS IN WHICH PHIALS ARE FILLED

SPECIAL LABORATORY FOR THE COLLECTION OF BLOOD
AND SEPARATION OF SERA

354

WELLCOME PHYSIOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

(3) A room in which the serum is filled into phials. This is
approached from the phial-preparing room by means of a
double air-lock. Before entering the room the assistants
must assume sterilised overalls, caps and goloshes, and
sterilise the hands. Into this room the serum passes by tubes
from the store-room, and each phial, as soon as filled, is
passed under a glass screen to another assistant, who
immediately seals the neck at the blow-pipe.

All packing of serum is done in an adjacent, separate
building, built for the purpose, and self-contained in every Packing
way, which also provides amply for the storage of the
materials used.

Between the main building and the animal houses a brick
building of one storey has been erected. The one room on
the ground level is specially fitted for bacteriological work, other
The floor is cemented, the walls tiled to a height of four Laboratories
feet, and all corners avoided by a rounding of angles. In
this room manipulations are carried out connected with
stock cultures, special research work, and the preparation
of various vaccines. The cellarage, surrounded by a drained
area, is divided into two rooms. The larger, 12 ft. square,
is kept at a constant temperature, ranging from 35°-40°
at different levels in the room. This is used for incubation
on a large scale. Alongside it is a smaller room, in which
a still atmosphere affords especially suitable conditions for
bacteriological operations. Recently another building,
containing three laboratories, and two rooms for keeping
rodents, has been erected at a distance from the other
buildings, for the purpose of special bacteriological research.

THE STABLES AND OTHER ADJUNCTS

The stables are situated about one hundred yards from
the laboratories. They are lofty, well lighted and well
ventilated, and are fitted with every convenience and
contrivance conducive to the well-being of the horses. The
walls are of white glazed brick and cement, the floor being
paved throughout with the best stable bricks.

The old stables and coach-houses of the Hall have been
remodelled in accord with modern views, and are now used

355

WELLCOME PHYSrOLOGICAL RESEARCH LABORATORIES

for the testing of new horses with mallein and tuberculin

before they are admitted to one of the large stables. Near collection of

by is a special laboratory for the collection of blood and sera

separation of sera. This laboratory, like the stables, has

been so built as to permit of the whole room being flushed

with water, so that sera can be manipulated under the

conditions necessary for ensuring sterility.

An entirely new system of drainage for the laboratories,
stables and other premises has been carefully carried out.

The laboratories, stables, outbuildings and grounds are
electrically-lit, and are all in telephonic communication.
The boiler, engine and dynamo necessary for the genera- Eli:c*!;lc-

installation

tion of the current used in the various motors on the
premises are placed in brick and cement buildings adjoining
the south-west side of the Hall. Near the boiler is a large
cylindrical steriliser, constructed for a working pressure
of 30 Ib. The sterilisation of all large vessels containing
nutritive media, etc., is effected here, as also of all vessels
which have been used in the laboratories.

The grounds contain a large paddock, and also gardens
for growing vegetables for the animals. A large store ^^^
for fodder, with electrically-driven chaff-cutter, has recently
been erected.

THE ANIMAL HOUSES

A large animal house has been erected, which accommo-
dates all the rodents required for the work of the laboratories.
It contains full provision for the efficient isolation of animals Efjcient
inoculated with living cultures. The heating and ventilation
of this building have been very carefully carried out, with a
view to the health and comfort of the animals.

Another range of sheds contains well-drained, comfortable
kennels for dogs, a stable for goats, and a steam-heated
apartment for cats, communicating with a large open-air
cage.

357

WEAPONS OF PRECISION

PRODUCED BY
SCIENCE AND INDUSTRY

359

360

THE WORK OF
BURROUGHS WELLCOME & CO.

From the time of the founding of the firm, scientific
advance has been steady and continuous. The keynote of Keynote of
this success lies in the firm's own original work, conducted success
under the most favourable conditions, as well as their
ready recognition of all forward movements in scientific
research, and adaptation of the results to the methods
of modern production.

"The rule of thumb is dead and the rule of science has taken its place"

" Science and Industry" has been the guiding motto of
B. W. & Co. from the first. They have aimed at attaining
and maintaining the highest possible degree of excel- " Science ar
lence in the products they issue. By keeping abreast of Industry"
research work, and by promptly adopting the most scientific
modern methods, they have not only kept pace with the
latest developments in medicine and pharmacy, but have
been pioneers in the introduction of some of the most
notable agents employed in modern medicine, and have
contributed largely to the great advances of the times.

Patient and persistent research* by a staff of chemical,
pharmaceutical and physiological experts has yielded fruitful
results. Not only has the firm satisfied the highest require- Results of
ments of physicians by the purity, reliability and scientific
scientific precision of the products, but it has met the
needs of conscientious pharmacists who pride themselves
on the supreme quality of everything they dispense.

To supply medicaments characterised by purity, accuracy,
uniformity and reliability has been the firm's policy from

* Research pioneered by Burroughs Wellcome & Co. many years ago is
still continued in their works by a highly-qualified staff. The Wellcome
Chemical Research Laboratories, King Street, London (Eng.), and the
Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories, Brockwell Hall, Herne
Hill, London (Eng.), are Institutions conducted separately and distinctly
from the business of Burroughs Wellcome & Co., and are under separate
and distinct direction, although in these two Institutions a large amount
of important scientific work is carried out for the firm.

361

PORTION OF FRONTAGE

BURROUGHS WELLCOME & C o.'s CHIEF OFFICES, LONDON

Corner of Holborn Viaduct and Snow Hill

facing Holborn Viaduct Station

THE WORK OF BURROUGHS WELLCOME & CO.

its earliest days. This has been achieved by devising

new appliances, by employing only the most scientfic

methods, and by conducting the various stages of manu- .. •weaonsof

facture under the direct supervision and control of Precision"

specially - trained and qualified pharmacists and other

experts. High appreciation has been accorded by

physicians and pharmacists throughout the world to

the "WEAPONS OF PRECISION" created by the firm.

Untiring, strenuous endeavour and vast expenditure have

been required to attain these successful results.

WORKING IMPERIALLY

Mr. Joseph Chamberlain has taught the nation to
think Imperially — Burroughs Wellcome & Co. work
Imperially. It has been the special ambition of this firm
to win back to England by actual merit some of the lost Bringing back
industries snatched away from the country in recent years to England
by alert, enterprising rivals of other lands, who wisely
and well apply science to their industries, and slumber not.
B. W.& Co., never content with the time-honoured "rule
of thumb " methods, have in a considerable measure
gratified their ambition. Particularly in the production of
Fine Medicinal Chemicals including the powerful alkaloids,
glucosides and other active principles now so largely
replacing the use of bulky and nauseous crude natural
drugs, thus securing greater certainty and uniformity of
potency.

In this work it has been the aim not only to equal but
to surpass foreign production, and the results speak
for themselves.

PIONEERS IN NEW DRUGS

The firm has pioneered the introduction of many new
and valuable natural drugs, notable amongst which
may be mentioned Strophanthus, or Kombe, the powerful
African arrow poison which has proved so efficacious in
certain heart disorders. Science and enterprise have in this
instance

"Turned a deadly enemy into a valued friend"

363

United States of America:
BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co. 's

Offices and Exhibition Rooms

35, 37 & 39, West Thirty-third Street (near Fifth Avenue)
NEW YORK CITY

THE WORK OF BURROUGHS WELLCOME & CO.

Sir THOMAS ERASER, of the Edinburgh University, Pioneers in the
first investigated and demonstrated the properties of Kombe 'strophanthus
from a comparatively small specimen, and B. W. & Co.
immediately took vigorous steps to procure supplies
of the drug regardless of expense and immense difficulties.

Emissaries were sent to collect the small reserves of
arrow poison from the rude huts of many Central £20 per pound
African warriors. In this way a fair quantity was
accumulated, but at a cost of more than £20 per pound.

Thus, the true Strophanthus Kombe was first introduced
to England and to the world — B. W. & Co. were first in
the field.

A bundle of the first consignment of Strophanthus which reached
Europe for Burroughs Wellcome & Co.

These earliest supplies were obtained quite regardless of
monetary considerations, and, notwithstanding the great
cost, parcels of the drug and its preparations were at
once distributed, without charge, to leading physicians
throughout the world. By this means the therapeutic
properties of Strophanthus were confirmed by investigators
in various lands.

For more than a year this was the only supply of
Strophanthus outside the "Dark Continent," and then Productsof
B. W. & Co. again secured all that was obtainable, and
were the only suppliers for many months. Stro-
phanthus is now one of the approved remedies of the
Pharmacopoeias. In less than two years the firm was
treating several hundred-weights of Strophanthus seeds at
a time, thus securing perfect uniformity in the activity

365

B. W. & Co.
secure pre-
cision ot dose

fiiiiiiiiiiiiilii

i „ ' _

^^^^^» *• -j . . .

_JM|

t ^1 • . ' I I > *^rfl^B>3it.M(M flM

^ I T^lrf

BURROUGHS WELLCOME * Co.
26, Via Legnano, MILAN

THE WORK OF BURROUGHS WELLCOME & CO.

of the products, and enabling the dosage and action to be
controlled with precision.

Arrow-head poisoned with strophanthus

Amongst those who were interested in the introduction
of strophanthus were Sir JOHN KIRK (then of Zanzibar), and
Dr. DAVID LIVINGSTONE, who referred to its employment by
natives as an arrow poison, in his narrative of his expedition
to the Zambesi. It was the intimate association which
BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co. have always had with the
pioneers of African exploration which enabled them to be
first in placing supplies of the drug at the disposal of the
medical profession.

Plumed seed of Strophanthus Kombe

STROPHANTHUS KOMBE, the source of the drug, is a
woody climber growing freely in many parts of Eastern The source
Africa. From the seeds the natives prepare a paste
with which they poison their arrows.

367

Australia:

BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co.

481. Kent Street, SYDNEY, N.S.W.

368

THE WORK OF BURROUGHS WELLCOME & CO.

The seeds are contained in follicles, and each bears a
beautiful plume-like appendage springing from a delicate
stalk. Each seed weighs about half a grain.

PIONEERS IN PHARMACOLOGICAL WORK ON ANIMAL
SUBSTANCES

When renewed attention was drawn to the therapeutic
action of certain animal substances, this firm pioneered the
pharmacological work on the various glands, having already
been long engaged upon researches on brain matter and other
substances of animal origin, they were first to produce a
stable and reliable product of the thyroid gland, and this
remains the standard and accepted preparation amongst the
medical profession throughout the world.

Although the principle suggesting and guiding this
modern departure in therapeutics is the outcome of recent
physiological research, the belief in the use of organs or
tissues for the relief of human suffering, or for the
production of certain physical conditions, is known to have
existed from the earliest times.

The belief in the utility and value of animal glands
and tissues in the cure of disease is not altogether the
outcome of modern research, for we learn from Herodotus,
fifth century B.C., that in his day, the people called Budini
or Geloni "used the testicles of otters, beavers and other
square-faced animals for diseases of the womb." From
prehistoric times savage peoples have eaten the hearts of
lions, tigers and other courageous animals, and even of
human enemies, with the object of acquiring added
valour in battle.

Among old-world medicines, compounds of the organs The use of
and tissues and excreta of mammals, birds, fishes and animal
insects occupied permanent positions of prominence. s
They were included in the London Pharmacopoeia issued
by the Royal College of Physicians in 1676, and in
Salomon's New London Dispensatory of 1684. The
present increasing use of animal substances may be
largely traced to the researches and enthusiastic advocacy

369

South Africa:

BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co,
5, Loop Street, CAPE TOWN

370

THE WORK OF BURROUGHS WELLCOME & CO.

of Brown-Sequard, though it must be admitted that such
advocacy was exaggerated, and perhaps lacked dignity
and reserve. In spite of his attitude, which experience
has not justified, he, in some considerable measure,
succeeded in establishing his contention that all glands,
with or without excretory ducts, give to the blood, by
internal secretion, principles always important and in most
cases essential, to the general well-being of the body.

Organo-therapy, animal medication, and glandular thera-
peutics are among the terms now applied to the admini-
stration of organs or tissues or of the internal secretions Modern
of glands, in certain diseases, induced, or believed knowled£e
to be induced, by the degeneration, disease, defective
development, or removal of the corresponding organs,
tissues, or glands. Many diseases, arising from defective
functions of particular organs, are now treated with
these animal substances, and the principle has been
established that the lessened or lost power of an organ
may, in some cases, be restored by the administration of
corresponding organs taken from healthy lower animals.

The work of Burroughs Wellcome & Co. on these
animal substances has been directed not to the therapeutic
but to the chemical and pharmacological side, and the
production of active and staple products for the use of the
medical profession, and in this they have attained marked
success.

Amongst other animal products dealt with was the supra-
renal gland, which yielded first to Abel and Crawford a
powerful and highly valuable active principle under the title
Epinephrine. Other workers produced modified products,
but the active principle was first produced in a dry, soluble,
active form in the Wellcome Physiological Research
Laboratories, and is now issued by the firm under the
title ' Hemisine.'

A NEW BLOOD-PRESSURE RAISING PRINCIPLE

More recent researches have led to the discovery at the
B. W. & Co. Works Laboratories of a synthetic substance,
' Epinine,' possessing the valuable properties of the natural

371

THE WORK OF BURROUGHS WELLCOME & CO.

active principle of the supra-renal gland and, in addition,
showing certain marked advantages in use. Being a synthetic
base which combines to form crystallisable salts, ' Epinine'
can be readily purified, and the rise of blood-pressure pro-
duced by it is equal in degree and more prolonged than
that due to the supra-renal active principle.
GOOD OR EVIL

Ergot, "the blessed and cursed blight of rye," which has
wrought much good and much evil, is now greatly valued
as a remedy, yet it destroyed countless lives during the
grain plagues, called St. Anthony's fire, in the middle
ages.

Ergot of rye has been one of the problems that has
long baffled scientific workers. It was investigated in these
same laboratories, and the true representative active
principle was discovered, and is now issued as a
standardised product, ' Ernutin,' of great power and
uniform activity of immense importance to the medical
profession.

THERAPEUTIC SERA

The Wellcome Physiological Research Laboratories were
pioneers in the production of Anti-Diphtheritic Serum
in the British Empire, and also supplied the first used in
America. During the early days, and until the real value
was conclusively demonstrated, all offers to purchase
supplies of the serum were refused, but all that could be
produced was freely placed without charge at the disposal
of the principal clinics, hospitals and private medical men
who had diphtheritic cases under treatment. These trials
proved successful, and the ' Wellcome ' brand of serum
supplied by B. W. & Co. has continued to hold first place
throughout the Empire. These laboratories have done a
vast amount of original work in the whole range of
therapeutic sera — and in vaccines, etc., and in many other
organic bodies of importance in medicine.

Though these Physiological Research Laboratories are
conducted under separate and distinct direction, and many

THE WORK OP BUK ROUGHS WELLCOME & CO.

of the researches are solely of scientific interest as contri-
butions to human knowledge, yet much work of practical
value is carried out for the firm, the Principal of which
founded the laboratories.

FINE CHEMICALS

The Wellcome Chemical Research Laboratories have
worked in the same manner with benefit to science and to
the firm, devising new chemical processes and producing
new chemical agents, both organic and inorganic. The
investigations of vegetable drugs and their representative
principles have yielded highly important results, both in the
discovery of new principles and in raising the standard Raising the
of purity and potency of valuable well-known substances,
notably Pilocarpine, Aconitine, etc., etc. The co-operation
of these two research laboratories, with their efficient
scientific staffs working under the guidance of the two
highly-qualified Directors, distinguished for thoroughness
and accuracy, is of immense importance to the firm.

But the research work does not rest here. There is also
in the experimental and analytical laboratories at the firm's
works, a highly-skilled staff constantly engaged in research
for the discovery of new active chemical and pharmaceutical
substances, and for the improvement of those already known.

Amongst the notable discoveries are 'SoAMiN,' the new
substance which has proved so successful in the treatment
of Syphilis, and of the dread Sleeping Sickness so prevalent
among the population of the Congo, Uganda and ether
parts of Central Africa; also 'NiziN,' the new antiseptic,
powerful, but free from many of the dangers of other
antiseptics.

A large number of other important developments in
chemistry and pharmacy have been made in the works
laboratories, including the production of Chloroform of a
standard that secures greatly increased uniformity and
safety, and the confidence of the medical profession.

In the manufacturing departments every operation is
studied with the view to new discoveries and improvements,
and aiming to make daily progress.

373

THE WORK OF BURROUGHS WELLCOME & CO.

EQUIPMENTS

Completely fitted cases have been devised to meet the
requirements of up-to-date medical men and others
engaged in medical and sanitary science ; for example,
hypodermic, ophthalmic cases, urine testing, water analysis,
bacteriological testing cases, etc.

Medicine and first-aid chests, cases, belts, etc., for
military and naval purposes, for explorers, missionaries,
travelling journalists, war correspondents, aeronauts,
aviators, motorists, yachtsmen, planters; in fact, equipments
for the air, for the earth, for the depths, and for every
clime under every condition.

HISTORY OF COMPRESSED DRUGS

Burroughs Wellcome & Co. are successors " the

sole proprietors of, the business of BROCKEVKJ.N, who,

Origin of r '

compressed in 1842, originated compressed medicines in the shape of

products bi-convex discs — issued under the designation of "com-

pressed pills." The production of compressed sub-
stances has been developed and carried to a high state
of perfection by B. W. & Co. This has been accomplished
by research and the use of chemicals of exceptional
BW&COS quality, and by the employment of specially-devised
work in machinery of rare accuracy. This exclusive machinery,

perfecting invented by the firm, and produced at great cost, operates

with the precision of the finest watch-work. By its aid
the firm's specially- trained expert chemists are enabled
to prepare compressed products for issue under the
' Tabloid,' ' Soloid ' and other brands, of unique accuracy of
dosage and of a perfection of finish never before attained.
These products present medicines, etc., of so varied a
character as to represent a range of dosage of i/iooo of
a grain to 60 grains or more.

world-wide The qualities of purity, accuracy, activity and stability

appreciation which characterise ' Tabloid ' and ' Soloid ' products have

secured unusual appreciation and approval from medical

and pharmaceutical experts, and these preparations are

,a ft- a v
I I £~

2»s ."?

THE WORK OF BURROUGHS WELLCOME & CO.

prescribed in private practice and in military and civil
hospitals in all parts of the world.

MEDICAL AND FIRST-AID EQUIPMENTS

Burroughs Wellcome & Co. have, from the time of the
founding of the business, made a special feature of studying
medical and surgical requirements for expeditions to tropic
and arctic and other trying climates, especially for the use of
explorers, journalists and other travellers ; for armies in
camp, on the march, and in the battlefield.

Careful and prolonged enquiry and practical experi-
mentation have enabled them to so perfect their equip-
ments for these purposes that almost every military
expedition and journalistic pioneering tour of recent
years has been fitted out by the firm.

B. W. & Co.'s GENERAL OFFICES

The firm's chief offices and administrative premises are
centrally situated in the City of London, facing Holborn
Viaduct Station, and at the junction of Holborn Viaduct
and Snow Hill. They are thus within a stone's throw
of such historic sights as St. Paul's Cathedral, the
Old Bailey (Central Criminal Courts), the Charterhouse,
St. Bartholomew's, and Smithfield.

' WELLCOME ' CHEMICAL WORKS

The ' Wellcome ' Chemical Works (illustrated on page
360), which form the principal manufacturing premises of
the firm, are situated at Dartford, Kent, near London. On Works
one side, the Works have direct water communication
with London and the Docks of the Waterway of the
Thames ; on the other side they front on to the railway
and so are in touch with the metropolis and the Continent.

SEVEN B. W. & Co. ESTABLISHMENTS ABROAD
Burroughs Wellcome & Co. have fully-equipped establish-
ments at New York, Montreal, Sydney, Cape Town, Milan,
Shanghai and Buenos Aires. Photographs of the New York,
Milan, Sydney and Cape Town Houses appear on pages
364, 366, 368 and 370.

375

TYPICAL AWARDS

AT INTERNATIONAL EXHIBITIONS

CONFERRED UPON BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co.

FOR THE SCIENTIFIC EXCELLENCE

OF THE FIRM'S PRODUCTS

ST. Louis
1904

THREE GRAND PRIZES

THREE GOLD MEDALS

LIEGE

1905

SIX GRAND PRIZES
THREE DIPLOMAS OF HONOUR
THREE GOLD MEDALS

MILAN
1906

THREE GRAND PRIZES

THREE DIPLOMAS OF HONOUR
ONE GOLD MEDAL

LONDON

(Franco-British)
1908

SEVEN GRAND PRIZES

ONE DIPLOMA OF HONOUR
TWO GOLD MEDALS

LONDON

(Japan-British)
1910

FIVE GRAND PRIZES

ONE GOLD MEDAL

BRUSSELS
1910

BUENOS
AIRES
1910

ONE GRAND PRIZE

MAKING IN ALL

MORE THAN 24O HIGHEST AWARDS

376

TABLOID' BRAND FIRST-AID

Automobilists, Aviators, Yachtsmen, Sportsmen Travellers,
Tourists, Boy Scouts, and residents in out-of-the-way districts.

Compact outfit's of bandages and first-aid accessories, etc., suitable
for use in emergencies, when travelling, or at home, especially where
medical aid is not immediately available.

No. 702. 'TABLOID' FIRST-AID

Contains ' Tabloid ' Bandages and Dressings, ' Vaporole ' Aromatic
Ammonia, for use as "Smelling Salts," ' Borofax,' ' Hazeline ' Cream,
sal volatile, Carron oil (solidified), tourniquet, jaconet, plaster, protective
skin, scissors, pins, etc., and ei^ht tubes of 'Tabloid' and ' Soloid '
Brand products.

In Rex Red, Royal
Blue or Brewster Green
Enamelled Leather.

Measurements: 7 X 5 J X 2Jin.

No. 715. 'TABLOID' FIRST-AID

Contains ' Tabloid ' Bandages and Dressings, ' Vaporole ' Aromatic
Ammonia, for use as " Smelling Salts," ' Borofax,' sal volatile, Carron oil

(solidified), jaconet ,
plaster, protective skin,
scissors, pins, etc., and
eight tubes of ' Tabloid '
and 'Soloid' Brand
oducts.

In Rex Red, Ro\ al
Blue (as illustrated}
or Brewster
Green Enam-
elled Metal, or
in Aluminised
or Black Jap-
anned Metal.
Price

London,
10/6

st-Aid

No. 708. 'TABLOID' FIRST-AID

( For N urses)

Contains ' Tabloid '
Bandages and Dress-
in Us, ' Vaporole '
Aromatic Ammonia,
foruse as " Smelling
Salts," 'Borofax,'
Carronoil(solidified>
jaconet, plaster,
protective skin,
camel-hair brush
and safety pins : also
a supply of ' Tabloid'
Ammonium Carbon-
ate for use in place
of sal volatile and

a tube of ' Soloid '

Antiseptic products.
In Rex Red, Royal Blue or Brewster Green Enamelled Metal
(as illustrated), or in Aluminised Metal.

Price in London, 50
Belt or Cycle attachment, 6d. extra

No. 709. 'TABLOID' FIRST-AID

(For Boy Scouts)

Contains 'Tabloid'
Bandages and Dress-
in^s, 'Vaporole'
Aromatic Ammonia,
foruse as "Smelling
Salts," ' Borofax,'
Carron oil (solidi-
fied), jaconet, plas-
ter. protective skin,

amel-hair brush,
pins, etc.

In Rex Red or
Royal Blue Enam-

elled Metal (as illus- NO. 703. • Tabloid' First. Aid tor Boy :

trateil). Measurements: 6j X :ij X 2 in.

Price in London, 50

Belt or Cycle attachment (as illustrated), 6</. extra

No. 712. 'TABLOID' FIRST-AID

Contains 'Tabloid' Bandages and Dressings, 'Vaporole' Aromatic

Ammonia, for use as " Smell-
ing Salts," 'Borofax,' Carron
oil (solidified) and jaconet,
castor oil, plaster, protective
skin, scissors, pins, etc., and
seven tubes of ' Tabloid ' and
'Soloid' Brand products.

In Rex Red,
Royal Blue
or Brewster
Green Enam-
elled Metal (as
illustrated), or
in Aluminised
Metal.

Price in London, 10/0

amelled Metal)

No. 90S. 'TABLOID' PHOTOGRAPHIC OUTFIT

A complete outfit of
the celebrated 'Tabloid'
Chemicals for develop-
ing, sepia toning, inten-
sifying, reducing, gold
toning, fixing, etc.

Fresh, reliable solu-
tions without weighing
or waste.

In Rex Red, Royal
Blue, Imperial Green or
Bright Scarlet Enamel-
led Metal (as illustrated),
or in Black Japanned
Metal.

Price in London, 5/0

NO. 231. 'TABLOID' BKANI) MbDICINE CASE
(As suggested by Sir W. Moore)

This outfit, owing to its strong well-built metal case and the very-
comprehensive nature of the contents, is peculiarly well adapted for
use as a home medical equipment for residents in foreign countries
or in out-of-the-way places.

It was suggested by, and is fitted up in accordance with the instructions
of, Sir W. Moore in his Manual of Family Medicine for India, and
contains fifteen 1 ox. corked phials of ' Tabloid ' and ' Soloid ' products,
minor surgical instruments and dressings.

In Black Japanned Metal. Weight, about 6 Ib. 14oz.

Approximate Price in London, £3 17 6

With modified fittings for Tropical countries, JE3 10 0

When fitted with a thick felt cover, this case will bear the strain
of rough transit to the most distant parts of the Empire without
damage to its contents.

A 'TABLOID' BRAND FIRST-AID POCKET-CASE

FOR

AVIATORS, MOTORISTS AND SPORTSMEN

The charm of rapid movement through the air, on the
earth, or above it, exercises an irresistible fascination, and
gains more votaries daily for aviation and for motoring.

It is impossible to eliminate entirely all risk of injury
from these attractive sports, and, unfortunately, accidents
occasionally befall even the most careful and experienced.

This ' Tabloid ' Equipment, No. 706, has been specially
designed to provide, within the least possible space, what
is necessary for rendering first-aid in cases of accident
or injury, and has been carried on air voyages by such
distinguished aeronauts as M. Paulhan, Mr. Grahame-White,
etc. So that no one need be deterred from carrying a first-
aid case by its bulk, the size has been limited to that of an
ordinary cigarette case.

It contains one bandage, 3 yards by 2^ inches, one small
package containing pins and compressed boric gauze, a
metal box containing strapping plaster in detached pieces,
mounted on tape, so that it can be used without scissors,
safety pins and ' Vaporole ' Aromatic Ammonia, for use as
" smelling salts."

A tube of Carron oil (solidified) for use in case of burns or
scalds is also included, a packet of jaconet, some of which
may be placed over the oil, and forms an impervious
covering, protecting the injured part from the air ; and a little
booklet of court plaster cut into convenient sized strips.

377

FIRST-AID POCKET-CASE

The case is made of aluminium, light yet rigid, with a
fluted surface and a steel spring catch. It can be carried in
the pocket under all circumstances without the slightest

Tabloid • Brand F!

st-Aid, Ko. 706. Mea
Weight : 4 oz It

3.J X 3 X | in

inconvenience, and forms a real safeguard against the com-
plications which may arise out of a neglected wound.

The preparation of a complete ' Tabloid ' First-Aid outfit
of such small dimensions has been rendered possible by
the use of the pleated compressed bandages and dressings
originated by Burroughs Wellcome & Co. A small quantity
of gauze or lint can be removed from one of the packages,
when required, without disturbing the bulk, and the
remainder retained, free from contamination by dust or
dirt, for future use.

Among the Grand Prizes awarded to Burroughs Wellcome & Co.
by the International Jury of the Franco-British Exhibition, one
was presented specially for Medical and First-Aid Equipments.

378

SOME HISTORIC FLIGHTS

AIRSHIP

AND

AEROPLANE

The most famous aeronauts of recent times, including those whose
flights are here recorded, have carried with them ' Tabloid ' First-Aid
Outfits, as their sole Medical Equipments, on their voyages through
the air.

379

THE LONDON-MANCHESTER FLIGHT

April 27-28, 1910

Reproduced from an actual snapshot, taken as Louis Paulhan was leaving
Hendon on his epoch-making flight of 185 miles from London to Manchester,
when he surpassed all previous records, and won The Daily Mail £10,000
prize. Inset is a portrait of Paulhan and a photograph of the ' Tabloid '
First-aid Outfit which he carried with him throughout his historic flight.

380

THE TRANS-ALPINE FLIGHT BY SEN OR CHA V'E z

The " Mechanical Bird of the Mountains."

In September, 1910, Sefior Chavez performed the most remarkable feat of
aviation in flying on a Bleriot Monoplane from Brieg, over the mountains, to
Domo d'Ossola. At Gaby, where he had to choose between the Gondo and
the Monchera routes, he selected the former, realising that he was not high
enough to clear Monchera Pass. Having accomplished this splendid flight
over the Alps, during which he rose to a height of 6000 feet, in the act of
alighting he fell with the motor upon him, an accident which injured him
beyond reach of medical aid of any sort, and cost him his life. Inset are
photographs of Sefior Chavez and of the ' Tabloid ' First-Aid Equipment
which he carried over the Alps.

381

383

s .^^

-£.0-5 x£ =
c£ a;^ go
•r rt > •i^tT; ^

2-C O „ %
rt M x - u: >

H. J ^T3 O -

z *

o ^

I CODY
FLYER

which *v_jr

\ W'$*. CODY. I

CMPWC I

M'CHCUN TROPHY!

Dec. 31!.' ram

CODY

Mr. S. F. Cody, an American who has become a British Citizen, and
has done important work for the War Office, uses an aeroplane of his
own design.

He has made numerous successful flights, and was the winner of the
Michelin Cup in 1910. He carries a ' Tabloid ' First-Aid as his medical
equipment.

385

5 f-

GRAHAME-WHITE

Mr. Claude Grahame-White made some remarkable journeys in the
course of his plucky attempt to win the " Daily Mail " £ 10,000 prize;
one flight being from London to Rugby, a distance of 82 miles, in
2 hours 5 minutes.

He has since flown from the Brooklands track to Ranelagh, a
distance of 24 miles, in 20 minutes.

In 1910, at the great aviation meeting at Belmont Park, New York,
Mr. Grahame-White won for England the Gordon-Bennett Cup, and in
connection with the same meeting made a memorable flight round the
Statue of Liberty.

A ' Tabloid ' First-Aid is always to be found on board his aeroplane.

S O P \V I T H

By achieving the best performance on an All-British aeroplane,
namely, a flight of 107* miles, Mr. T. Sopwith won the Baron de Forest
£4000 prize.

On February 1, at the request of H.M. the King, he flew from
Brooklands to Windsor, and alighted in the grounds of Windsor Castle.
On this occasion Mr. Sopwith had the honour of being presented to
the King and Queen, who inspected his aeroplane.

The convenient position of his ' Tabloid ' First-Aid Outfit is seen in
the photograph.

A GOOD CATCH
(From a negative by J. F. Moore)

Exposure BSD second ; developed with ' Tabloid ' ' Rytol ' Universal
Developer

390

MODERN METHODS IN PHOTOGRAPHY

Every age has had its special predilections and its own
favourite vehicle of artistic expression — there has been an
age of marble and an age of ivory, an era of huge mural
paintings and a time when dainty miniatures were most
in vogue. Epic poetry and the writing of voluminous
letters delighted the eighteenth century and disappeared in
the twentieth. On the other hand, the art of the camera
with its brilliant realism and poignant actuality has
appealed with irresistible force to the modern spirit and,
without ousting any of the older methods of delineation,
has become the helper and servant of all. So important
is the position in the national life, taken by photography The
at the commencement of the present reign, that it may characteristic
be regarded as the characteristic art of the age.

Moreover, its pursuit is no longer hedged about by the
difficulties and inconveniences which at first beset it. The
wet plate process is practically obsolete, and in its place
plates and films of convenient size, and hand-cameras of
excellent design, and in endless variety, are now offered to
the amateur on every hand.

The method of making chemical solutions has also been
reformed, and instead of bulky bottles of liquid for develop-
ing, toning, intensifying, etc., it is sufficient to provide
oneself with ' Tabloid ' Chemicals which occupy a minimum
of space, and achieve a maximum of efficiency.

' Tabloid ' Photographic Chemicals are pure chemicals
compressed into small bulk, but yet more readily soluble chemical
than the same chemicals in crystallised form. These difficulties
products each contain a precise weight, so that the trouble
of weighing or measuring is entirely obviated.

The advantages which ' Tabloid ' Chemicals possess in
home use are intensified when development and similar
operations have to be conducted under trying conditions.
This wonderful compactness is well shown by the coloured
illustration. A complete chemical outfit of 'Tabloid'
products is comfortably carried in the pocket or wallet
without danger of trouble consequent en breakage.

391

MODERN METHODS IN PHOTOGRAPHY

Not only do ' Tabloid ' Photographic Chemicals rid
development, toning and other processes of all the
uncertainties which accompany the use of impure
chemicals and stale solutions, but they also remarkably
simplify these operations, and impart to them a scientific
precision which cannot otherwise be obtained.

All developers and chemicals essential for the practice
of photography at home and abroad are issued as
' Tabloid ' products, but to meet the special needs of
travellers, tourists and amateur photographers who
require the utmost condensation and the widest utility
in the equipment they carry, Burroughs Wellcome & Co.
have issued, as the result of special research and wide
experience, a developer which is universal in utility and
unique in compactness. This is ' Tabloid ' ' RYTOL '
Universal Developer. It is so compact that the materials
for 8S ounces of solution occupy only the same space as
one ounce of fluid. It is so universal in application
that it will develop plates, films, bromide and gaslight
papers as well as lantern slides with equal facility and
equal certainty. It makes a bright clear solution even
with water which, with ordinary chemicals, becomes cloudy
and discoloured. The importance of this to travellers
who are forced to use whatever water is available will
be readily appreciated.

CORRECT EXPOSURE IN ALL LANDS
The photographer who desires to obtain pictures of
places which he may never re-visit, of moving objects, or of
dramatic scenes of special interest which he may observe
in the course of his journeys, must be able to decide on the
correct exposure quickly and under all circumstances. To
meet this need, Burroughs Wellcome & Co.'s photo-
graphic experts have condensed the results of their special
study of the question of exposure into a pocket-book known
as THE 'WELLCOME' PHOTOGRAPHIC EXPOSURE RECORD AND
DIARY, and have combined with their own experience
that of travellers in all parts of the globe.

Many methods have been devised for ensuring correct

MODERN METHODS IN PHOTOGRAPHY

exposure — some requiring complicated calculations, others
the use of elaborate tables or special apparatus. The
simplest and most certain method is provided by the
ingenious mechanical Calculator contained in each copy
of THE ' WELLCOME ' EXPOSURE RECORD AND DIARY. Its
essential feature is a disc, one turn of which tells the correct
exposure at a glance.

The illustration here shown makes its simplicity clear.
The central white portion is the revolving disc which
registers with the two fixed scales, shown in tint. Facing

the Calcula-
tor are tables
giving light
values, so
arranged that
the table for
each month
comes to the
front in
its proper
season. The
Calculator is
set by turning
the disc until
the subject
to be photo-
graph e d
registers
with the
figure repre-
senting the light value. That one turn is all that is
necessary. In addition to thus providing an easy way of
calculating correct exposure, THE ' WELLCOME ' EXPOSURE
RECORD is a pocket note-book and encyclopaedia of photo-
graphic information. There are three Editions — (i)
Southern Hemisphere and Tropics, (2) Northern Hemisphere
and Tropics, (3) United States of America. These editions
give the information necessary for correct exposure in all
parts of the world.

The simple
way

o Q -a

y o J

2 £ K

& a <,:

v -j 8.

•£ - o.

4- U O

<; m «

u S

394

MODERN METHODS IN PHOTOGRAPHY

THE RECORDS OF TRAVELLERS

Records of travel and exploration into distant and little
known parts of the world constitute a most fascinating
department of literature, and one which is especially
attractive to British readers. The Empire upon which The charm of
the sun never sets has been built up by men who have J^^0
possessed in a remarkable degree the genius of exploration,
and a restless and insatiable love of travel runs in the
blood of their descendants. Even those Britons who are
compelled to stay at home, love to catch an occasional
glimpse into some far-off untamed region of the earth's
surface, " where foot of man has rarely, if ever, trod," even
though it be only in imagination. Books of travel bring
before us, vividly, the conditions of life among races widely
removed from our own in the line of their development,
or lagging behind the stream of human progress like
remnants and reminders of primeval man ; their pages open
up to us a whole world of adventure in which we can track-
wild beasts in their native haunts, scale lofty mountains and
penetrate mysterious caverns and inaccessible deserts.

Nothing delights the home-keeping lover of travel more
than thus to dive into the unknown in the company of an
author who has seen and heard what he describes. Such
books as "Through Darkest Africa," "Trans-Himalaya,"
" Farthest South," etc., etc., which palpitate with actuality
and bring before us a new vision of the world as it is,
are full of interest and of immense educational value.

Workers in this strenuous field of literary effort have Enhanced
found in Photography a most serviceable ally, and the by
difficulties which at first enveloped the practice of this art Phot°sraPhs
on the march or in out-of-the-way places have, to a great
extent, disappeared.

With a modern camera and a good supply of ' Tabloid '
Photographic Chemicals, there is hardly any part of the
process which cannot be carried out on the very spot
where the negative has been exposed.

The Rev. B. M. McOwen, famous for his vivid and
picturesque treatment of Chinese domestic scenes,
regularly uses ' Tabloid ' ' Rytol ' Universal Developer.

MODERN METHODS IN PHOTOGRAPHY

A well-known New York
journalist, Mr. Frank G.
Carpenter, who in 1906
travelled through Northern,

Eastern and Southern Africa,
commenting on the
'Tabloid' Photographic
Outfit which he had taken
with him, wrote: " The
Photographic material sent
was of the highest quality,
and I am forwarding a few

of the photographs among the many we took from time to

time."

Df the

One of the Ashanti Chi
Gold Coast Colony sitting under tbe
state umbrella and surrounded by
his followers.

BE SHIPS OF TBK Dl

A String of Saharan Ca

396

MODERN METHODS IN PHOTOGRAPHY

A characteristic Saharan picture of a string of camels
from one of Mr. Carpenter's prints is reproduced on page 396.

Among those who have carried ' Tabloid ' Photographic
Chemicals as part of their travelling equipment for an SirSven Hedir
exploring expedition may be mentioned Sir Sven Hedin, in Tibet
the story of whose intrepid journeys in Tibet is related
in "Trans-Himalaya" (see page 435).

Sir Ernest Shackleton took a complete outfit of ' Tabloid '
Photographic Chemicals on his perilous journey into the
Antarctic zone (when he got within 97 miles of the South
Pole), and pronounced them quite satisfactory.

' Tabloid ' Photographic Chemicals were also taken by
Capt. Scott on his famous Antarctic voyage in the Discovery ;
and on the Terra Nova, in which the same distinguished
explorer has again sailed southward in search of the Pole,
a very complete outfit of ' Tabloid ' Photographic Chemicals
has been taken. Mr. H. G. Ponting, the photographer who
accompanies Capt. Scott on this latest British Antarctic
Expedition, selected as his one developer for all plates,
films, bromide prints and lantern slides, ' Tabloid ' ' Rytol,'
and this developer is also to be used for the very large
quantity of cinematograph film which it is intended to
develop on the voyage.

Mr. R. L. Jefferson, F.R.G.S., in his book " Through a
Continent on Wheels," writes : "I should like to mention
that this firm (B. W. & Co.) prepares Photographic Tabloids
in a compressed form, and those photographers who desire
to develop their plates en route cannot do better than adopt
their portable and reliable outfits."

Mr. L. N. G. Ward, a traveller whose photographic work
is of a high order, uses ' Tabloid ' Chemicals. The roll
film of a striking picture of his, entitled, "The King of
Bekwai," which is reproduced on page 396, was developed 'Tabloid1
with 'Tabloid' Pyro-Metol. Chetf/a^

The keeping qualities of ' Tabloid ' Photographic
Chemicals in hot climates have been amply proved by the
experience of voyagers to various parts of the world. One

MODERN METHODS IN PHOTOGRAPHY

\vell-kno\vntraveller, Lionel Decle, used them to develop no

less than 4000 plates during the course of his wanderings

across Africa, and, in recounting his experiences and

in referring particularly to a package of ' Tabloid ' Pyro, he

Afr^cl0"3' wrote: "This bottle has been to Madagascar through a

heavy rain season, to Africa also, and to Algeria. The

fact that none of the products are discoloured is for me

a conclusive proof that your ' Tabloid ' Photographic

Chemicals are absolutely perfect."

A writer in the Pall Mall Gazelle (November 5, 1909), in
an article entitled " Chasing the Sun," thus describes the
advantages of these products.

"A camerist myself, I have often come across — I had
almost written ' always come across ' — brethren in the art
who took bulky cases of developers, fixers and other
chemicals, which took up much room in the kit-bag, and
which they sometimes could not replace when they were
used up. This is one of the drawbacks to Kodaking in
out-of-the-way places. All this inconvenience and worry
can be saved, since the time-tested, excellent tabloids sold
by Burroughs and Wellcome are sufficient for all needs.
In a phial that may be carried in the waistcoat pocket, you
Convenience have sufficient developer to last during an ordinary tour,

of the new ^ • other phials of similar size, fixers and toners. In

methods

a small corner of the bag you can stock away sufficient
materials to take you around the world, and you may keep
on snapshotting all the way.

"Four phials of the firm's excellent pyro tabloids lasted
me through the South African War, and, during a siege,
I was well provided with chemicals when other men, not so
far-seeing, were without them. The new, handsome, little
case for home or touring use, packed with all tabloids
necessary for negative and print, is one of the best things
ever placed on the market."

The visit of H.R.H. the Duke of Connaught to South
Africa, in 1910, was worthily recorded, photographically.

MODERN METHODS IN PHOTOGRAPHY

In spite of the difficulties presented by constant movement
and changes of climate, Mr. Ernest Brooks, the official
photographer on the tour, managed to secure an album of
views replete with charming scenes and subjects of historic
interest.

On his return he gave some interesting particulars as to
the methods employed.
Here is his report : —

H.M.S. BALMORAL CASTI.K

Jan. 6, 1911
DKAR SIRS.

While acting as official photographer to H.R.H. the Duke of
Connaught during his tour in South Africa, I used 'Tabloid' Photo-
graphic Chemicals to ths exclusion of anything else.

My whole outfit for the development of plates, films and papers,
and for toning prints, was comprised in a metal case measuring
9x7x5 inches.

The only developer I used was 'Tabloid' 'Rytol.' It is the best
developer I know, and on this tour alone has yielded me over 500
half-plate negatives of first-class quality. .

Although my developing was all done en route, ' Tabloid ' ' Rytol '
Developer enabled me to prepare a fresh active solution in a moment,
wherever I might be.

It is wonderful what beautifully - graded negatives this developer
yields. It gives full details in the shadows, and yet keeps the high
lights soft and well modulated even in most difficult subjects. For
retaining the full printing value in cloudy skies I know nothing to
equal it.

The convenience, portability and keeping qualities of your chemicals
are further points in their favour.

Yours faithfully,

These, among other notes and comments from travellers
and photographers in various parts of the British Empire
and elsewhere, indicate the growing interest felt in modern
methods of photography, and serve to emphasise the
reliability of ' Tabloid ' Photographic Chemicals under
conditions which would render ordinary chemicals useless.

THE

Tabloid' A

AND

Soloid'

Invented

by
B.W.& Co.

Are

B. W. & Co.

They mark the work of

Burroughs Wellcome & Co.

They mean " Issued by

Burroughs Wellcome & Co.'

They stand for

gfl CAlrSATEl products

FIRELIGHT STUDY

COPYR I GHT

J. WESTON AND SON
Folkestone

Reproduced from a Bromide print developed with
'TABLOID' 'RYTOL1 UNIVERSAL DEVELOPER
and stained with ' Soloid ' Photographic Stain (Salmon)

Stained with
'Soloid' Photographic
Stain (Red)

Stained with
'Soloid' Photographic
Stain (Green)

Stained with
'Soloid' Photographic
Stain (Yellow)

For description
and directions
see opposite page

COLOUR EFFECTS

BY
STAINING PHOTOGRAPHS

Many striking and original colour effects may be obtained
by immersing lantern slides, bromide, platinotype and
similar prints in solutions of suitable dyes. For this
purpose, a series of products has been introduced under the
title of ' Soloid ' Photographic Stains. Portraits, fireside
and forge studies may be stained with ' Soloid ' Photographic
Stain (Red or Salmon), moonlight views and seascapes
with a blue ' Soloid ' product, street scenes and twilight
views with yellow, landscapes with green. The firelight
study on the opposite page is a reproduction of a print
stained with ' Soloid ' Photographic Stain (Salmon). The
method of staining is quite simple : Dissolve one ' Soloid '
Photographic product in four ounces of water, and having
soaked the prints (which should not previously have been
hardened) in water until flaccid, immerse them in the
staining solution for a few minutes, then rinse and dry in
the usual way. The most pleasing effects are produced
in the majority of cases by employing solutions of this
strength, thus obtaining a suggestion of colour rather than
a pronounced tint. For lantern slides where a deeper
colour is required, one ' Soloid ' Photographic Stain
product may be used with one ounce of water.

401

FIKI, i) OF BELLADONNA (At r op a belladonna)

belladonna is grown from genuine wild seed. The best crops of leav
ed in the second, third or fourth year of the plant's growth, and
period that the alkaloidal content is greatest.

L O A D I N G B K I. I. A I) O N N A

The yield ranges from 1-1/2 to 5 tons per acre. The freshly-cut herb is weighed in
bundles and carried straight to the laboratories in a motor trolley. A portion of the
leaves is dried in a few hours in specially-ventilated chambers. The roots, which are
collected in the autumn, are sliced in order to accelerate the drying, and so prevent
any undesirable change taking place.

THE 'WELLCOME'

MATERIA MEDICA FARM

THE vital importance of standardisation of drugs has always
been recognised by Burroughs Wellcome & Co. Constant
attention has been devoted to the subject, and the principle

Standardisation

has been applied not merely to the chemical, but also to the
vegetable and animal substances required for the preparation
of the firm's products. The old method of picking samples
of drugs by their colour and appearance has long been felt
to be inadequate, and it has become necessary to view them
in the more penetrating light of chemical analysis and of
physiological tests.

Even the most experienced pharmacognosist may select
drugs which, on the basis of form, colour and other physical
characteristics, appear to possess a high standard of quality,
yet on assay do not yield the requisite percentage of active
principles.

In this connection, a paper by Carr and Reynolds, pub-
lished in the Chemist and Druggist, shows in tabular form
the very considerable range of variation in the proportion of
active principles existing in samples of drugs bought on the
market. Amongst the examples given are the following : —

Drug

Lowes, Highest fc
centage.centage

Belladonna
(dried herb)
Broom tops
Cinchona Succirubra
Hydrastis Root
Ipecacuanha Root
(Rio)

0-23 1-OS Total alkaloids
0-07 1-06 Sparteine Sulphate
1-OG 4-64 ; Quinine and Cinchonidine
2-3 5-8 Berberine Sulphate

0-18 1-83 Emetine

It is evident that the accuracy and care exercised by the
pharmacist in weighing and measuring drugs for use in
medicine are nullified if the active principles are variable to
such an extent. The obvious remedy for this state of
matters, is standardisation.

Closely bound up with the question of standardisation is
that of the possibility of exercising scientific control over

403

FRESH

BELLADONNA
L K A v E s

About to be expressed
for juice and for making
the green extract. It is
extremely important
that this be done
promptly to avoid fer-
mentation and conse-
quent deterioration of
the product. The fresh
herb is gathered as
soon as the sun is up,
and expressed and
treated before sunset.

' W E L L C O M K '

CHEMICAL

WORKS

HEMLOCK

(Co n in m

m aculatu in )

A typical bush of
Hemlock fConitim
macnlatiim). The
fresh leaves and
branches are collected
when the fruit begins
to form.

'WELLCOME'

M A T E R i A

M E r> i c A FARM

GATHERING HYOSCYAMUS (Hyoscyamus niger)

Hyoscyamus niger, one of the most difficult plants with which the herb farmer has
to deal, is grown from seed sown about March or April. The young plants show above
ground at the end of May or beginning of June. In the autumn they are separated if
too close together. In the following May an aerial stem is developed, which rapidly
grows until it reaches the height of three or four feet. The flowering takes place in
June or July, when the crop is harvested.

DIGITALIS (Dig i t alis purpurea) IN FLOWER

n\d seed, and ;

ACONITE (Aconitmn na pc I lu s) IN FLOWER

Aconitum napellus, when raised from seed, takes two or three years to flower;

it is best propagated by dividing the roots ; each root is biennial, but, as it has

I lie power of forming new ones every year, the plant itself is perennial.

A FIELD

This handsome plant is interesting, as recent investigation has shown that it
contains Hyoscme, Hyoscyamine and Atropine in proportions differing from those
, • . _ occurring in other solanaceous plants.

THE ' WELLCOME ' MATERIA MEDICA FARM

the cultivation of medicinal herbs, more especially those
which are found to present great variations in activity Expert
when obtained in the wild state. Hence, with the intro- supervision
duction of the 'Wellcome' Brand standardised galencials,
Burroughs Wellcome & Co. found it necessary, in order to
obtain a constant supply of herbs of a sufficiently high
standard of quality, to grow them under their own
immediate supervision. The benefits of conducting a
materia medica farm in conjunction with the preparation
of pharmaceutical products are many. For instance : —

(1) A drug may be treated or worked up immediately it
has been collected.

(2) Herbs may be dried, if necessary, directly they are
cut, before fermentation and other deteriorative changes
have set in.

(3) Freedom from caprice on the part of collectors who,
in gathering wild herbs, are very difficult to control in the
matter of adulteration, both accidental and intentional.

(4) The ability to select and cultivate that particular
strain of a plant which has been found by chemical and
physiological tests to be the most active, and which gives
the most satisfactory preparations. Notable instances of
these are to be found in connection with Digitalis and
Belladonna.

Fortunately, suitable land was available near the
'Wellcome' Chemical works at Dartford, and there the . Wellcome.
'Wellcome' Materia Medica Farm has been established. Materia
The following extracts from a descriptive article which Medlca
appeared in the Chemist and Druggist of January 29,
IQIO, will give some idea of the nature and scope of this
enterprise : —

" A suitable piece of land for 'a physicke garden' (had
been chosen) on an undulating slope, with here and there a Research
clump of trees and a strip of wild woodland, between the and
river and the North Downs, hard by the little village of exPeriment
Darenth. No more ideal spot for a herb farm could have
been chosen. It has shade, sunshine and moisture, and
a fine loamy soil, varied by sandier uplands. Here the
firm have for the last six years been cultivating medicinal

GOLDEN SEAL (Hydrastis c a nade n si s)

An experimental crop of Hydrastis, grown under natural conditions, in a grov

shaded by hedges and trees.

GOLDEN SEAL (Hydrastis c ana den si s)
The same plant under a specially-designed lattice structure, which ensur
requisite amount of shade.

THE 'WELLCOME' MATERIA MEDKA FARM

plants under the immediate superintendence of pharmaceu-
tical and botanical experts. The farm was established, firstly,
to provide opportunities and materials for research and
experiment, and, secondly, to supply the manufacturing
departments with medicinal herbs of proper quality.

" A visit to the farm shows that the greater part is
devoted to the cultivation of staples ; but a number of plots
are used for experimental crops. Among such are meadow
saffron (Colchicnm autumnale), with its pale-purple
flower. Lavender, peppermint, and French roses grow side
by side. Senega and the unpretentious taraxacum, with its
bright yellow petals, occupy other spaces. Ginseng, the
root that plays so important a part in Chinese medicine, is
also grown. Podophylhnn peltatum, Scopolia atropoides,
Datura meteloides, sea poppy (Glaucum luteum), and
Grindelia robusta, are other plants that one does not usually
find growing on a scale greater than the experimental ; but
the plots of Hydrastis canadensis are botanically and
commercially the most interesting on the farm, in view of
the fact that we are coming within measurable distance of
the end of the natural supply from North America.

" It is grown at the ' Wellcome ' Materia Medica Farm
in the open under perfectly natural conditions, in a little
woodland dell shaded by tall elms and bramble bushes ; and,
in another part of the farm, under a lattice-work structure,
an effort to re-create the conditions of the native home of
golden seal, which is in rich, moist woods from Canada to
Carolina. The growth under the latter conditions is more
generous. In this case the plants are protected from the
noonday heat.

"The purpose which Burroughs Wellcome & Co. had
immediately in view when they established this farm,
i.e. supplying the products of the field direct to their
Works, has been fulfilled, and the farm has in that
respect passed the experimental stage, and reached one
of great practical utility. On the research side,
experiment goes on, especially in regard to selection
and cultivation of strains which have been found by
chemical and physiological tests to be the most active."

409

THE MEDICINE CHEST OF
QUEEN MEMU-HOTEP. WHO LIVED 2200 B.C.

The massive outer case for the chest is shown on the
left. It is composed of wood, decorated with hieroglyphics,
amongst which are the royal cartouche and the figure of a
crouching jackal.

The chest itself is depicted on the right. It is composed
of plaited papyrus reeds, and is supported on a stand. The
chest is divided into six compartments, each containing a
beautifully-shaped medicine jar of oriental alabaster. Various
medicinal roots, and a wooden spoon, the handle of which
is ornamented with the head of Hathor, were discovered in
the chest.

This unique Egyptian medical equipment was discovered
at Thebes, and demonstrates the huge bulk and cumbersome
fittings, combined with paucity of supplies which have
been characteristic of medical outfits from the days of the
Pharaohs until the introduction of ' Tabloid ' products. The
modern medical man armed with a ' Tabloid ' brand Pocket-
Case carries a scientific therapeutic equipment, the equivalent
of which in the drugs of antient Egypt could be transported
onlv bv a regiment of slaves.

HISTORICAL
MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

USED IN

MILITARY, GEOGRAPHICAL

AND

JOURNALISTIC EXPEDITIONS

MILITARY MEDICINE CHEST— 1588

Fabricius, a noted Swiss physician of the XVI century, recommended
that the military chest should be furnished with no less than 362 varieties
of medicine, some of which contained as many as 64 ingredients. The
complexity of arrangement, the huge bulk and great weight, the liability
to breakage, and the complicated inconvenience of medicine chests
persisted until the introduction of ' Tabloid ' Medical Equipments.

412

THE SMALLEST MEDICINE CHEST IN THE WORLD

This tiny gold medicine chest is fitted with twelve square
medicine chest bottles containing- 300 doses of 'Tabloid' Brand
Medicaments, equivalent to 1 5 pints of fluid medicine.

413 z

AT THE NORTH POLE

' Tabloid ' Equipments were carried by
Commander PEAKY

'Tabloid' Medical Equipments were

carried by Sir Ernest H. SHACKI.ETON

FARTHEST SOUTH

'TABLOID' MEDICAL AND FIRST-AID EQUIPMENTS

Have reached the North Pole, and as near to the South Pole as
man has tione

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

FOR MILITARY, GEOGRAPHICAL AND JOURNALISTIC
EXPEDITIONS

THE Medical Equipments of the present day differ notably
from those of olden times in two distinct directions —
diminished bulk, and in purity and efficacy of content.
This improvement has only been effected in the last quarter
century and mainly by B. W. & Co.; before that time,
campaigning medicine chests had to be either of enormous
and unwieldy size, or, if small, they could contain only the
most meagre supplies.

In the Middle Ages, owing to the great variety and bulky
nature of the remedial agents used, the medicine chests Bulky yet
employed in military campaigns assumed enormous pro- ^^H^
portions, and it was not until the middle of the nineteenth
century that progress was made towards reducing the bulk
of medical outfits for campaigning purposes.

Size of one product of ' Tabloid '
Cinchona Tincture, min. 30

Length of 30 min. tube of Liquid Tincture, same
diameter as ' Tabloid ' product

Early explorers, particularly in Africa, found the diffi-
culties of procuring suitable portable medical supplies
practically insuperable, and the horrors of disease and
death associated with their expeditions were almost beyond
description.

" When I think [said the late Sir H. M. STANLEY, in the
course of one of his lectures] of the dreadful mortality of Afamous

J * journalist

Capt. TUCKEY'S Expedition in 1816, of the NIGER Expedition on early

in 1841, of the sufferings of BURTON and SPEKE, and of my exPeditions

own first two expeditions, I am amazed to find that much Mortality

of the mortality and sickness was due to the crude way ^["ines 6
in which medicines were supplied to travellers. The very
recollection causes me to shudder."

415

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

That a very marked change has taken place can be
gathered from a more recent speech of this eminent explorer
and journalist, in which he said :—

In my early expeditions into Africa, there was one secret wish
which endured with me always, and that was to ameliorate the
miseries of African explorers. How it was to be done I knew not ;
who was to do it, I did not know. But I made the acquaintance of
Messrs. BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co. As soon as I came in sit;ht
of their preparations and their works, I found the consummation
of my secret wish. On my later expeditions I had all the medicines
that were required for my black men, as well as my white men,
beautifully prepared, and in most elegant fashion arranged in the
smallest medicine chest it was ever my lot to carry into Africa.

B. W. &Co.
solved the
problem

One of the 'TABLOID' BRAND MEDICINE CHESTS carried by the late
Sir H. M. STANLEY through "Darkest Africa," and brought back, after
three years' journey, with the remaining contents unimpaired.

In his books, Founding the Congo Free State and
In Darkest Africa, the late Sir H. M. STANLEY wrote in
the very highest terms of ' Tabloid ' Medical Equipments.

Amongst other cases used during STANLEY'S travels is the
famous "Rear-Guard" 'Tabloid' Medicine Chest, which
remained in the swampy forest regions of the Aruwhimi
for nearly four years, and more than once was actually sub-
merged in the river. When it was brought back to London,
the remaining contents were tested by the official analyst of
The Lancet who reported that the 'Tabloid' medicaments
had perfectly preserved their efficacy.

Tested by
"The Lancet'

418

HISTORICAL MKDICAL EQUIPMENTS

The late Surgeon-Major PARKE, Stanley's Medical
Officer, in his Guide to Health in Africa, writes : —

The medical preparations which I have throughout recommended Unfailing
are those of BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co., as I have found, reliability,
after a varied experience of the different forms in which drugs portability and
are prepared for foreign use, that there are none which can c'
compare with them [' Tabloid ' products] for convenience of
portability in transit, and for unfailing reliability in strength of
doses after prolonged exposure.

At this point it is of interest to turn to the ' Tabloid '
Medicine Chest, here illustrated, which was discovered
near Kenia, in the Aruwhimi Dwarf Country. It was the'
last chest supplied to EMIN PASHA, GORDON'S Governor
of the Equatorial Sudan. This chest was taken by
Arabs when EMIN PASHA was massacred in 1892, and
was recaptured by BARON DHANIS, Commandant of the
Congo Free State troops, after the battle of Kasongo.
It was subsequently stolen by natives, and finally recovered
by an officer of the Congo Free State, and returned to
BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co.

The following is a copy of EMIN PASHA'S letter written
to BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co. on receiving the chest : —

Gentlemen, — I found the medicine chest you forwarded me
fully stocked. I need not tell you that its very completeness made
bound my heart. Articles like those could not be made but at

EMIN PASHA'S ' TABLOID ' BRAND MEDICINE CHEST

the hand of the greatest artists in their own department. If any-
one relieved from intense pain pours out his blessings, they
will come home to you.

419

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

I should like to expatiate somewhat longer on the intrinsical value,
but sickness preventing me to do so. I wish you to believe me,

Another case associated with Stanley is the raw-
hide ' Tabloid ' Medicine Case used by Thomas Stevens, Thos stevens.
the well-known journalist who travelled round the globe on «Tabioi<r
a bicycle, and was the hero of other pioneer exploits in ft
different parts of the world. Stevens was the first to greet
the great explorer on his return to civilisation, and during
his twelve months' journeyings in Masailand and German
East Africa, was greatly impressed with the portability

J^ BURROUGHS WELLCOMf^Co ] ,/

THOMAS STEVENS' 'TABLOID' BRAND MEDICINE
CASE

and compactness of his medical outfit, and with the
efficacy of its contents. In his book, Scouting for Stanley
in East Africa, he wrote : " Stanley, in recommending these
Medicines [' Tabloid ' products] , has earned the gratitude
of every man who goes to a tropical country."

A history of £11 the ' Tabloid ' equipments associated
with African exploration would, of itself, make a large
volume, and it is only possible to make brief mention
of a few other instances of their use.

421

422

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

That ' TABLOID ' EQUIPMENTS excel for military purposes
has been abundantly demonstrated during various
British and foreign military campaigns. The following is
an extract from the ©fftctaf (government (£q>ort made ^"^f^
by the Chief Medical Officer of the last BRITISH MILITARY
EXPEDITION to ASHANTI, on the 'Tabloid' Brand Medical
Equipment supplied by BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co. : —

The supply of medicines, both as to quality and quantity, left
nothing to be desired. There was no scarcity of anything. The
' Tabloid ' medicines were found to be most convenient and of No delay to
excellent quality. To be able to take out at once the required weigh or
dose of any medicine, without having to weigh or measure it, is a "
convenience that cannot be expressed in words. Time is saved
to an extent that can hardly be realised, and so is space, for a
fitted dispensary, or even a dispensary table, is unnecessary. The
quality of medicines was so good that no other should be taken no other should '
into the field. The cases supplied are almost ideal ones for the be taken into
Government. They are light, yet strong, and the arrangement of the field
the materials and medicines is as nearly perfect as possible.

It is instructive to compare the experience of
this Expedition with that of the WOLSELEY ASHANTI
EXPEDITION of 1873, fitted out according to old-time
methods.

The suffering and loss of life were then terrible, for
want of suitable medical equipments.

Without exception, ' Tabloid' Medical Equipments have
been used in all the campaigns of the last twenty-five
years, and have played an important part in combating
the diseases which seem inseparable from an army in the
field.

During the war with Spain, in Cuba and the Philippines,
' Tabloid ' Medical Equipments were specially ordered
for, and used by, the U.S. Army and Navy.

The Military Expedition which, under the command of
LORD KITCHENER, defeated the Khalifa and reconquered
the Sudan, was supplied with ' Tabloid ' Brand Medical
Equipments.

An illustration of one of the ' Tabloid ' Medical Equip-
ments specially designed for, and supplied to, the British

423

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

Colonial Forces for use in the recent South African
Campaign is here shown. Similar cases were designed
for, and supplied to, the CITY OF LONDON IMPERIAL
VOLUNTEERS and IMPERIAL YEOMANRY.

One of the 'TABLOID'
BRAND MEDICINE CASES
specially designed for, and
supplied to, the troops from
the various British Colonies,
for use in the South African
Campaign.

The equipment of the American Hospital Ship Maine,
and the valuable services it rendered in connection
with the campaigns in South Africa and in China,
are so recent as to be within the memory of all.
The whole of the medical outfit was supplied by
BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co.

One of the 'TABLOID' BRAND MEDICINE CHESTS specially designed
for, and supplied to, the Hospital Ship Maine.

425

HISTORICAL MKDICAI. EgUIFMF.NTS

Referring to this equipment, the Lancet (London, Eng.)
reported : —

The whole of the medical outfit has been supplied by Messrs.
Burroughs Wellcome & Co. One of the medicine chests supplied
by this firm is in tooled leather, designed by Mr. Henry S. Wellcome.

The following description of this chest may be of
interest : —

The chest is made of oak covered with Carthaginian cow-
hide, tooled by hand, with chaste designs successfully repre-
senting in allegory the alliance of Great Britain and
America in the succour of the wounded. On the top panel
appear the Union Jack and the Stars and Stripes entwined,
portraits of Queen Victoria, George Washington and
President McKinley ; also representations of the British
Lion and American Eagle. The front panel bears portraits
of Lady Randolph Churchill (Mrs. George Cornwallis-
West), the hon. secretary and the hon. treasurer of the
fund; a picture of the ship itself; a scene representing the
British Lion, wounded by an arrow which lies at his side,
being ministered to by Britannia and Columbia. A frieze is
formed by a representation of an American Indian wampum,
upon which Brother Jonathan and John Bull are depicted
hand in hand. The panel at each end of the chest
represents Britannia and Columbia supporting a banner
bearing the Red Cross, and on the panel at the back the
British Regular and Colonial Lancers are shown charging a
Boer force. Keble's line, "No distance breaks the tie of
blood," and Bayard's phrase, " Our kin across the sea," are
inscribed on the chest. This beautiful cabinet contains a
number of smaller cases fitted with ' Tabloid ' and ' Soloid '
products and 'Tabloid' Hypodermic Outfits, and is in
itself a compact and complete dispensary.

In addition to their adoption by military and naval
authorities, ' Tabloid ' Medical Equipments have been
used by the War Correspondents who have accompanied
all modern expeditions.

426

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

The conclusive proofs afforded by all these campaigns and
expeditions of the incomparable utility of the B. W. & Co.
equipments, under circumstances of the most trying nature,
naturally led to their still more extensive employment in
South Africa during the late war. The trying conditions of
transport and the climatic influences were just such as
' Tabloid ' Equipments and ' Tabloid ' Equipments only, had
been proved, by earlier experience, to be capable of resisting.
Constant references were made to the adequacy and
efficiency of the equipments supplied.

A WAR CORRESPONDENT'S EQUIPMENT

The late G. VV. STEEVENS' 'TABLOID' Brand MEDICINE CHEST

An equipment of the greatest personal interest is the chest
here illustrated. It was formerly the property of the late
G. W. Steevens, and used by him throughout the war in
Greece, the two Sudan campaigns, and his journey in India. G' w- Steevens
In the South African War the same chest did good service
until this brilliant writer's life was brought to a premature
end during the siege of Ladysmith.

427

o. W
W o

- <

Q H
Id Z

428

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

IN ARCTIC AND ANTARCTIC EXPLORATION

In the successive heroic endeavours to reach the
Poles, during recent years, and in the exploration of Arctic
and Antarctic lands, 'Tabloid ' Medicine Chests have taken
a pioneer position, and continue to hold supremacy.

The ' Tabloid ' Belts and other Medical Equipments
supplied to NANSEN for his journey in the Frani, Afamous
and those used by the JACKSON-HARMSWORTH ARCTIC journalistic
EXPEDITION, have been added to the historic collection e
of BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co.

One of the 'TABLOID ' BRAND MEDICINE BELTS carried by NANSEN
on his Arctic Expedition.

The ITALIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION, commanded by the
DUKE OF THE ABRUZZI, found that, despite the fact that
the northern latitude of 86° 33' 49" was reached, the

One of the 'TABLOID' BRAND MEDICINE
CASES, carried by the DUKE OF THE

ABRUZZI'S Polar Expedition.
— tijjj

' Tabloid ' Medicine Chests and Cases with which

the Expedition was equipped were brought back with

their remaining contents quite unaffected by the rigour
of the climate.

429 AA

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

COMMANDER PEARY, to whose record stands the achieve-
ment of reaching the farthest northern latitude, writing
from Etah, Greenland, reported :—

Burroughs Wellcome & Co. ' Tabloid ' Medicine Cases and
supplies have proven invaluable.

One of the 'TABLOID'
BRAND MEDICINE
CHESTS used by COM-
MANDER R. E. PEARY.

The entire medical outfit of the National Antarctic
Expedition was furnished by Burroughs Wellcome & Co.,
and on the return of the Discovery, with the members
of the Expedition on board, the medical officer made a
highly satisfactory report on the ' Tabloid ' Medical
Equipment.

One of the 'TABLOID' BRAND MEDICINE CASES carried by the
National Antarctic Expedition.

In August, 1901, the Discovery left England, and, in the
following January, crossed the limit of the Antarctic Circle.

430

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

Having passed the farthest eastward point attained by Ross
sixty years before, the explorers discovered a new land,
which they named King Edward VII. Land. One of the
most noteworthy features of the Expedition was the

arduous sledge journey undertaken by the commander,
Captain SCOTT, accompanied by Lieutenant SHACKLETON
and Dr. WILSON. This journey over the ice occupied
three months, and the latitude of 82° 17' South was reached.

On sledge journeys the question of weight is of great
moment. The traveller on such occasions must carry
but the barest necessaries, and of these the lightest
procurable. The medicine chest is an important item, for
upon the efficacy of its contents the lives of the explorers
may depend. Every drug carried must be of the utmost
reliability, in the most compact state, and capable of
withstanding an extremely low temperature.

That ' Tabloid ' Medical Equipments fulfil all require-
ments has been proved again and again. They enable the
traveller to carry a comparatively large supply of medicines,
and may be used under conditions which would render
the carriage and administration of ordinary preparations
impossible.

Reliability
essential

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

To the enthusiasm of Sir CLEMENTS MARKHAM, K.C.B.,
then President of the Royal Geographical Society, the
successful organisation of the National Antarctic Expedition
was largely due. Referring to the 'Tabloid' Medical
Equipment of the Discovery, he reports: —

National Antarctic Expedition,
I, Savile Kow,

Burlington Gardens, W,

The Medical Equipment of the Exploring Ship of the
National Antarctic Expedition was entirely supplied
by Messrs Burroughs Wellcome & Co. , and, proved in
every way most satisfactory.

The few other drugs and preparations which v/ere taken
with the Expedition were only supplied for purposes
of experiment, and, can in no way be regarded as
part of the medical equipment.

432

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

DR. KCETTLITZ, the Senior Medical Officer to the

Expedition, reports : —

Discovery ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION

The Medical Equipment of the Discovery Exploring Ship, of
the National Antarctic Expedition, was entirely supplied by
Messrs. Burroughs Wellcome & Co., mostly in the form of
'Tabloid,' ' Soloid ' and ' Enule ' preparations.

The preparations proved in every way most satisfactory, and there
was no deterioration of any of them, in spite of the conditions of
climate and temperature to which they were exposed. The few other
drugs and preparations which were taken with the Expedition were
only taken for the purpose of experiment.

The cases supplied by Burroughs Wellcome & Co. to us have
also been found satisfactory ; the small leather one was very useful
upon sledge journeys, being light and compact. The No. 251
' Tabloid ' Case was used for some weeks at the camp eleven
miles north of the ship, when the whole ship's company was
engaged in sawing and blasting the ice, and it was found very
convenient.

The other cases were useful in our cabins, etc. .for a handy supply.

BRITISH ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION, 1907-9

SIR ERNEST H. SHACKLETON on his memorable voyage
with the Nimrod, when he penetrated to within ninety-
seven miles of the South Pole, took with him as his sole
medical equipment ' Tabloid ' Medicine Chests and Cases,
and the subjoined reports show that under the trying and
difficult conditions of Antarctic exploration ' Tabloid '
Medicines maintained their reputation for efficiency and
stability.

British Antarctic Expedition, 1907-9
Copy of Report dated Sept. 17, 1909 : —

The British Antarctic Expedition, 1907-9 was equipped with a
very complete Medical Equipment contracted for solely by Messrs.
Burroughs Wellcome & Co., and consisting of 'Soloid' and
' Tabloid ' Preparations, which are the only forms that can be
conveniently carried and preserved under such conditions.

433

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

The packets of compressed Dressings are in extremely convenient
form. The Congo Cases (No. 251, 'Tabloid' Brand) were always
used when at our base, and both the party of three who reached the
South Magnetic Pole, and the party under Lieut. Shackleton, who
attained a point 97 miles from the geographical South Pole, carried a
brown leather ' Tabloid ' Case and all the ' Tabloid ' products that
remain are now in as good condition as when first handed over to my
care two years ago.

The " N'imrod " was also supplied with 'Tabloid' Cases and
equipment.

The ' Tabloid ' Photographic Outfit supplied by Burroughs
Wellcome & Co. proved entirely satisfactory.

Signed,
British Antarctic Expedition, 1907-9,

KKNKST H. SHACKLETON,

Commander.

KKIC P. MARSHALL, M.R.C.S., L.K.C.P.
Surgeon to the Expedition.

The ' Tabloid ' Medicine Case carried
by SIR ERNEST H. SHACKLETON.

Farthest South "

The full record of this Case, as given in the report from the Surgeon
to the Expedition, is printed below.

Copy of Report dated Sept. 17, 1909 : —

The B. W. & Co. Brown Leather 'Tabloid ' Case herewith, was
taken with party of six that made the ascent and reached the
summit of Mount Erebus, 13.350 ft., March 5-11. 1908.

Used on Southern Journey under Lieut. Shackleton, *October 28,
1908— March 4, 1909. Latitude 88° 23' S. Longitude 162" E.

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

Distance covered in this journey, 1728 statute miles.

Used on S. Depot Laying Party, from September 20 to October 15,
1908. Distance covered, 311 miles.

Taken on Depot journeys to Hut Point. Aggregating 150 statute
miles.

Medicines quite satisfactory.
Signed.

E. P. MARSHALL, M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P.,

Surgeon to British Antarctic Expedition, 1907-9
* Reached " Farthest South " Jan. 9. 1909

RECORDS OF JOURNALISTS, TRAVELLERS
AND SPORTSMEN

Mr. JULIUS PRICE, the special artist and correspondent of
the Illustrated London News, reported that he carried his 30,000 miles
'Tabloid' Medicine Case over 30,000 miles through Arid desert and
Arctic regions, across Siberia, through China, Japan and E^7reme heat
America. Despite the severe wear and tear of this great and cold
journey, the case suffered little damage, and the remaining
contents were quite unaffected by exposure to every variety
of climate.

Another interesting ' Tabloid ' Medicine Chest is that which
belonged to Dr. Charles Burland, who reported that it was
used during a year's journey through Cashmere, Tibet, Buj.^^165
the high ranges of the Himalayas, and encountered a vast
amount of rough usage by transport on the backs of coolies,
elephants, camels, bullocks, etc. Intense cold in high
latitudes on the Himalayas, as well as the heat and moisture
of Indian monsoon weather in the lowlands, equally
failed to affect its contents adversely.

Sir Sven Hedin whose remarkable achievement in the
exploration of Central Asia, when he set foot in one of the
sacred forbidden cities of Tibet, is well known, took with him
on his journey across the Himalayas, a ' Tabloid ' Medicine
Chest, and, in his fascinating book "Trans-Himalaya," he
speaks in the highest terms of the utility and completeness
of the equipment.

To this enterprising explorer his 'Tabloid' Medicine
Chest was of great use, not only in providing medical treat-
ment for his followers and himself on their long and

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

perilous march, but also in his diplomatic relations with the
great Tashi-Lama.

We are indebted to the courtesy of his publishers, Messrs.
Macmillan, for permission to quote the following description
by Sir Sven Hedin of the presentation of his ' Tabloid '
Medicine Chest as an offering of friendship, in accordance
with Oriental custom, to the venerated chief of the Buddhist
religious community at Tashi-Lunpo: —

" ' Bombo Chimbo ' [the name by which Dr. Sven Hedin
was known] , we know that you are a friend of the Tashi-
Lama and we are at your service."

' ' When we had conversed for two hours I made a move
to leave him, but the Tashi-Lama pushed me back on to a
chair and said, ' No, stay a little longer.' Now was the
time to present my offering. The elegant English
Medicine Case was taken out of its silk cloth, opened
and exhibited, and excited his great admiration and
lively interest ; everything must be explained to him.
The hypodermic syringe in its tasteful case, with all
its belongings, especially delighted him. Two monks of the
medical faculty were sent for several days running to write
down in Tibetan the contents of the various ' Tabloid '
boxes and the use of the medicines."

TABLOID' MEDICAL EQUIPMENT FOR A
SPORTING TOUR

MR. ROOSEVELT IN AFRICA

Mr. Roosevelt on the occasion of his famous shooting
expedition into Africa, took with him, in accordance with
the precedent set by so many travellers in the Dark
Continent, a " Congo " No. 251 'Tabloid ' Medicine Chest.
His Medical Officer, Colonel E. A. Mearns, upon the return
of the party, pronounced the outfit " very satisfactory
and useful."

436

HISTORICAL MEDICAL EQUIPMENTS

From almost all parts of the globe similar testimony to the
durability and utility of ' Tabloid ' equipments comes to
hand, two typical reports are appended : —

Extract from the report of R. F. RAND, Esq., M.D.,
F.R.C.S., Principal Medical Officer, British South Africa
Company : —

We have had Burroughs Wellcome & Co.'s "Congo" Chests,
fitted with ' Tabloid ' medicines, in daily use during the occupation
of this country. They have proved of inestimable service.
Extract from the report of the late W. H. CROSSE, M.D.,
M.R.C.S., Principal Medical Officer, British Royal Niger
Company : —

All these ' Tabloid ' drugs are so good it is impossible for me to
speak more highly of one than another. They are all of the very
best quality, each drug is accurately described, and reliable.
To the traveller these preparations are simply invaluable, and
I would strongly advise everyone coming out to the Tropics
to get a full supply of ' Tabloid ' medicines.

BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co. have for many years made
a special study of the requirements of travellers and
expeditions, not only in respect of compactness, portability
and permanence, but also in the selection of remedies study of medicines
necessary to combat the maladies prevalent in every clime, s"lta>le for every
from the Arctic to the Antarctic. In the course of their
long experience in the medical equipment of exploring,
military and sporting expeditions they have acquired a large
fund of special information on this subject, which is always
at the service of medical practitioners who may be called
upon to act as expeditionary medical officers, or to give
advice as to the supplies necessary for any climate.

' Tabloid ' Brand Medicine Cases contain, in a small
space, a complete outfit of pure drugs in doses of extreme
accuracy. They can be carried in the pocket, in the EmerKency Cases

J for pocket,

carnage or motor-car, or on the cycle, their contents cycle, motor or
being always ready for use in emergencies. They are carriage
specially valuable to the country practitioner, who is often
called upon to cover long distances, and who would
experience great difficulty in carrying or obtaining supplies
of such medicines as he may desire to administer
promptly, were it not for the convenience and portability
of ' Tabloid ' Brand Medicine Cases.
437

?&e ' TABLOID' BRAND

PLEATED COMPRESSED

BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS

Pleated Compressed Bandages and Dressings were originated
and introduced by Burroughs Wellcome & Co.

•TABLOID' BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS provide the means
of applying strictly scientific treatment, and, in cases of
accident, enable those on the spot to render first-aid treat-
ment should medical assistance be unavailable or
delayed. Their use in such emergencies may prevent
serious complications which frequently arise in minor
accidents, and from the neglect of wounds, abrasions, etc.

BAN'D^K

,-2sysi

Graphic representation showing relative bulk of an ordinary

and a ' Tabloid ' Bandage, each 6 yds. x .2-1 2 in.

(One-half actual size)

Ideal for
general

' TABLOID ' Bandages and Dressings are made of materials
of the finest quality, very highly compressed. Each is
enclosed in an efficient protective covering, thus securing
freedom from all risk of contamination. For all purposes,
whether at home or when travelling, they are superior
to the ordinary varieties and their advantages are obvious.

NOTE. — A further important advance, original with B. W. & Co.,
is the issue of these 'Tabloid' Bandages and Dressings— sterilised.

"The strong thing is the just thing"

Carlyle

' Tabloid ' marks the work of
Burroughs Wellcome and Company.

The use of the word is to enable
the prescriber, dispenser and patient
to get the right thing with one short
word, instead of the firm's long name.

If another maker apply the word
to his product, the act is unlawful.
' Tabloid ' is our trade mark.

If a vendor disregard it, in dispens-
ing or selling, the act is unlawful—
for the same reason.

We prosecute both offenders rigor-
ously, in the interest of prescribers,
dispensers, patients and ourselves.

Please inform us of any instance
of either offence.

BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co.

439

440

Bv CHEMICAL I N i> r s T K v \V K T H R i v K

o •'-'

BIRD'S-EYE VIEW OF WELLCOME C 1. 1/ B AND INSTITUTE
BUILDINGS AND GROUND s

442

THE WELLCOME CLUB AND INSTITUTE

And all this house was peopled fair
With sweet attendance, so that in each part
With lovely sights were gentle faces found,
Soft speech and willing service ; each one glad
To gladden, pleased at pleasure, proud to obey."

Sir Edwin Arnold

• The true veins of wealth are purple — not
in rock, but in flesh—and the final out-
come and consummation of all wealth is
in producing as many as possible full-
breathed, bright-eyed and happy-hearted

creatures."

Rusk in

444

OBJECTS OF THE WELLCOME CLUB AND
INSTITUTE

From the first, Welfare Work has been a special feature
with the firm. This Club and Institute is a part of the
general scheme, and was founded for the benefit of the
employees of BURROUGHS WELLCOME & Co., amongst
whom are included a large number of professional scientific
workers. The premises consist of the old manor house
formerly known as Acacia Hall, together with other
buildings which provide libraries, reading rooms, assembly
rooms and a gymnasium. These are surrounded by an
extensive park through which the river Darent runs.

The objects of the club are — to promote harmony and
happy social intercourse amongst the employees and to
supply them with a pleasant resort out of business hours
— to encourage mental and physical recreation by means of
music, literary and other entertainments, technical and
other instruction classes with occasional lectures, and
athletics, field sports and games.

The Executive Committee of the club regulates the
conduct of the club and controls the use of the river
for boating, swimming, fishing, etc., as well as the
gymnasium, library, museum, baths, sports fields, games
and various other features. All suitable technical journals
and a large selection of newspapers, magazines, etc., aie
available in the reading rooms.

All employees willing to attend the DARTFORD TECHNICAL
INSTITUTE have their fees paid, and the firm gives
prizes through the Institute for proficiency in the technical
subjects in which it is interested.

the
only

INAUGURATION OF THE
WELLCOME CLUB AND
INSTITUTE, JUNE 24, 1899

(Reprint from Press Report)

NE of the most interesting events which
have taken place in the town of Dartford
for many years past was the opening of
the Wellcome Club and Institute. When
it is remembered that the prosperity of
the town is so closely identified with that
of its greatest industry, it is not surprising
that Saturday's event evoked so much
enthusiasm throughout the district. Messrs.
Burroughs Wellcome & Co. have always
been recognised as model employers, and
events of the day bore eloquent testimony not
to this kindly consideration of the welfare of

their employees, but also to the precision, exactness and
marvellous organisation which have always characterised
their work.

The club has been founded by Mr. Wellcome, the head
of the firm, to provide the employees with opportunities
for recreation, and for promoting technical education.
With these ends in view, he acquired the Manor House,
commonly known as Acacia Hall, together with its beautiful
and extensive grounds, through which flows the river
Darent. The manor house itself and the adjoining
buildings have been elaborately fitted and furnished to
meet the new requirements. A large gymnasium and
extensive baths and lavatories with the most perfect modern
fittings have been built, and the grounds beautifully laid
out for the purposes of enjoyment and recreation.

\jk,

,\vj !\ ^AliPH*r

448

WELLCOME CLUB AND INSTITUTE

No pains or expense have been spared in any direction,
and it is doubtful if there is any body of employees in
the world which can boast of so magnificent a club and
pleasure park.

THE DAY'S PROCEEDINGS

The proceedings on Saturday were favoured with perfect
weather, and great credit is due to those responsible for
the arrangements, which were admirably carried out. At
ii a.m., immediately after the special train conveying
the London visitors steamed into Dartford station, the
day's programme commenced with a fire drill at the
firm's works and laboratories. From the station plat-
form an excellent view was obtained. Sir Hiram Maxim,
the distinguished engineer, who was present, timed the
display and stated that the streams of water from four
principal points were in full play within two minutes of
the sounding of the alarm which called out the firemen.

SERVICE AT THE PARISH CHURCH

The company then proceeded to the historic old
Parish Church, which was quickly filled by the visitors
and the firm's employees. The service, conducted by the
Rev. E. P. Smith, Vicar of Dartford, was, although
simple and undenominational in character, a beautiful
and impressive ceremony, in which were appropriately
included the following texts : —

" Bear ye one another's burdens, and so fulfil the law of
Christ."— Gal. vi. 2.

"And that ye study to be quiet, and to do your own business
and to work with your own hands, as we commanded you ; that ye
may walk honestly towards them that are without, and that ye may
have lack of nothing." — / Thess. iv. It and 12.

The service over, the party, headed by visitors
and the principal members of the staff, accompanied
Mr. Wellcome from the church to the gates of the club,
where Mr. Sudlow, the general manager, presented his
chief with a golden key.

WELLCOME CLUB AND INSTITUTE

Mr. Sudlow said: "Mr. Wellcome, the members of
the management in London and at Dartford beg your
acceptance of this key as a memento of this very
interesting occasion."

Mr. Wellcome unlocked and swung open the gates,
saying: " I declare this Club and Institute now open, and
may God bless and prosper it." The visitors were then
conducted over the club buildings and through the grounds,
which were much admired.

THE LUNCHEON

At 12.30 an adjournment was made for luncheon. About
eleven hundred sat down to an excellent repast in an
enormous marquee erected in the club grounds, all the
company, except a few visitors, being employees and
wives of employees. Mr. Wellcome acted as chairman
and Mr. Sudlow as vice-chairman. After the loyal toasts —

THE TOAST OF THE DAY

" THE EMPLOYEES — SUCCESS TO THE WELLCOME CLUB
AND INSTITUTE"

THE CHAIRMAN said : " Most of those assembled here
to-day are employees of the firm. People often speak to
me with wonderment at the good relations which exist
between the firm and its employees, and the explanation
which I have always been able to give in reply to such
comments is that there is mutual consideration. It is and
always has been the policy of the firm to consider the
welfare of everyone associated with it, and by our bearing,
our warmth of feeling, and our interest in the welfare of
our employees we have won consideration from them ; and
we have a corps of employees, which, I am proud to say,
I believe surpasses any similar body of people employed by
any other firm in the world.

452

WELLCOME CLUB AND INSTITUTE

" By our care in selecting those who possess not alone the
required talents and qualifications, but who are also in hearty
sympathy with us in our unique work, and by fostering
mutual regard, we secure not only the hand work, but the
heart work, of those who are associated with us. We
have not only efficiency and devoted zeal amongst our great
chiefs who form our Managerial Staff, and in the
distinguished Directors of my Chemical Research Labora-
tories and of the Physiological Research Laboratories,
but also expert workers as Heads of Departments, and
again in the personnel of their staffs, and yet again amongst
the rank and file. I must pay a special tribute to the
efficiency of the Ladies' Departments, so ably presided
over by the talented Lady Superintendent, ably supported
by a highly-qualified staff of lady assistants, some of whom
are efficient scientific workers.

"It is peculiarly gratifying to me to-day, in inaugurating
this club, to feel that I meet with those associated with me
heart to heart. A strong spontaneous expression has come
to me from the employees, which accords perfectly with my
own ideas and sentiments, that this club should not be
regarded as a charitable institution, but should be self-
supporting. I want it to be a resort and meeting-place
for the promotion of harmony and happiness amongst the
employees — an institution for mental and physical recreation
and development, where all shall be knitted closer together
in personal friendship. I am certain that a charitable
institution, or what is usually so-called, is not what we
want. None of the employees of Burroughs Wellcome & Co.,
I am thankful to say, are in need of charity. They are
self-respecting, self-reliant and self-supporting, and I want
them always to continue so. I am doing, and shall do,
all I can practically to facilitate the work of organisation
and equipment. The premises, suitably furnished and
maintained, I am very gratified to offer for the purposes
of the club and institute.

" I rely upon the members working hand in hand and heart
to heart to make a success of this institution on a self-

->- -^ --- "-x -•* ^k »r--V v

**/i T ' ' 'if * *W*/*

-,.• ,f

B R I !> G E OVER THE D A R E X T

Connecting the lawn with the orchard, garden and playing fields

454

WELLCOME CLUB AND INSTITUTE

supporting basis. It is my strong desire that every employee
will become a member of the club and institute. We shall
have an administrative committee, but also every member
of the club should regard himself or herself as a member
of a grand committee with duties to perform. It is
essential to the success of this club that the members
should all strive to bury every selfish desire in order to
promote the happiness of their associates. We had some
beautiful texts this morning during the inaugural service
at the church. I want to recall one — ' Bear ye one
another's burdens.' We know that those who seek their
own selfish gratification in this world are the least happy,
and those who try to bear each other's burdens and to
assist each other, get the greatest happiness to be found in
this life. Following such a course requires self-sacrifice,
and I hope everyone will keep this text in view, and that
it will be the first and constant thought and endeavour
of members of this club and institute to make others happy.

" I cannot sufficiently express to the members of the
Management at London and Dartford, who have presented
me with a golden key with which to unlock the gates of
this club and institute, how deeply touched I am by this
expression of their kindness. I am always receiving kind
consideration and support from these, my valued associates.
I shall always treasure this jewel. Those beautiful giant
storks, in antique bronze, which grace the fountain
immediately within the entrance to the grounds, were
presented to us by Mr. Lloyd Williams, of the \Vorks
Management. We all deeply appreciate his generous gift
of these superb works of art. Let us drink heartily the
toast ' The Employees, and Success to the Wellcome
Club and Institute,' and I associate with the toast the
name of Mr. R. Clay Sudlow, our esteemed General
Manager, the oldest member of our staff, and my
invaluable right-hand support in the direction of this
business."

MR. R. CLAY SUDLOW replied: "Before I refer to
the toast that has been so very kindly proposed from the

THE GARDEN CREEK
Is a tributary of the Darent, dividing the orchard from the kitchen garden

WELLCOME CLUB AND INSTITUTE

chair, I believe I shall be expressing the feelings not
only of the employees, whom I am very proud to represent,
but also of the visitors who have honoured us with
their presence, when I say how glad we are to have
Mr. Wellcome with us to-day in renewed health. He is
the hardest worked and the hardest working member of
our large community, and it is a matter for very sincere
rejoicing that, after another twelve months of incessant
thought and labour in the conduct of this business,
he is able to preside over us on this unique occasion,
this red-letter day in the annals of the firm, with his
accustomed force and vigour.

"I cannot but think that the knowledge gained by us
here this morning as regards the extent of the provision made
for our comfort and happiness, of the advantages and
privileges secured to us by this club and institute, is a
perfect revelation. The idea of this club, as we all
know, originated with Mr. Wellcome. It is absolutely
his creation, and we owe him a very deep and lasting debt
of gratitude for the initiation of the scheme, and for the
immense amount of thought and study that he has so
ungrudgingly given, in order to make this club perfect
and complete in every detail.

" If I mistake not, our visitors have already come to
the conclusion that to be an employee of the firm of
Burroughs Wellcome & Co. is to occupy a very happy
and a verv privileged position. As the oldest member
of that body — next year I shall attain my majority
in Mr. Wellcome's service — I am glad to assure our
visitors that their conclusion is an absolutely just one.
Mr. Wellcome has proved himself a master whom it
is at once a pride, a pleasure, and an honour to serve,
and there are many of us here present to-day who,
having given him our best, feel that we fall very short
of the service that we would desire to render him.

" Mr. Wellcome, you have told us that you do not want,
and that you do not look for thanks, but I do hope that

457

THE SPORTS FIELD
The first of the playing fields

458

WELLCOME CLUB AND INSTITUTE

you will allow us to express our very deep appreciation of
your generous kindness in placing this club at our disposal,
of the personal feeling you have thrown into the under-
taking by loaning to the club many of those treasures
that you have been at such pains during many years to
collect, and of your friendly goodwill in allowing us, in
accordance with our unanimous wish, to call this club by
your own name. We sincerely hope that you will be spared
for many years to witness, and to rejoice in, the complete
fulfilment of the high ideal that you have formed with
regard to your employees and may that realisation be
brought about in a great measure by means of the
Wellcome Club and Institute, so happily and so successfully
inaugurated to-day."

TOAST: "THE FIRM."

PROFESSOR JOHN ATTFIELD, F.R.S., said : "I have the
great honour of asking you to drink to the continued
prosperity of the firm of Messrs. Burroughs Wellcome & Co.
I assume that everyone present is interested in the leading
work of this firm, which is the association of scientific and
commercial pharmacy.

"The firm is distinguished in many ways. It is dis-
tinguished for its progressive spirit. I look at the various
journals of pharmacy and medicine that are published in our
Colonies and India, as well as those published in the United
Kingdom, and I never take up one but I find the mention,
and sometimes a very long mention too, of this firm.
A second great characteristic of the firm is the entire
reliability of all the articles it sends out I am sure no one
could have followed its development without noticing the
wonderful originality that has always characterised it ; and
I may add that all this is chiefly due to the present
head of the firm, Mr. Wellcome, and his wonderful skill in
organisation in every department.

" Talking of organisation, we who are here to-day as
visitors, must, I am sure, have been charmed by the
evidence of organisation which we have seen from the time

-160

WELLCOME CLUB AND INSTITUTE

we left Charing Cross till the present moment. The great
comfort of the arrangements of that special train that was
provided for us ; and, when we had arrived at Dartford
station, the very interesting fire alarm drill, with its
wonderful evidence of promptitude and precision ; the
extremely beautiful and, I may add, poetic inauguration
service at the church, and the interesting, though it has
been termed formal, opening of the Club and Institute,
by Mr. Wellcome. I was very proud indeed, seeing that
I have known the principals of the firm for so many years,
and have watched their progress, to be the first
one welcomed on this occasion by Mr. Wellcome when he
opened the gates with that beautiful golden key, which
has been presented to him by his managers.

" I feel sure you will respond to this toast for, perhaps, a
deeper reason than I have offered you up to the present time,
and this is the spirit which characterises this firm from
beginning to end, and which I take to be, first, the promotion
of scientific and commercial research, and secondly, the
promotion of good-fellowship amongst all the employees.
Now, here I venture to speak, as Mr. Wellcome said, from
the heart to the heart, because of my extreme interest in all
that relates to research in pharmacy and the promotion of
friendly intercourse amongst those who follow that calling.
It is now 36 years since a few of us assembled in a very
small room at Newcastle, and ventured to start an association
(The British Pharmaceutical Conference) having objects
which I find reflected here to-day — that is, the promotion of
research in connection with pharmacy, and the promotion
of good fellowship amongst the followers of that calling.
I allude to it as I want to remind you once more that
the objects of that society, which we ventured to set
forth as objects that could be followed by the principals
and by the employees of every pharmacy in this
country, are the principles which are so successfully
prosecuted by the firm of Burroughs Wellcome & Co.

" I cannot but rejoice and congratulate Mr. Wellcome on
the fact that, in addition to his organisation of scientific

462

WELLCOME CLUB AND INSTITUTE

and commercial research coupled with good fellowship, as
indicated by this club, financial success, which has been
abundantly deserved, has been realised.

"I must allude, before I sit down, to one other great
pleasure that has forced itself upon me, though I must
not say much about it, because a compliment to myself
is in it, and that is that in every department of this great
firm I find myself here to-day welcomed by my old pupils.
Their merits have been realised by this firm, and I can
assure them, though I am perfectly certain they need
no such assurance, that the men they have obtained from
the Bloomsbury Square Laboratories and Lecture Rooms
were some of our brightest ornaments during the whole
time I was connected with that Institution, viz., from 1863
to 1896. I come here and I find Mr. Lloyd Williams,
Dr. Jowett, Mr. Carr, and many others — but really they
are too numerous to mention — all old students who
distinguished themselves at Bloomsbury Square, now
occupying prominent and responsible positions in this firm.

" On all these grounds— and you will see I have
given you a wealth of reasons — I heartily offer the toast of
Messrs. Burroughs Wellcome & Co., and I will associate
with the toast the name of the chief ornament of the firm,
Mr. Henry S. Wellcome."

Mr. WELLCOME replied : " No one could fail to be
deeply gratified by the honour Professor Attfield has done
to our firm and to me. I, as a youth, took my first lessons
in chemistry from Professor Attfield's text-book. This great
master led my first steps in gaining a knowledge of
chemistry, and I feel it a peculiar honour that he should
have paid such a tribute to the results of the efforts to
which I have devoted my life.

" Professor Attfield touched upon one feature of our
work which is especially dear to me, that is my two
Scientific Research Laboratories. We are sometimes asked

464

WELLCOME CLUB AND INSTITUTE

to say more about what is being done there. Our products
constantly indicate to the profession important results. But
you are not likely to learn the details of all our doings in
the outside world. There is much extremely important
work going on in these research laboratories of the
highest scientific and practical importance — work that is
satisfactory to us as marking progress and which promises us
still greater advancement. The greatest work is sometimes
done silently."

TOAST: "THE PRESS AND VISITORS."

THE CHAIRMAN said : " We are honoured by the presence
of distinguished visitors from the four quarters of the
globe, and some of these are old and intimate personal
friends of mine, who have strengthened me in my work
by their counsel and their friendship. There are those of
the Press here who have not failed when we have done
anything that merited it to chronicle it, and this has
been greatly to our advantage. We have only asked to be
treated on our merits, and we have been treated justly by
the Press. I will ask you to drink very heartily to the toast
of The Press and the Visitors, connecting with the toast
the name of Dr. Creasy, of the British Medical Journal."

DR. CREASY replied : " It is a very great privilege to be
the guest of a firm like this. It is a privilege, moreover,
because this firm is one that has gained, and gained rightly,
the highest repute in the world for good scientific work of
every description. What the Press says is only what is
due to the splendid work that is done by the firm."

ENTERTAINMENTS

Shortly after luncheon an adjournment was made to the
sports field for a pretty floral maypole dance by a group of
lady employees. This was followed by athletic sports,
most of the events of which were very keenly contested and
watched with intense interest. Tea was then served in the
great marquee.

WELLCOME CLUB AND INSTITUTE

In the evening there were well-contested aquatic sports,
and a graceful and artistic musical bicycle ride by lady
employees, the cycles being elaborately decorated with
flowers. The presentation of the prizes followed, and the
day's entertainment culminated in a magnificent display
of fireworks and an illumination of the grounds. The
twinkling of hundreds of fairy lights effectively arranged
throughout the grounds, the glow of Chinese lanterns
everywhere among the trees, and the flood of coloured light
from the fireworks, combined to form an entrancing spectacle,
which was further enhanced by the quivering reflections
in the river and lake. It formed a delightful setting to the
final events of a day which was as enjoyable as it was
unique in the history of chemical industry.

The absolute precision with which every item in the
programme, from early morning until nearly midnight,
was carried out, was evidence of a most complete and
painstaking organisation, and was commented upon by
scientific visitors as typical of the firm's remarkable
scientific exactness in other directions.

The Wellcome Club and Institute thus happily in-
augurated in 1899 has continued to thrive during the last
twelve years, and has formed an attractive centre for social
recreation and intellectual intercourse for the employees of
the firm. Associated with it are now several subsidiary
societies and sports clubs, all conducted by committees
appointed by their respective members, and affording a
congenial sphere of activity for widely differing tastes.
These include the Philharmonic, Photographic and Horticul-
tural Societies, the Hockey Club, the Ladies' Hockey Club,
Croquet, Tennis and Cricket Clubs. There is also a very
successful Book Club and Entertainment Committee which
periodically concerns itself with fetes, garden parties, con-
certs and other social events.

469

470

472

473

474

476

477

WHOLESALE CHEMISTS' AND DRUGGISTS' CRICKET
CHAMPIONSHIP, LONDON

Won by the WELLCOME CRICKET CLUB five years in succession

During these five years the Club's record in the championship

matches was —
Won 31 Drawn 1 Lost 3

At the end of the five years the Club withdrew from competition

THE
GREEK
TEMPLE

WELLCOME CLUB AND INSTITUTE

INDEX

PAGE

Abercromby, Sir Ralph ... 129

Aberdeen, The Earl of ... 163

Aconite in flower ... ... 406

Adamson, Sir Harvey 1H6

Adapa 280

Aeroplane (Bleriot) used by

Grahame-White 387

Aeroplane (Cody) 385

Aeroplane (Howard Wright)

used by Sopwith ... ... 388

Aeroplane i Keith-Davies) ... 38H
Agra and Oudh, The United

Provinces of 182, 183

Airship " Clement-Bayard II." 382

Airship, The " America " ... 383

Airship. The " Willows " ... 384

Alberta 235,236

Albert-Azzo II 10

Albinus 36

Alexandra, H.M. the Queen,

with her family 16

Alfred the Great 84

Allardyce, W. L., Esq. ... 221

" America " Airship 383

Amherst, Lord 119

Antient King, Coronation of 60

Anderson, Sir John 191

Anglo-Saxon Coronation Stone 44

Anson, Lord George 118

Anti-tetanus Serum 324

Antitoxin Units 315

Antivenene 323

Apparatus for Distillation —

XV century 290

Aquatic Sports 473

Arctic and Antarctic Explorations,

Medical Equipments in ... 428

Ashanti 423

Ascension 220, 221

Asquith, The Rt. Hon. H. H. 156

Australia 255

Aviators, First-Aid for ... 377

Awards . .. 376

Bacterial Vaccines
Bactericidal Sera
Bahamas

... 328
... 326
239, 240

PAGE

Baker, Sir E.N 181

Balfour, The Rt. Hon. A. J . 162

Barbados 244

Barber Surgeon's Shop ... 284

Basutoland 204

Beaconsfield, Earl of 136

Bechuanaland 205

Bekwai.The King of 396

Belladonna 402-404

Bell, Sir H. Hesketh 214

Benbow, Admiral 117

Bengal 180, 181

Beresford, Admiral Lord ... 148

Bermuda 250,251

Birrell, Rt. Hon. Augustine ... 160

Blake, Admiral US

Blood-Pressure Tracings 342, 344

Bombay 179,180

Borneo 193

Bosanquet, Admiral Sir W. H. 261

Botha, General Louis 197

Boyle, Sir Cavendish 219

Bridge over the Darent ... 454

British Empire 153,154

British Guiana 246-248

British Honduras ... 248-250

British Isles 155-166

Brooke, Rajah 194

Brooks, Ernest, Photographer 394

Methods of Development ... 399

Brunswick, House of 10

Buckingham Palace 20

Buddhism, The Rise of ... 173
Bulyea, Hon. G. H. V. ... 236

Burland, Dr. Charles 435

Burma 185, 186

Burroughs Wellcome & Co.

Foreign & Colonial Houses of

364, 366, 368, 370
Burroughs Wellcome & Co.,

London Offices of 362

Burroughs Wellcome & Co.,

The work of 361

Calcutta 174

Campbell, Colin 135

479

PAGE

Canada 225

Canute, Coronation of ... 55
Cape of Good Hope ... 199, 200

Cape Town 198

Carmichael, Sir T.D.G., Bt. 260
Carpenter. Captain G. ... 221
Central Africa, Medical

Equipments in 416

Central Provinces and

Berar 186, 187

Certainty in Photographic

Exposure 392

Ceylon 188, 189

Chamberlain, Joseph 140

Chamberlain, Rt. Hon. Austin 164

Charles 1 100

Charles II 101

Charles II., Coronation of ... 73

Chavez, Sefior 381

Chelmsford, Lord 259

China, Medical Equipments in 424
Chinese Barber at Work ... 396
Churchill, Rt. Hon. W. S. ... 158

Clarke, Sir G. S 179

" Clement-Bayard II." ... 382
Clive.Lord ... 122, 123, 176
Club House ... 446, 450, 460
Cody, Mr. S. F. and his

Aeroplane 385

Cold Storage Chamber ... 252
Colonial Conference, The ... 252
Colour effects by Staining

Photographs, Illustrations of

opposite page 400
Commons, The House of ... 27
Compressed Drugs, History of 374
Connaught, H.R.H the Dukeof 18
Connaught, H.R.H. the Duke

of, at the Grave of Cecil

Rhodes 394

Cook, Captain 128

Coronation, Antient Egyptian 50

Coronation Chairs 45, 46

Coryndon, R. T., Esq. ... 206
Creagh, General Sir O'Moore 177
Crowns, Some Famous ... 42
Cyprus 169, 170

Daguerre

Dalhousie, Marquis of

Dane, Sir Louis W. ...

Datura Metel

David, Coronation of...
Davison, W. E., Esq....

Dhanwantari

Denham, Hon. D. F. ...
Denton, Sir G. C.
Developer, ' Rytol ' ...
De Waal, His Honour N.

Digitalis

Diphtheria Statistics ...
Diploma, A XVI century
Drake, Sir Francis
Dudley, The Earl of ...
Dumb-bell Exercises ...

PAGE

293
139
184
406
51
220
283
263
208
392
199
405
317
286
114
254
470

Early British King, Corona -

tion of 53

Early King, Coronation of ... 54
East Africa Protectorate 215, 216
Eastern Bengal and Assam

181, 182

East India Company 176

Edgar, Coronation of ... 56

Edward 1 92

,, Coronation of ... 64

Edward II 93

,, Coronation of ... 67

Edward III 94

. 95
. 97
. 71
. 108
80,81
85

Edward IV

Edward VI

,, Coronation of
Edward VII

,, Coronation of

Edward the Confessor

,, ,, Coronation of 57

Egerton, Sir Walter 212

Egypt, Medical Equipments

in 420

Egyptian Medical Equipment,

Antient 410

Elizabeth 98

,, Coronation of ... 72

Emin Pasha 419

English King, Coronation of 61

PAGE

Equipments, First-Aid ... 375

Equipments, Medical 374, 375
Ergot, Active principles

of 341, 346

Falkland Islands ... 221, 222

Fiji 270, 271

Fire Brigade 440

Firelight Study, opposite page 401

Fisher, Admiral Lord ... 147
Flights by Airship or

Aeroplane 379-389

Forget, Hon. A. E 235

Frere, Sir Bartle 138

Frobisher, Sir Martin ... Ill

Gallwey, Lieut.-Col. Sir H.L. 222

Gambia 208, 209

Garden Creek, The 456

George I. 103

,, Coronation of ... 75

George II 104

George III 105

,, Coronation of ... 76

George IV 106

,, Coronation of ... 77

George V., H.M. the King ... 13

„ Lineage of ... 9

,, Marriage of ... 17

Gibraltar 167

Girouard, Sir E. P. C. ... 216

Gladstone, Viscount 196

Gladstone, Rt. Hon. W.E. ... 137

Glimpse of the Future ... 389
Gold Coast Colony ... 209,210

Good Catch, A 390

Goold-Adams, Sir J. H. ... 170

Gouin, Sir Lomer 231

Grahame-White, Mr. Claude,

and his Aeroplane 387

Grey, Rt. Hon. Earl 226

Grey, Sir Erlvvard 158

Grey- Wilson, Sir William ... 239

Guelphs, The 9

Gueritz, E. P., Esq 193

Gymnastic Exercises 471

Gymnasium and Assembly

Room 452, 466

PAGE

Haldane, Viscount 160

Halsbury, Lord 164

Harcourt, Rt. Hon. Lewis ... 160

Hardinge, Lord 172

Hare, Sir Lancelot 182

Harold, Coronation of ... 58

Hastings, Warren ... 124, 125

Havelock, Sir Henry 135

Hedin, Sir Sven 435

The Photo-
graphic Equipment of ... 397

' Hemisine ' 346

Hemlock 404

Henry 1 87

Henry II 89

Henry III., Coronation of ... 63

Henry IV., Coronation of ... 68

Henry VII., Coronation of ... 70

Henry VIII 96

Herbs, The Growth of, under

Expert Supervision 407

Herbs, Variation in 403

Hippocrates 285

Historical Medical Exhibition

281-294

Hockey Match 476

Hodgson, Sir F. Mitchell ... 247

Hong-Kong 189, 190

Hood, Viscount 121

Hunter, Sir Archibald ... 167

Hyoscyamus 405

Incubating Chamber 352

India 173

Jackson, Frederick J., Esq. ... 217
Jackson-Harmsworth Arctic

Expedition 429

Jamaica 237, 238

James 1 99

James II., Coronation of ... 74

Jervis, Admiral Sir John ... 130

John 91

Keith-Davies, Mr., and his

Aeroplane 386

Keppel, Viscount 126

King and Queen Consort,

Coronation of 67

481

PAGE

Kitchener, Lieut.-Gen. Walter 251

Kitchener, Viscount 145

Koettlitz, Dr 433

Lansdowne, The Marquis of 164

Laurier, Sir Wilfrid 228

Lawley, Sir Arthur 178

Leeward Islands ... 240, 241

Le Hunte, Sir G. R 245

Lewis, Hon. Sir N.E. ... 264

Library and Club House for

Lady Employees 448

Lloyd George, Rt. Hon. David 158

Lockhart, SirJ. H 190

Lords, The House of 26

Loreburn, Lord 158

Lugard, SirF. J. D 190

Lyttelton, Hon. Arthur ... 164

Madras 177,178

Malay States, The Federated 192

Malta 168, 169

Mallein 333

Manitoba 233,234

Map of the British Isles —

XII century 110

Map of the World ... 150, 151
Map of the King's Tours 276,277

Manning, Sir W. H 218

Mandrakes— XV century ... 291

Markham, Sir Clements ... 432

Marlborough, Duke of ... 116

Marlborough House 21

Mary, H.M. the Queen ... 14

Mauritius 219

" Maine," Hospital Ship ... 425

Maypole Dance 468

May, Sir Francis H 271

McCallum, Sir H. E 188

McGowan, Hon. J. S. T. ... 259

McKenna, Rt. Hon. Reginald 160

McMillan, Hon. Sir D.H. ... 234
Medicine Chest, Smallest in the

World 413

Melbourne 256

Mentu-Hotep 410

Merewether, Sir Edward M. 211

PAGE
Military Medicine Chest of

1588 412

Milton, Sir W.H 207

Moguls, The Great 175

Morocco, Medical Equipments

in 418

Morris, Sir E. P 237

Murray, Hon. G. H 232

Murray, Hon. John 260

Murray, J. H. P., Esq. ... 272

Nansen 429

Napier, Sir Charles James ... 134

Natal 200, 201

National Arms and Heraldic

Emblems 40

Nelson, Viscount 132

New Brunswick ... 232, 233

Newfoundland 236, 237

New South Wales ... 258, 259

New Zealand 269, 270

Nigeria, Northern ... 213, 214
Nigeria, Southern ... 211-213

Nova Scotia 232

Nyasaland 218

Obstacle Race ...
Olivier, Sir Sydney

Ontario

Orange Free State
Organo-Therapy

Ottawa

Outram, Sir James

... 475

... 238

229, 230

. 203

339, 371

... 224

. 135

Papua 271, 272

Parke, Surgeon-Major ... 419

Parliament, The Houses of ... 25

Paterson, Hon. T. W. ... 234

Paulhan, Louis 380

Pauzera, Lieut.-Col 205

Peary, Commander 430

Pentland, Lord 161

Pharmacy Vases — XVI and

XVII century 289

Photography, Chemical Solu-
tions for .. 391

482

PAGE

Photography, Modern

Methods in 391

" Physicke Garden " 407

Physiological Standardisation,

Necessity for 345

Poles, North and South ... 414
Ponting, H. G., the Photo-
graphic Equipment of, for

the Arctic Expedition ... 397

Prescott-Hewett, Sir John ... 183

Price, Mr. Julius 435

Probyn, Sir Leslie 244

Punjab 184, 185

Quarter-Mile Race 474

Quarter-Staff Display ... 472

Queensland 262, 263

Quebec 230, 231

Raleigh, Sir Walter ... 112, 113
Ramsbottom, His Honour

A. E.W 203

Regalia 43

Rhodes, Cecil 141

Rhodesia 206, 207

Rissik, His Honour J. F. B. 202

Richard 1 90

Richard II., Coronation of ... 66

Roberts, Earl 143

Rodney, Admiral Lord ... 120

Roosevelt, Mr 436

Royal Arms of England 38, 39

Royal Exchange 30

Rundle, General Sir L. ... 169

Sandringham 22

Sadler, Sir James Hayes ... 242

St. Andrew 34

St. David 35

St. George 32

St. Helena 222

St. Paul's Cathedral 28

St. Patrick ... 33

Sarawak 194

Saskatchewan 235

Seychelles 220

Scientific Research, Results of 361

PAGE

Scott, Captain 430,431

„ The Photo-

graphic Equipment of ... 397
Shackleton, Sir Ernest H. ... 433

The
Photographic Equipment of 397

Ships of the Desert 3%

Sierra Leone 210, 211

Smythe, His Honour C. J. ... 201

Sports Field, The 458

Solomon, Coronation of ... 52
Sopwith, Mr. T. O. M., and

his Aeroplane 388

Somaliland 214, 215

South Africa, The Union of 197
South Australia ... 261, 262

Stables... 355, 356

Standardisation 403

Standardisation, Methods of 329
Standard, Raising the ... 373

Stanley, Sir H. M 142

Stanley, Sir H. M. ... 415, 417

Steevens, G. W 427

Stephen 88

Stevens, Thomas 421

Stoley, H. C., Esq 204

Straits Settlements 191

Strophanthin 348

Strophanthus 365

Surgical Instruments of the

XV century 287

Swayne, Col. Sir Eric ... 249

Swaziland 205, 206

Sweet-Escott, Sir E. B. ... 241

' Tabloid ' First -Aid ... 377,378
' Tabloid ' First-Aid

inset between pp. 376, 377
' Tabloid ' Photographic

Chemicals 391

' Tabloid ' Photographic

Outfit 396

Tasmania 263, 264

Taylor, Sir W 192

Thorburn, J.F., Esq 210

Thurm, Sir Everardim ... 273
Tibet, Medical Equipments in 422

483

Trademarks of B. W

&Co.

400

Trafalgar Square
Transvaal

... 201,

202

Trinidad

... 245,

246

Tobago
Tower of London

... 245,

246

Tuberculin

334

Tug of War
Tweedie, Hon. L. J.

469
233

Uganda
Under One Flag

... 216,

217
152

Verran, Hon. J 261

Victoria 107,260

Victoria, Coronation of ... 79

Wales, H.R.H. the Prince of 15
Ward, Rt. Hon. Sir Joseph G. 269
Wellcome Chemical Research

Laboratories 297-305

Wellcome Chemical Research

Laboratories, Scientific

Papers published by 306-309
' Wellcome ' Chemical Works 360
Wellcome Club and Institute 442
Wellcome Club and Institute,

Opening of 447

' Wellcome ' Exposure Record

and Diary, The 393

PACK

' Wellcome ' Materia Medica

Farm 403-409

Wellcome Physiologi al

Research Laboratories ... 310
Wellcome Physiologica:
Research Laboratories,
Bird's-Eye View of ... 312

Welfare Work 441

Wei-hai-wei 190

Wellesley, the Marquis .. 131
Wellington, the Duke of ... 133

Wellington ,. 268

Western Australia ... 265, 266
Western Pacific ... 273, 274

Westminster Abbey 24

Westminster Abbey, Visws of

the Interior . ... 47, 48
Whitney, Hon. Sir J. P. ... 229
William the Conqueror. Coro-
nation of 59

William 1 86

William III 102

William IV. and Queen

Adelaide, Coronation of ... 78
Williams, Sir R. Champneys 237

"Willows" Airship 384

Wilson, Sir A. K 146

Wilson, Hon. F 265

Windsor Castle 19

Windward Islands ... 241-243

Wolfe, General 127

Wolseley, Viscount 144

POCKET

iBRARY

DA
32
.3
B87

Burroughs Wellcome & Co,
Crown and realm

m 5

r ** $

25 C

£s> , 3fc

#tf" fc£ *- ~ ite- " h^ t^

ffi S S ft ft

t(fc>

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Crown and realm : a review of the British Empire, its builders and rulers"

See other formats